Encyclopedia of Journalism and Mass Communication 1774695324, 9781774695326

Table of contents :
Cover
Title Page
Copyright
ABOUT THE EDITOR
TABLE OF CONTENTS
List of Figures
List of Abbreviations
Abstract
Preface
Chapter 1 Media and Social Image
1.1. Media’s Role in Establishing the Country’s Image
1.2. Shaping Perspectives Through Media
1.3. Media is Useful in Conveying Concepts and Information
Chapter 2 Women in Journalism and Media
2.1. How Are Women Journalists Treated in the World?
2.2. Limitations Faced By Women Journalists
2.3. Media and Executive Positions Are Dominated By Women
2.4. Places that Women Journalists Shouldn’t Be Sent To
2.5. The Dearth of Female Executives
2.6. Best Practices and Solutions
Chapter 3 Journalism and Business
3.1. Brief Introduction of Journalism And Business
3.2. Primary Types of Journalism
3.3. Informing the Public Verses Making Money
3.4. Drawing the Line Between Journalism and Cooperate Interests
3.5. The Quality of Media Houses and Investors
3.6. Conclusion
Chapter 4 Dangers of Investigative Journalism
4.1. Common Threats to Investigative Journalism
4.2. Journalists Who Have Suffered During the Process of Investigative Journalism
4.3. Steps Media Houses Can Take to Keep Their Investigative Journalists
Chapter 5 Role of Society and Culture in Film
5.1. Introduction
5.2. The Role of Film in the Society
5.3. The Impact of Current Affairs, Social Issues, and Corporate Interests on Film
5.4. Role of Film Awards in Films, Society, and the Industry
5.5. How Different Countries Differ in Their Journalism Practices
5.6. Film as a Mirror of Society
Chapter 6 Propaganda in Media
6.1. Research
6.2. Role of Media in Promoting Violence
6.3. Media Impact in Increasing Cases of Violence, Especially Among the Youths
6.4. Propaganda Models Commonly Followed by Media Houses
6.5. Leakage-Related Controversies
6.6. Misinformation and Fake News
Chapter 7 Privacy and Confidentiality in Journalism
7.1. The Relationship Between Journalism and Confidentiality
7.2. Government Media Policies on Confidentiality
7.3. Freedom of Expression and Media Responsibility
7.4. The Ethical Face of Confidentiality
7.5. Recommendations for Interacting With Others
7.6. Guidelines for the Preservation and Care of Written Material
Chapter 8 The Importance of Advertising on Media
8.1. Introduction
8.2. Advertising as a Means of Earning an Income In Media
8.3. An Ad-Blocking Solution
8.4. Does Advertising Compromise on Media Standards?
8.5. Binding the Direct Communication Relationship Between the Seller and the Buyer
8.6. Leveraging the Right Kinds of Advertising Media
8.7. Problems Associated with the Use of Newspapers in Advertising
8.8. Different Kinds of Outdoor Advertising Formats
Chapter 9 The Future of Journalism
9.1. Social Media, Paparazzi, and Blogging
9.2. Social Media’s Importance in Journalism
9.3. The Rise of Synthetic Media
9.4. The Media’s Third Stage of Growth
9.5. Budget-Friendly Creation of High-Quality Material
9.6. Artificial Advertising and Retailing
9.7. Digitally Illustrating the Dead
9.8. Hybrid Newsrooms, Generational Change, and New Agendas
9.9. New Approaches to News Coverage: Greater Diversity and Less Conflict
9.10. Journalists, Harassment, and the Role of Social Media
9.11. Quality and Accessibility of New Communication Technologies
9.12. New Media Development
9.13. The Internet of Things
Chapter 10 Training Personnel in Mass Media: Both Print and Electronic Media Markets
10.1. Key Research Abilities
10.2. Effective Workplace Verbal Communication Techniques
10.3. Advise on The Best Course of Action
10.4. Interview Techniques and Strategies: How to Get Ready for a Job Interview?
10.5. Fact-Checking
10.6. Ridding the World of Misunderstandings
10.7. Disinformation and Facebook
10.8. International Fact-Checking Day
10.9. Reception
10.10. Pre-Publication Fact-Checking
10.11. Checking Original Reportage
10.12. Education on Fact-Checking
10.13. Books on Professional Fact-Checking
10.14. Verbal/Written Communication
10.15. Tips to Improve Your Verbal Communications
Chapter 11 Monitoring and Conducting Research in Communication, Media, and Information Technology
11.1. The Assessment of Alternate Sources
11.2. Pre-Press Production
11.3. Study of Public Discourse
11.4. Media Effects on Social Issues
11.5. The Role of the Media In Research Uptake
11.6. Using the Media for Research Communications
11.7. Media/Internet-Based Tools and Services for Creating, Sharing and Exchanging Information and Ideas Relevant for Research Uptake
11.8. Importance of Engagement
11.9. Media Being Used as a Method for Improving Study Acceptance or Leading to the Adoption of a Scientific Theory/Idea In Relevance to Research Uptake
11.10. Implications For Resourcing Successful Research Communication
11.11. Key Components Required For Successful Communication
11.12. The Types of Communication Required/Needed for a Successful Research Study
11.13. Engagement with the Private Sector
11.14. Information Monitoring and Evaluation Tools
Chapter 12 Updating Media Personnel on Current Trends in Technological Development
12.1. Introduction
12.2. Streaming Video at any Moment
12.3. Live Broadcast
12.4. Advertisement
12.5. Reading Social Media News Sites Via Rss Feed Aggregators
12.6. Subscription/Download of Podcasts
12.7. Youtube Channel Subscriptions
12.8. Social Media Influencers (SMI) and Gurus
Chapter 13 Partnering With Media Houses to Coproduce Professional Programs
13.1. Strategic Partnerships for Creating Exciting Opportunities
13.2. Creating A Sustainable Competitive Edge Through Media Partnerships
13.3. The Entire Macro Environment of the Media Business
13.4. The Effects of the Media Industry on the Environment and Industry
13.5. How New Media Partnerships Work
13.6. Authentic Content And Inspirational Entertainment Programming
13.7. How-To or Do-It-Yourself Tutorials
13.8. A Compelling Body of Work
Chapter 14 Journalism Ethics: Good News Versus Bad News
14.1. Introduction
14.2. Independence
14.3. Fairness and Impartiality
14.4. Pursuing Justice
14.5. News Compilation
14.6. Selection of Sources
14.7. Interrogation Techniques
14.8. Language
14.9. Truth and Accuracy
14.10. Keeping Records and Taking Notes
14.11. Numbers, Dates, and Names
14.12. Social Media Misinformation
14.13. Archiving Sources
14.14. Humanity
Chapter 15 Audio-Visual Communication
15.1. Types of Audio-Visual Media
15.2. Significance of Audio-Visual Communication
15.3. Audio Visual Technology in Healthcare
15.4. Features of Audio-Visual Communication
Bibliography
Index
Back Cover

Citation preview

本书版权归Arcler所有

本书版权归Arcler所有

本书版权归Arcler所有

Encyclopedia of Journalism and Mass Communication

本书版权归Arcler所有

本书版权归Arcler所有

ENCYCLOPEDIA OF JOURNALISM AND MASS COMMUNICATION

Edited by: Anil Kr. Rai

Publishing

www.societypublishing.com

Encyclopedia of Journalism and Mass Communication Anil Kr. Rai

Society Publishing 224 Shoreacres Road Burlington, ON L7L 2H2 Canada www.societypublishing.com Email: [email protected]

e-book Edition 2023 ISBN: 978-1-77469-587-6 (e-book)

This book contains information obtained from highly regarded resources. Reprinted material sources are indicated and copyright remains with the original owners. Copyright for images and other graphics remains with the original owners as indicated. A Wide variety of references are listed. Reasonable efforts have been made to publish reliable data. Authors or Editors or Publishers are not responsible for the accuracy of the information in the published chapters or consequences of their use. The publisher assumes no responsibility for any damage or grievance to the persons or property arising out of the use of any materials, instructions, methods or thoughts in the book. The authors or editors and the publisher have attempted to trace the copyright holders of all material reproduced in this publication and apologize to copyright holders if permission has not been obtained. If any copyright holder has not been acknowledged, please write to us so we may rectify.

Notice: Registered trademark of products or corporate names are used only for explanation and identification without intent of infringement.

© 2023 Society Publishing ISBN: 978-1-77469-532-6 (Hardcover)

Society Publishing publishes wide variety of books and eBooks. For more information about Society Publishing and its products, visit our website at www.societypublishing.com.

本书版权归Arcler所有

ABOUT THE EDITOR

Dr. Anil Kumar Rai is currently Professor in Mass Media – Mahatma Gandhi Antarrashtriya Hindi Vishwavidyalaya, Wardha (Maharashtra) since 07th July 2009 to till date. He holds Ph.D. in Journalism and Mass Communication from Berhampur University, Berhampur, Orissa. He has been Pro-Vice-Chancellor - Mahatma Gandhi Central University, Motihari, District – East Champaran, Bihar since 29th October 2018 to 17th December 2019. He has also been Vice-Chancellor (I/c) - Mahatma Gandhi Central University, Motihari, District –East Champaran, Bihar since 15th November 2018 (A/N) to 13th April 2019 (F/N). He has attended several positions at different institutions. He has attended Leadership for Academicians Program (LEAP) of Ministry of Human Resource Development (MHRD), New Delhi organized by Banaras Hindu University (BHU), Varanasi, Uttar Pradesh in collaboration with Nanyang Technological University (NTU), Singapore held at Varanasi, Uttar Pradesh (India) from 23rd September 2019 to 6th October 2019; and Singapore from 8th October 2019 to 12th October 2019. He has received several honour/ awards. He has authored and published several books and research papers in national and international publications.

本书版权归Arcler所有

本书版权归Arcler所有

TABLE OF CONTENTS



List of Figures...............................................................................................xiii



List of Abbreviations..................................................................................... xix

Abstract....................................................................................................... xxi Preface................................................................................................... ....xxiii Chapter 1

Media and Social Image............................................................................. 1 1.1. Media’s Role in Establishing the Country’s Image................................. 2 1.2. Shaping Perspectives Through Media................................................... 9 1.3. Media is Useful in Conveying Concepts and Information................... 13

Chapter 2

Women in Journalism and Media............................................................. 17 2.1. How Are Women Journalists Treated in the World?............................ 18 2.2. Limitations Faced By Women Journalists............................................ 23 2.3. Media and Executive Positions Are Dominated By Women................ 27 2.4. Places that Women Journalists Shouldn’t Be Sent To........................... 28 2.5. The Dearth of Female Executives........................................................ 30 2.6. Best Practices and Solutions............................................................... 35

Chapter 3

Journalism and Business........................................................................... 39 3.1. Brief Introduction of Journalism And Business.................................... 40 3.2. Primary Types of Journalism............................................................... 42 3.3. Informing the Public Verses Making Money....................................... 51 3.4. Drawing the Line Between Journalism and Cooperate Interests.......... 55 3.5. The Quality of Media Houses and Investors....................................... 58 3.6. Conclusion........................................................................................ 61

Chapter 4

本书版权归Arcler所有

Dangers of Investigative Journalism......................................................... 63 4.1. Common Threats to Investigative Journalism...................................... 64 4.2. Journalists Who Have Suffered During the Process of Investigative Journalism................................................................... 75

4.3. Steps Media Houses Can Take to Keep Their Investigative Journalists....................................................................................... 78 Chapter 5

Role of Society and Culture in Film.......................................................... 81 5.1. Introduction....................................................................................... 82 5.2. The Role of Film in the Society........................................................... 89 5.3. The Impact of Current Affairs, Social Issues, and Corporate Interests on Film....................................................... 90 5.4. Role of Film Awards in Films, Society, and the Industry...................... 92 5.5. How Different Countries Differ in Their Journalism Practices............. 93 5.6. Film as a Mirror of Society................................................................. 99

Chapter 6

Propaganda in Media............................................................................. 103 6.1. Research.......................................................................................... 105 6.2. Role of Media in Promoting Violence............................................... 105 6.3. Media Impact in Increasing Cases of Violence, Especially Among the Youths......................................................... 111 6.4. Propaganda Models Commonly Followed by Media Houses............ 113 6.5. Leakage-Related Controversies........................................................ 118 6.6. Misinformation and Fake News........................................................ 122

Chapter 7

Privacy and Confidentiality in Journalism.............................................. 127 7.1. The Relationship Between Journalism and Confidentiality................ 128 7.2. Government Media Policies on Confidentiality................................ 135 7.3. Freedom of Expression and Media Responsibility............................. 138 7.4. The Ethical Face of Confidentiality................................................... 146 7.5. Recommendations for Interacting With Others................................. 147 7.6. Guidelines for the Preservation and Care of Written Material........... 148

Chapter 8

本书版权归Arcler所有

The Importance of Advertising on Media............................................... 151 8.1. Introduction..................................................................................... 152 8.2. Advertising as a Means of Earning an Income In Media.................... 155 8.3. An Ad-Blocking Solution.................................................................. 161 8.4. Does Advertising Compromise on Media Standards?........................ 161 8.5. Binding the Direct Communication Relationship Between the Seller and the Buyer.................................................. 163 8.6. Leveraging the Right Kinds of Advertising Media.............................. 164

viii

8.7. Problems Associated with the Use of Newspapers in Advertising..... 169 8.8. Different Kinds of Outdoor Advertising Formats............................... 171 Chapter 9

The Future of Journalism........................................................................ 173 9.1. Social Media, Paparazzi, and Blogging............................................ 176 9.2. Social Media’s Importance in Journalism.......................................... 177 9.3. The Rise of Synthetic Media............................................................. 181 9.4. The Media’s Third Stage of Growth................................................... 183 9.5. Budget-Friendly Creation of High-Quality Material.......................... 183 9.6. Artificial Advertising and Retailing................................................... 184 9.7. Digitally Illustrating the Dead.......................................................... 185 9.8. Hybrid Newsrooms, Generational Change, and New Agendas........ 186 9.9. New Approaches to News Coverage: Greater Diversity and Less Conflict........................................................................... 189 9.10. Journalists, Harassment, and the Role of Social Media................... 191 9.11. Quality and Accessibility of New Communication Technologies.... 192 9.12. New Media Development.............................................................. 193 9.13. The Internet of Things..................................................................... 196

Chapter 10 Training Personnel in Mass Media: Both Print and Electronic Media Markets....................................................................................... 201

本书版权归Arcler所有

10.1. Key Research Abilities.................................................................... 202 10.2. Effective Workplace Verbal Communication Techniques................ 202 10.3. Advise on The Best Course of Action.............................................. 203 10.4. Interview Techniques and Strategies: How to Get Ready for a Job Interview?....................................................................... 206 10.5. Fact-Checking................................................................................ 208 10.6. Ridding the World of Misunderstandings....................................... 210 10.7. Disinformation and Facebook........................................................ 214 10.8. International Fact-Checking Day.................................................... 216 10.9. Reception...................................................................................... 217 10.10. Pre-Publication Fact-Checking..................................................... 219 10.11. Checking Original Reportage....................................................... 220 10.12. Education on Fact-Checking........................................................ 221 10.13. Books on Professional Fact-Checking........................................... 221 10.14. Verbal/Written Communication................................................... 222 10.15. Tips to Improve Your Verbal Communications.............................. 226 ix

Chapter 11 Monitoring and Conducting Research in Communication, Media, and Information Technology.................................................................. 229 11.1. The Assessment of Alternate Sources.............................................. 231 11.2. Pre-Press Production...................................................................... 233 11.3. Study of Public Discourse.............................................................. 234 11.4. Media Effects on Social Issues........................................................ 234 11.5. The Role of the Media In Research Uptake..................................... 235 11.6. Using the Media for Research Communications............................. 236 11.7. Media/Internet-Based Tools and Services for Creating, Sharing and Exchanging Information and Ideas Relevant for Research Uptake.......................................................................................... 238 11.8. Importance of Engagement............................................................ 239 11.9. Media Being Used as a Method for Improving Study Acceptance or Leading to the Adoption of a Scientific Theory/Idea In Relevance to Research Uptake............................... 241 11.10. Implications For Resourcing Successful Research Communication............................................................................ 241 11.11. Key Components Required For Successful Communication.......... 242 11.12. The Types of Communication Required/Needed for a Successful Research Study..................................................... 243 11.3. Engagement with the Private Sector.............................................47 11.4. Information Monitoring and Evaluation Tools.49 Chapter 12 Updating Media Personnel on Current Trends in Technological Development................................................................... 253 12.1. Introduction................................................................................... 254 12.2. Streaming Video at any Moment.................................................... 254 12.3. Live Broadcast............................................................................... 255 12.4. Advertisement................................................................................ 256 12.5. Reading Social Media News Sites Via Rss Feed Aggregators........... 258 12.6. Subscription/Download of Podcasts............................................... 261 12.7. Youtube Channel Subscriptions...................................................... 262 12.8. Social Media Influencers (SMI) and Gurus..................................... 265 Chapter 13 Partnering With Media Houses to Coproduce Professional Programs.... 277

本书版权归Arcler所有

13.1. Strategic Partnerships for Creating Exciting Opportunities.............. 279 13.2. Creating A Sustainable Competitive Edge Through Media Partnerships................................................................................... 284

13.3. The Entire Macro Environment of the Media Business.................... 286 13.4. The Effects of the Media Industry on the Environment and Industry.................................................................................. 286 13.5. How New Media Partnerships Work.............................................. 290 13.6. Authentic Content And Inspirational Entertainment Programming................................................................................ 294 13.7. How-To or Do-It-Yourself Tutorials................................................. 296 13.8. A Compelling Body of Work.......................................................... 298 Chapter 14 Journalism Ethics: Good News Versus Bad News................................... 301 14.1. Introduction................................................................................... 302 14.2. Independence................................................................................ 305 14.3. Fairness and Impartiality................................................................ 309 14.4. Pursuing Justice............................................................................. 311 14.5. News Compilation......................................................................... 311 14.6. Selection of Sources....................................................................... 312 14.7. Interrogation Techniques................................................................ 313 14.8. Language....................................................................................... 314 14.9. Truth and Accuracy........................................................................ 315 14.10. Keeping Records and Taking Notes.............................................. 317 14.11. Numbers, Dates, and Names....................................................... 318 14.12. Social Media Misinformation....................................................... 318 14.13. Archiving Sources........................................................................ 319 14.14. Humanity.................................................................................... 320 Chapter 15 Audio-Visual Communication................................................................ 325 15.1. Types of Audio-Visual Media.......................................................... 326 15.2. Significance of Audio-Visual Communication................................ 340 15.3. Audio Visual Technology in Healthcare.......................................... 344 15.4. Features of Audio-Visual Communication...................................... 346 Bibliography........................................................................................... 349 Index...................................................................................................... 355

本书版权归Arcler所有

xi

本书版权归Arcler所有

LIST OF FIGURES Figure 1.1: Media role in establishing a country Figure 1.2: Shaping perspectives through media Figure 1.3: How are women journalists treated in the world Figure 1.4: Woman Journalist Figure 1.5: Limitations faced by women journalists Figure 2.1: Media women play a crucial role in nation building Figure 2.2: Women debaters shaping perspectives through media Figure 2.3: A young female journalist Figure 2.4: Woman journalist delivering breaking news Figure 2.5: Limitations faced by women journalists Figure 2.6: Places that women journalists shouldn’t be sent to Figure 3.1: Modern day journalism has been intertwined with business with the enterprise being a business itself Figure 3.2: A sample image of the various types of journalism Figure 3.3: News reporting is today the center of business marketing. Not only does it enrich media houses but also helps advertise businesses transmit info from media Figure 3.4: Reviews give a wider insight on specific businesses and further help businesses air out ideas Figure 3.5: Many businesses fear the impact of investigative journalism as it normally tends to uncover the bad about any enterprise Figure 3.6: An overview of columns as a type of journalism Figure 3.7: Feature writing is research oriented and tends to award businesses with the relevant information as to how they perceive their economical feature Figure 3.8: Journalism is entitled to be a public informative media as per UNESCO. However, personal interests seem to shatter this dream Figure 3.9: Dissecting objectivity in journalism Figure 3.10: Independence of journalism is all about their freedom. If businesses do capture media houses, then journalism becomes biased Figure 3.11: Accuracy desires facts and true ideas Figure 3.12: Journalism ought to cover public interests and deploy fairness when encountering cooperate interests

本书版权归Arcler所有

Figure 3.13: When media houses become partisan, then ethical journalism is shattered in the face of corruption and greed Figure 3.14: Media houses tend to be wayward and partisan when approaching investors such that the highest bidder gets the most of advertisement. This leads to unfairness in the sector Figure 4.1: The political atmosphere can negatively affect investigative journalism Figure 4.2: The economic state can affect how investigative journalists do their work Figure 4.3: Those in power use various Figure 4.4: Out of fear journalists have to censor information they give to the public Figure 4.5: Harsh economic times and reduced news agencies contribute to job insecurity among investigative journalists Figure 4.6: Informants can be attacked physical or harm could be done on their family members Figure 4.7: Many investigation journalist have been victims of shootings and bombings Figure 5.1: An image illustrating a society Figure 5.2: An image showing the storage location of a film Figure 5.3: An image illustrating the connection between film and the society Figure 5.4: An illustration of different cultures in films Figure 5.5: An illustration of the influence of film on culture Figure 5.6: An illustration of the Godfather movie Figure 5.7. Image showing a brief summary of the role of film in the society Figure 5.8: An image showing the impact of current affairs on film Figure 5.9: An image showing the Oscars awards Figure 5.10: An illustration of what journalism entails Figure 5.11: An image showing a brief summary of relationship in journalism among different countries Figure 5.12: An image showing a summary on media globalization Figure 5.13: An image illustrating a journalism space Figure 5.14: An image of a quote declaring film as a mirror of society Figure 5.15: An image stating the advantages and disadvantages of movies Figure 6.1: Online news search Figure 6.2: People using smartphones Figure 6.3: Rioters on Capitol Hill Figure 6.4: Smartphone streaming Figure 6.5: TV receivers Figure 6.6: Illustration of reader newspaper

本书版权归Arcler所有

xiv

Figure 6.7: News on a smartphone Figure 6.8: Manipulation and brainwash concept Figure 6.9: Media propaganda illustration Figure 6.10: Glitch fake news Figure 6.11: People reading fake news Figure 6.12: Learning about social media warfare concept Figure 7.1: Paparazzi Figure 7.2: Type writer Figure 7.3: Lock symbol Figure 7.4: Searching through files Figure 7.5. Eavesdropping Figure 7.6: Investigator Figure 7.7: Investigation Figure 7.8: Paparazzi Figure 7.9: Handwriting Figure 7.10: Censored TV Figure 7.11: Shut up shadow Figure 8.1: The importance of advertising on media Figure 8.2: Advertising Figure 8.3: Earning income Figure 8.4: Google Figure 8.5: Facebook Figure 8.6: Advertising Figure 8.7: TV adverts Figure 8.8: Newspaper Figure 9.1: An infographic showing journalists interviewing someone Figure 9.2: A journalist getting ready to present the news Figure 9.3: An infographic showing various journalist recording via microphones Figure 9.4: A smart phone with social media platforms Figure 9.5: A lady using her smart phone as a recorder Figure 9.6: A writer opening her blog Figure 9.7: An infographic showing someone writhing his blog Figure 9.8: A lady reading fake news on her laptop

本书版权归Arcler所有

xv

Figure 9.9: An infographic on the difference between a real picture and a deepfake Figure 9.10: A news presenter presenting the news Figure 9.11: A journalist trying to capture a picture Figure 9.12: The press taking pictures and videos of an event Figure 9.13: A phone recording a video Figure 9.14: A lady recording her podcast Figure 10.1: An article for doing research Figure 10.2: A man taking notes of his research findings Figure 10.3: Fact checking Figure 10.4: An interview between two people Figure 10.5: A research on COVID-19 Figure 10.6: A person being interviewed in a news room Figure 10.7: A man doing research Figure 10.8: Researchers conducting a research Figure 10.9: A media personnel interviewing a member of a rescue team Figure 10.10: A lady writing down her research findings Figure 10.11: Microphones for doing interviews Figure 10.12: A man communicating through writing Figure 10.13: A lady communicating verbally to other people Figure 10.14: Verbal communication between two individuals Figure 10.15: A man being interviewed Figure 11.1: Media research is integral in communication Figure 11.2: Assessment of different media sources Figure 11.3: Media literacy teaching Figure 11.4: Media effects on social issues Figure 11.5: Media is important in research uptake Figure 11.6: Media use in research communications Figure 11.7: Internet-based tools for research and communications Figure 11.8: Engagement in media Figure 11.9: Research uptake needs engagement of social media Figure 11.10: Research requires successful communications Figure 11.11: Interpreting research findings Figure 11.12: Presentation of methodologies Figure 11.13: Engagement with private sector in media

本书版权归Arcler所有

xvi

Figure 12.1: Young female influencer Figure 12.2: Man using laptop Figure 12.3: Boy making vlog Figure 12.4: Social media apps logotypes Figure 12.5: Social networking Figure 12.6: Global stats Figure 12.7: Lady fashion designer Figure 12.8: Women studying charts Figure 12.9: Social media concept Figure 12.10: A woman vlogging Figure 12.11: A lady doing her makeup while streaming Figure 12.12: Social media influencer asking followers to subscribe Figure 13.1: Scenes of a business vlog Figure 13.2: Social network concept Figure 13.3: Businessman having a video conference Figure 13.4: Recruitment concept to hiring Figure 13.5: Social networking concept Figure 13.6: Winner TV interview Figure 13.7: Magazine editors Figure 13.8: Video archives concept Figure 13.9: Meeting room editors and journalists Figure 13.10: Office Figure 14.1: Journalism Figure 14.2: Ethics Figure 14.3: Independence Day in journalism Figure 14.4: Independence Figure 14.5: Fairness and Impartiality Figure 14.6: Pursuing justice Figure 14.7: Truth Figure 14.8: Accuracy Figure 14.9: Humanity Figure 14.10: Accountability Figure 15.1: Journalist preparing audio visual equipment Figure 15.2: Filmstrip projectors display audio-visual content on a flat surface

本书版权归Arcler所有

xvii

Figure 15.3: A digital micro film Figure 15.4: PowerPoint is a popular slide presentation tool Figure 15.5: Equipment used in audio-visual communication Figure 15.6: Doctors communicating through audiovisual devices

本书版权归Arcler所有

xviii

LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS AR

Augmented reality

DOJ

Department of Justice

NGOs

Non-governmental organizations

OPA

Office of Public Affairs

SLAPP

Strategic Litigation against Public Participation

SMI

Social Media Influencers

UGC

User-generated content

VR

Virtual reality

本书版权归Arcler所有

本书版权归Arcler所有

ABSTRACT This volume traces the historical development of print, broadcasting, public relations, and advertising and their impact on society while examining the rapid growth and development of the Internet. It introduces readers to inventors, patents, copyright regulations, screenplay formats, national media regulation laws, and careers in the media industry. At the same time, the course explores how the media reflects and inspires cultural, political, and ethical norms, with an emphasis on different storytelling techniques based on audience and communication style. The volume also explores the role of mass media in creating for audiences. The purpose of this volume is to introduce the reader to the principles, concepts, policies, and practices of the mass media industry (broadcast, Internet, print, and digital communications) and related advertising and public relations industries. Regulations, global impacts, and changes are also discussed.

本书版权归Arcler所有

本书版权归Arcler所有

PREFACE

This volume introduces readers to radio, news, and media advertising. It will allow readers to identify and analyze the information and images they are exposed to as consumers of goods and services and recipients of information from a variety of sources, including print and electronic sources. Journalists work in a variety of media and industries. You’ll find them practicing strategic communication as they work in areas such as advertising, public relations, marketing, healthcare, politics, gaming, and entertainment. They report and write about all types of news and information in today’s fast-growing communications medium. Nearly every company, institution, and organization needs a communications specialist, which presents limitless opportunities for the industry. In addition to journalism knowledge, readers deepen their professional skills and expand their employment opportunities. You should be able to gain access to processes related to document and podcast creation, health communication, historical and cultural studies, international and global studies, investigative journalism, law, magazines, narrative non-fiction writing, public relations, political communication, web, and collection publication design, As well as print and online news coverage. This book provides an overview of the influence and impact of mass media on contemporary life and society. The course covers the historical development of the media as well as current developments and issues. Areas of coverage include newspapers and news, magazine and book publishing, radio and television broadcasting, feature films, recorded music, internet and social media, cable and satellite communications, advertising and public relations, media law, and ethics. Ultimately, readers will increase their knowledge and understanding of the mass communication process and the mass media industry. Other benefits include:

本书版权归Arcler所有

•

Raise awareness of how they interact with these industry and media content to create meaning.

•

Become a more experienced and knowledgeable consumer of media content.

•

Understand the relationship between communication, mass communication, culture, and the people who live in it.

•

Recognize trends in mass media, particularly ownership concentration and conglomeration, globalization, audience fragmentation, outreach, hypercommercialization, convergence, and shifts in the digital distribution of mass media products.

•

Learn about the history and development of individual mass media technologies and the industries and employment opportunities that have developed around them.

•

Expand their understanding of mass communication theory to improve their own media literacy.

•

Demonstrate an understanding of the liberal, regulatory, and ethical issues that apply to the mass media industry and personal use of mass media.

This volume focuses on the collection and dissemination of information in the news. Readers will learn research and interview techniques to gather useful information. Other sections may focus on how to obtain and present this information in an understandable manner in written, video, or audio form. Real-world experience is often included before completing a journalism course. Journalism and Mass Communication students learn how to stay focused for extended periods of time, how to communicate effectively with large groups, and how to visually recognize when a situation might be newsworthy. These skills can help readers cope with stress and other problems in their daily life. A journalist’s knowledge of how to gather information or present it to the public is useful for news organizations and government positions.

本书版权归Arcler所有

xxiv

CHAPTER

1

MEDIA AND SOCIAL IMAGE

CONTENTS

本书版权归Arcler所有

1.1. Media’s Role in Establishing the Country’s Image................................. 2 1.2. Shaping Perspectives Through Media................................................... 9 1.3. Media is Useful in Conveying Concepts and Information................... 13

2

Encyclopedia of Journalism and Mass Communication

1.1. MEDIA’S ROLE IN ESTABLISHING THE COUNTRY’S IMAGE There are two sorts of businesses in the world: those whose primary goal is to make a better product that people will want to buy because it is superior, and those whose primary goal is to discover more efficient ways to persuade consumers to buy the product they are selling. There are examples of both in every sector, but the fledgling area of “place branding” appears to have acquired or inherited an inordinate amount of the latter in a relatively short period. Many of these examples appear to provide something more practical and specific than advice on how to improve a site’s image or reputation—namely, the opportunity to actively promote the destination in print or on television (Wanta et al., 2004). Government officials from various countries frequently inform the author that they have been contacted by “researchers” who are “looking into the possibility of producing a special feature” about their country and its unique tourism and/or investment climate, usually for a well-known international newspaper or business magazine. The researchers in question are usually portrayed as sales agents for a public relations, “communications,” or media sales firm that has been granted permission by a major newspaper to issue sponsored advertising supplements in its name.

Figure 1.1: Media role in establishing a country. Source: https://media.istockphoto.com/photos/female-factory-engineer-checking-the-electrical-panel-picture-id1156888686?k=20&m=1156888686&s=61 2x612&w=0&h=RyilsJf3HbbWoQcUQxvW9BbnXKIK2S0QI3H4GuKYbYg=

本书版权归Arcler所有

Media and Social Image

3

These sales representatives travel the world, persuading inexperienced government officials in poor and least-developed nations to fund, subsidize, or promote such supplements. Despite poverty, crime, civil conflict, sickness, political instability, and corruption, they say that their effort in “nation branding” would elevate their country to a new level of worldwide esteem and recognition. Of course, no proof is ever offered, nor can it be presented, that such results would ever occur; in fact, once made, these sorts of advertising supplements are often tossed in the garbage as soon as the reader reads the newspaper (Wilkinson et al., 2020). Even if some readers pay close attention to them, a single appearance in a sponsored supplement can do very little to change the reader’s perception of a country that the reader may not have heard of before or that is strongly associated in his or her mind with decades of poverty, insecurity, corruption, or violence. In actuality, the reading habits of these supplements are similar to those of automobile brochures, because the vast majority of persons who read them already possess the cars in issue and are merely looking for reassurance that they made the right decision. Similarly, the majority of persons who read an advertisement supplement about a relatively obscure country are likely to be those who already have a reason to be interested in that country: either because they are natives of that country, have family there, or have just been, or want to visit. However, the bulk of public officials, particularly in poorer countries, lack media awareness. Because of their backgrounds in political science or economics, most of them have little to no direct experience in the private sector and no awareness of the arcane techniques of advertising, public relations, media sales, or brand management. Media salespeople will seize every opportunity to use the exciting and enigmatic terminology of “nation branding” and “destination branding,” citing the enormous increase in interest in this critical field, providing examples of stunning TV and print campaigns produced by (very rich) developing countries as evidence of this new trend, and stoking fears that no developing country can afford to remain out of this new global economic arms race (Vlad, 2021). Many of them use passages from this author’s writing in their sales pitches, carefully avoiding the parts where he rails against the evil waste of taxpayer and donor money on pointless propaganda and instead emphasizing

本书版权归Arcler所有

4

Encyclopedia of Journalism and Mass Communication

the importance of a positive national reputation for economic, political, and social developments in a globally interconnected world. Traditional printed newspapers and magazines, as well as traditional broadcast media, are frantically looking for new revenue streams as they strive to avoid extinction. This is due to a decline in revenue from display and recruitment advertising, as well as the availability of limitless, quickly updated news and opinion on the Internet. Given the current scenario, the traditional “Chinese Wall” separating journalism from advertising has crumbled. Not long ago, professional newspapers and television networks took pleasure in the fact that not even their most important sponsors could be confident of receiving frequent or uncritical editorial coverage in the same periodicals in which they advertised (Udomisor & Udoh, 2015). Today, as long as the price is correct and the newspaper or broadcaster follows the guidelines, the field is wide open for virtually any disguised or outright obvious sort of advertorial, product placement, or other types of endorsement (and the law on such matters is, in most countries, a weak form of voluntary self-regulation at best). When an advertising supplement salesperson approached officials from a government that this author advises, he claimed to be a journalist from a renowned publication inquiring into the possibility of incorporating their country in yet another high-profile special report. He instructed them to furnish him with complete information about the nation’s economy, including the names of its biggest firms and contact details for their directors while dangling this potential. He emphasized that their “opportunity” to promote their country would be for a limited time and even gave them a deadline for providing this information. Naturally, this request was absurd; he could have easily found the economic data on Wikipedia in 5 minutes, and asking them to provide contact information for the company directors simply saved him the trouble of compiling his hit list of companies to which he could sell advertising “opportunities” within the supplement. By acquiring their information in this manner, he might even convince the enterprises that their names were given to him by their government, lending credibility and quasi-official support to the operation.

本书版权归Arcler所有

Media and Social Image

5

There were all of the standard snake-oil salesman gimmicks: telling the customer that he has an exclusive opportunity to buy the product because it may not be on sale and that there is only a small chance it will become available; withholding any mention of price until after the customer has paid; making the buyer work hard to “deserve” the product, and claiming that the offer is time-limited.

Figure 1.2: Shaping perspectives through media. Source: https://www.shutterstock.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/ sites/5/2021/04/Social-Cover-1.jpg

The salesman even used a classic “pincer movement” against the officials, writing simultaneously to the nation’s Prime Minister (in much more obeisance-laden tones), praising him for his enlightened vision for the nation is rather evasive terms, quoting one of his recent speeches, and stating that the supplement was timed to coincide with a significant international summit scheduled to take place a few months later. In contrast to the formal letters, this letter made no mention of the necessity for the nation to demonstrate its merit before publication; rather, it said that the decision had already been taken (Thorson et al., 2012). The salesperson was wasting his time, as very few of the local firms he approached were capable or ready to “invest” in advertising in the supplement, simply because nearly none of them were exporters, and paying a lot of money to sell their goods to international audiences was ludicrous.

本书版权归Arcler所有

6

Encyclopedia of Journalism and Mass Communication

Before departing for his next impoverished country, he made one more desperate attempt to persuade the authorities that they were now responsible for financing the whole cost of the supplement. The fact that it is extremely difficult for any government to produce any measurable impact on their nation’s international reputation during their normal term of office – such things can take generations to shift – and the temptation to spend a lot of money on something as alluring, tangible, modern, and uplifting as an international ad campaign also make life easy for these itinerant salespeople. Real outcomes are exceedingly difficult to develop and quantify, especially in the near term; outputs, on the other hand, are simple to make and assess. The main issue here is still effectiveness; it’s not just a question of whether or not these advertising “opportunities” are presented honestly and transparently; it’s also a question of whether or not they deliver on their promises (Seamon, 2010). The author has often said in this Journal and elsewhere that he has yet to uncover proof that a simple message may influence people’s preexisting conceptions and biases about other countries. There are various reasons why they would not, and no persuasive evidence has been shown to support such a claim. The fact that multilateral institutions, development agencies, governments, and non-governmental organizations (NGOs) from wealthy countries will increasingly enthusiastically support media-based interpretations of “nation branding” in developing countries to appear modern and innovative in their approaches to capacity building, poverty reduction, and economic competitiveness does not help. They regularly fall into the same pitfalls as their customers, believing, rather naively and blindly, that the approaches used to construct large commercial brands in the developed world can also be applied to create national image management in these nations. They may have no experience or grasp of the media industry, let alone the difficult and unfamiliar issue of national image management (or perhaps it would be more accurate to say the “non-existent subject of national image management”). What could be more appropriate, amusing, appealing, or acceptable to the cultures of Western contributors than spending vast quantities of Western money on Western-style “communications”? This is a horrifying example of the corruption and temptation of aid. In the literature and consultants’ reports issued by NGOs, development organizations, Western governments, and international institutions, there are frequent references to “communications” and the present relevance of “soft power.” Isn’t it merely

本书版权归Arcler所有

Media and Social Image

7

following instructions when an African country spends millions of dollars on TV commercials extolling carefully selected shots of its sparkling beaches, joyous towns, gleaming hotels, factories, airports, and skyscrapers while omitting the misery in the background? (Shemberger, 2020). The only winners are the media, public relations, and marketing organizations, as well as the other people along the way who profit from each mega-deal. It’s essentially a case of the blind leading the blind, with billions of dollars wasted on pointless official propaganda. It is self-evident that governments, particularly those in developing countries, must have a better knowledge of these concerns and exert more control over their relations with foreign media, both in terms of how they use it and how it uses them. As a result, the author commonly recommends that governments establish a national media center whose objective is to serve as a professional conduit between the government, corporate community, civil society, and foreign media. This Preface provides an outline of such a unit.

Figure 1.3: How are women journalists treated in the world. Source: https://media.istockphoto.com/photos/reporter-at-the-airport-pictureid1210513797?k=20&m=1210513797&s=612x612&w=0&h=fcqLeZXLuz9I ocKj35x68YiaKQcP5FzgU0Q-PnwFUx0=

Governments seeking to better their international standing do not need or should not regard the media as an opponent; after all, it is one of the key avenues via which public impression of a country is typically transferred.

本书版权归Arcler所有

8

Encyclopedia of Journalism and Mass Communication

However, only if they are part of a clear strategy, based on a clear definition of the target market, associated with clear criteria for measuring and evaluating success, based on a properly worked-out budget, and accompanied by proper mechanisms to ensure that such activities are planned and carried out creatively, cost-effectively, and processing (Rakow, 2011). Even advertising supplements may be a suitable component of the media mix used to attract tourism or foreign investment in some situations. With such knowledge and planning, governments would not simply respond to the first salesperson who calls but would instead research the various options, select one based on specific criteria, take the initiative and contact the best media outlets themselves, and negotiate a fair deal in the best interests of their taxpayers. Because we may expect ethical and professional standards in the media to continue to deteriorate in the meanwhile, governments must arm themselves with the information, expertise, and self-assurance to deal with these challenges quickly and successfully. Recently, the release of a new product from an American firm was prominently mentioned during one respected international TV station’s big prime-time news show. The product was thoroughly described, explaining all of its features and benefits, and the camera respectfully paused for 5 seconds above the manufacturer’s symbol (an eternity in the fast-moving world of 24-hour TV news). A senior corporate leader gave a lengthy interview in which he touted the virtues of the product. The manufacturer’s products or competitors were not mentioned. There was no attempt to relate the “news” segment to a more intriguing overall theme. In a nutshell, it was marketing. The author observed it 12 times in the next 36 hours. This is the media of the future—a place where sponsored advertising, factual reporting, and commentary are all impossible to distinguish, where the true sponsors of the message are never known, and where no message can be believed as a consequence (Porto, 2005). If this is the new editorial environment, it will only be a matter of time before sponsored political messages coexist with commercial ones, if the price is reasonable. Along with arming governments against media sales, it is time to step up our efforts to inoculate our children against believing whatever they see on TV, the Internet, or in a newspaper throughout their lives.

本书版权归Arcler所有

Media and Social Image

9

1.2. SHAPING PERSPECTIVES THROUGH MEDIA The rise of the Internet led to the development of web-based communication platforms. Digital channels have grown stronger over the previous decade, making it simpler to transmit information. From a source of raw data to an interactive medium that facilitates public engagement in projects via the interchange of knowledge and ideas, internet content has evolved. As a result, those who used to consume information are now the ones who supply it. Individuals who share a common interest may form online organizations and societies that anybody can join using social media tools such as blogs, videos, and photo-blogging. A new dimension to public relations has been added because of the Internet, which allows anybody to influence public opinion (Perko, 2012). Businesses, groups, and political parties have all found new ways to engage and influence their constituents through social media. Kazakhstan’s online platforms have already achieved great success, even though their growth began just lately. The quality and quantity of locallyproduced items have improved in recent years, whereas formerly, residents shopped in Russian and European marketplaces. Two of Kazakhstan’s most popular blogging sites, Yvision and Gonzo, demonstrate the country’s new online presence. Examination of their content, as well as that of countless other blog platforms, indicates the diversity of Kazakhstan’s online community regarding interest areas. In addition to poverty, adoption, design, current events, and travel, these platforms’ front pages cover a wide range of issues (Popoola, 2014). Every one of these subjects has been produced by humans, and they all have an audience. The second key platform is Voxpopuli, whose guiding philosophy is “It’s better to see.” Picture essays by Voxpopuli were well-known. While portraying gorgeous moments taken, great images reveal veiled worries and confusing obstacles. Readers can draw their judgments based on what they see on this page. Newcomer Blogbasta provides a restricted arena for contributions and opinions on current political, social, cultural and economic issues, and the site is still under construction.

本书版权归Arcler所有

10

Encyclopedia of Journalism and Mass Communication

Social networking sites including Facebook, Twitter, YouTube, VKontakte, Odnoklassniki, and Moi Mir, among others, have been widely adopted by the Kazakh people. Kazakhstanis are increasingly using social media networks such as Facebook and Twitter, and this trend appears to be continuing despite a wide range of factors such as age, interest, and social involvement. Kazakh-speaking companies, i.e. those that allow customers to access their services in Kazakh, have recently seen the most rapid growth in this category (Auger & Waters, 2020). It’s no secret that websites attempt to address issues of public relevance to draw in more users. The information we gather helps us make sense of the world. Even though the media covers global issues, editors have the last say on which ones are shown to us. Throughout history, public opinion and media coverage have always been closely linked, since the media plays a vital role in mass communication and reflects society’s most pressing issues. It has grown increasingly commercialized and subject to more rules and prohibitions as a result of the rising influence of the media on the public’s view. Unprocessed data can be transformed into perspectives depending on the information. As a result, any view developed as a result of reading a news story may be seen as influenced by other sources. A study of public opinion is worthwhile. In certain cases, it fluctuates often, while in others, it is more constant because of well-established mental processes. Ideological consent is a term that describes a situation in which the viewpoint of the majority rules and causes harm to the community in which it happens. Persuading the public and shifting opinions are now easier, but also more difficult, thanks to social media. Social media content can be released without the user’s permission, which is advantageous since it avoids regulation and control. The government affairs sector of the PR department faces new problems as a result of this adaptability (Pavlik et al., 2020). As a result, social media sites like Facebook and Twitter have become active participants in the creation and maintenance of democracy. Anyone can take part in the decision-making process.

本书版权归Arcler所有

Media and Social Image

11

Figure 1.4: Woman journalist. Source: https://media.istockphoto.com/photos/female-newsreader-in-studiopicture-id1220571544?k=20&m=1220571544&s=612x612&w=0&h=uJP0O DDM3KW6kVLOxb2W38kAi79tAwNQGElb6PpWReI=

With the advent of digital communication, the government has become more transparent. Imagery for business and government has been reimagined as one that is more personable while also emphasizing participation and social responsibility. Digital technologies such as webpages have previously been used by governments and their agencies to communicate information about themselves. From news and data providers to sources of live programming and podcasts, government websites have undergone a dramatic shift. E-government will grow as a result of internet services (Ashley, 2015). For e-governments, the rise in popularity of social media meant that they had to find new ways to engage with constituents. Another promising development is the introduction of personal blogs maintained by government employees. Karim Massimov, a former prime minister who is now the president’s chief of staff, was a pioneer in this respect, and his blog attracted a lot of attention. The right authorities may now be contacted instantly when people have issues or concerns. A variety of benefits of direct contact include reducing corruption via openness, increasing convenience while decreasing costs, and avoiding the misuse of public funds. To put it another way, social media “socializes” the government by making it more substantial and approachable.

本书版权归Arcler所有

12

Encyclopedia of Journalism and Mass Communication

Social media creates new realities and virtual worlds in every aspect of social life. These new realities include the necessity to adapt to everchanging perspectives, unpredictable events, and a continual online presence to stay on top of things. There is a societal influence of social media. When it comes to interpersonal connections and the way of life, short-term values don’t always substitute long-term ones. Social development is affected by long-term policies proposed by politicians, although this has little effect on politics in the end. A new low-cost manufacturing method has emerged because of the ease with which anyone may post knowledge online. Manufacturers may make a lot of money from advertising because of sophisticated directories and a lot of visitors. To put it another way, social media networks are a great way to make money with no effort (Pavlik, 2013). Because of the ease with which new ideas and information may be shared, social media platforms do not promote cultural values over the long run. They also contradict conventional wisdom by offering quick turnaround times on treatments. New media, from a sociological perspective, affects relationships by modifying people’s perceptions of the world. The interests and concerns of each person are taken into account while categorizing them. As soon as a problem is handled, users break up and go their ways. This is a common occurrence. Social media platforms are frequently used to sway public opinion and compel users to do specified activities as a result of marketing campaigns. The gang disbands after the conclusion of the action and does not reassemble until the next round of crises. Can we expect real democracy to thrive in an internet environment, or are we setting ourselves up to face anarchy? The same action will never satisfy many points of view. That which is thought to be reflective of the majority will be taken into account when making a decision. Who, then, has a say in shaping this outlook? (Mills et al., 2019). Will social mediainfluenced public opinion have an impact on society shortly? Alternatively, as many commentators suggested, has this era already gone and the so-called Arab Spring protest chain concluded? Modern social media has removed the ancient stumbling barriers of time, place, nationality, and philosophy. If public opinion has the power to

本书版权归Arcler所有

Media and Social Image

13

change society, then society is vulnerable. With time, we’ll learn more about social media’s long-term and short-term impacts. Because of the country’s increased access to and use of the Internet, social media-related innovations are emerging in Kazakhstan at an especially rapid rate.

1.3. MEDIA IS USEFUL IN CONVEYING CONCEPTS AND INFORMATION The spread of the Internet cleared the path for the development of webbased communication platforms. Digital networks have gotten stronger over the previous decade, making it easier to convey information. The objective of online content was originally to offer access to raw data; however, it has now grown into an interactive tool that allows users to participate in current efforts by exchanging ideas and knowledge (Ali et al., 2014). As a result, people who were previously the recipients of the information are now the providers of it. People with similar interests form social media communities, which are also known as online groups and societies. Members of these communities can employ several technologies, such as social networks, video, blogs, and photo blogging, among others. As a result of the spread of the internet, public relations has taken on a new dimension. Companies, organizations, and political parties have all developed new ways to interact with and influence their constituents through the usage of social media. Even though they have only been in Malawi for a short time, online platforms have already had a significant impact. There are more social media networks and organizations available now than ever before, and they are all of greater quality. Downloading photos and videos from YouTube and Instagram both require a large Internet package, and the general trend indicates that more Malawians are using social networks, thus this conclusion is consistent with the previously stated fact (Mowlana, 2007). People of diverse ages, dispositions, levels of social participation, and socioeconomic groups utilize various social media sites to varying degrees. The impact of social media on modern political campaign management and organizing has been tremendous. Politicians are increasingly using social media to engage with and build relationships with the growing amount of young people who are eligible to vote.

本书版权归Arcler所有

14

Encyclopedia of Journalism and Mass Communication

In today’s digital age, social media has eclipsed traditional forms of media as the most important means of communication for politicians. Political individuals and organizations now have an online presence in addition to their physical presence as a result of this. In a variety of ways, the use of social media may raise public awareness of politicians and their organizations. Women, on the other hand, have been left out of the picture. Women, particularly those running for public office, have been slow to embrace the Internet as a tool for political engagement. This is especially true for candidates for public office. Women in political positions are generally more hesitant than males to express themselves online. Despite the inconsistency of the evidence, it is hard to deny that social media can influence people’s ideas and behaviors in favor of a specific candidate, particularly in Malawi (Moore & Shemberger, 2019). In politics, it is critical to develop a positive public image and gain as much exposure as possible; social media provides the most cost-effective and efficient way of achieving both of these goals simultaneously.

Figure 1.5: Limitations faced by women journalists. Source: https://thumbs.dreamstime.com/b/young-journalist-having-dictionproblems-failing-pronunciation-front-camera-surprised-reporter-holding-microphone-237168834.jpg

本书版权归Arcler所有

Media and Social Image

15

To connect with the younger generation, practically all female politicians must be proficient in messaging apps such as WhatsApp, Facebook, and Instagram. This is because while younger people may not have the time to attend demonstrations, they will never miss a post on one of those platforms. Keep an eye on what they’re doing at all times.

本书版权归Arcler所有

本书版权归Arcler所有

CHAPTER

2

WOMEN IN JOURNALISM AND MEDIA

CONTENTS

本书版权归Arcler所有

2.1. How Are Women Journalists Treated in the World?............................ 18 2.2. Limitations Faced By Women Journalists............................................ 23 2.3. Media and Executive Positions Are Dominated By Women................ 27 2.4. Places that Women Journalists Shouldn’t Be Sent To........................... 28 2.5. The Dearth of Female Executives........................................................ 30 2.6. Best Practices and Solutions............................................................... 35

18

Encyclopedia of Journalism and Mass Communication

2.1. HOW ARE WOMEN JOURNALISTS TREATED IN THE WORLD? The field of journalism is dominated by men on a widespread scale throughout the world. An investigation on the position of women in the world’s news media was carried out by the International Women in Media Foundation, which surveyed over five hundred firms located in sixty different nations. It has been determined that men make up the great majority of positions globally that are responsible for leadership and the collection of news (Mellado et al., 2020). An analysis of the workforce in the reporting industry finds that males occupy over two-thirds of the positions, even though women only make up 36% of the workforce. As described in the book “Writing with Fire,” it is quite interesting to witness how forty female Dalit journalists of Khabar Lahariya remake history by publishing their tales. This process is detailed in the book. These ladies disobeyed the standards set out by their caste to raise a stir and shake things up. Instead of reporting on the most recent news, the journalists at Khabar Lahariya put their attention, from a gendered point of view, on topics that are relevant to rural women in India, regardless of their caste or religion.

Figure 2.1: Media women play a crucial role in nation building. Source: https://www.essence.com/news/play-play-12-black-women-sportscasters-we-love/

本书版权归Arcler所有

Women in Journalism and Media

19

Being a female journalist in India who is known for speaking her mind despite the role being historically seen as one that belongs to men might put you in harm’s way. When women speak up against injustice and corruption in their systems, it brings them to more people’s attention. Even though most people do not consider violence against women to be an acceptable societal norm, it nonetheless does occur. In 2017, the ladies of Khabar Lahariya were given the unpleasant opportunity to learn the hard way that telling the truth may endanger their lives (Banda, 2007). Because of the criticism that she has leveled against the government of India and the Hindu right, the author Gauri Lankesh has received several death threats. On September 5, 2017, two males were on a motorbike when they drove by her residence in Bangalore and opened fire on her. She was shot four times in the back and one time in the chest. Her passing came about in an instant. Not just Indian female journalists but also other journalists in India face threats and physical assault. In December of 2020, in the city of Jalalabad, the life of Afghan journalist Malalai Maiwand, who worked for Enikass TV, was taken. It is not the first time that activist Maiwand has raised her voice in protest against threats made against female journalists in Afghanistan. It is not unheard of for women working in the media to be subjected to prejudice for no other reason than their occupation. In the year 2021, three female employees of the Enikass TV dubbing studio in Jalalabad were murdered on their way home from work after being shot multiple times in quick succession and only a few minutes apart from one another. They were between the ages of 18 and 20 when they started working at the station, and their duty there was to reproduce transmissions. In several nations, journalists face threats, arrests, and incarceration for their work. According to projections made by Reporters without Borders, there will be 488 imprisoned journalists throughout the world in the year 2021, of whom 60 will be female (Matthes, 2009). According to the findings of a study conducted by Reporters without Borders in 2021, China has the highest number of imprisoned female journalists of any country in the world. In recent years, China has been responsible for the imprisonment of a greater number of journalists than any other country. A Chinese journalist named Sophia Huang Xueqin was recently arrested and taken into custody after being accused of “inciting subversion of state power.” There are a great number of further cases, such as the inventor of

本书版权归Arcler所有

20

Encyclopedia of Journalism and Mass Communication

Salkin, Gulmira Imin, who has been imprisoned for disclosing government secrets since 2009. Zhang Zhan, a reporter, was taken into custody in May of 2020 for reporting on the COVID-19 epidemic that occurred in Wuhan. She was given a sentence of four years in prison because the judge found her guilty of “picking confrontations and creating trouble.” She has been on a hunger strike as a form of protest, and as of the time that this article was written, her health is critical. There are now 32 journalists working for the Belarusian government, with 17 of them journalists being female (more than half). As journalists, Daria Chultsova and Katsiaryna Andreyev are employed by Belsat, an independent television station broadcasting from Poland that serves the Belarusian community. They were given a sentence of two years in prison for broadcasting an illegal demonstration over the internet, which is a violation of the law. After a military coup in Myanmar in February 2021, strict controls were placed on the media and the citizens. Brave reporters from throughout the country continued to report from the streets even though they were in danger. Hmu Yadanar Khet Moh Moh, a photojournalist, was hurt as a military truck drove through a crowd of protesters and plowed into crowd. By the year 2021, there will be a total of 53 journalists imprisoned in Myanmar, nine of them will be female. As a consequence of this, Myanmar is currently ranked among the top five countries in the world in terms of the number of journalists who are imprisoned (Maier & Curtin, 2005). Only on the internet are female journalists able to do their jobs without worrying about being harassed or getting revenge. The pervasive and always-on Internet has been used as a conduit for a tidal wave of electronic hatred, verbal abuse, and physical threats that have been directed at female journalists. A survey that was carried out not too long ago by Reporters without Borders discovered that the internet poses a greater danger to journalists than the street does. A survey of female journalists found that 73% of the respondents had experienced gender-based harassment or abuse online in the course of their work.

本书版权归Arcler所有

Women in Journalism and Media

21

Figure 2.2: Women debaters shaping perspectives through media. Source: https://www.theatlantic.com/education/archive/2014/04/traditionalcollege-debate-white-privilege/360746/

In January 2022, India will see the introduction of a brand-new app called Bulli Bai. The majority of the Muslim women who were “auctioned” through this app were already well-known figures in the media. Over a hundred different social media profiles belonging to female journalists and activists were accessed, and their contact information was changed so that it seemed as though they could be reached (Berezhnaia, 2018). These ladies were subjected to a deluge of comments and tweets that were both sexist and racist to dissuade them from pursuing a career in journalism. Even though the app was removed and arrests were made, no one has been charged in connection with the incident. Not only is hate speech commonplace on the internet in today’s day and age, but it is also quite difficult to administer punishment for it. Abuse and threats of violence are directed at female journalists all around the world, including in the United States. The International Women’s Media Foundation contributed Trollbusters after learning about the problem of online harassment directed against female journalists and authors. Trollbusters is an organization that offers assistance and resources to women who are victims of online abuse. Trollbusters can assist women in preventing themselves from being victims of cyberbullying by serving as a

本书版权归Arcler所有

22

Encyclopedia of Journalism and Mass Communication

tool for identifying and reporting trolls to the appropriate authorities, as well as for practizing good “digital hygiene.” The fact that Khabar Lahariya has entered the realm of digital media has not only made their safety more precarious but has also increased the likelihood that they would be able to communicate with people all over the world (Lingwall & Kuehn, 2013). Their efforts have been extremely beneficial to families living in rural areas of India, and the accounts of local political and police corruption that they have shared have helped shed light on some of the murky aspects of that corruption. They are as courageous and bold as other female journalists, and like other female journalists, they have concluded that telling the truth is more important than protecting their personal space and safety. It is becoming increasingly normal practice to discuss gender equality in the field of media. It is becoming increasingly frequent to hear about new coalitions being created, such as the Coalition for Online Abuse1, of which we are a part, to address the one-of-a-kind and multifaceted challenges that are faced by female journalists (of which we are members). Given the breadth and depth of the obstacles that women journalists face in today’s society, we applaud your efforts to include gender equality in the goal of your organization. According to the findings of its study and the observations it has made, Free Press Unlimited (FPU) considers the issue of gender equality in the media to be a global problem. There is a lack of effective and prompt action being taken to address the issue of inequality that female journalists confront, and violence levels are increasing all across the world. The continual inconsistencies in the media may be contributing to the inequality that already exists in our society. As a consequence of this, the media have the potential to play an essential part in the process of eradicating gender-based violence and injustice. About forty different media partners collaborate with FPU to advance gender equality via various forms of communication. The bulk of these organizations is located in underdeveloped nations. A few examples of these programs are those that encourage gender parity in media content and leadership, as well as those that increase the skills and expertise of female journalists while simultaneously assuring their safety. We are committed to fostering a friendly atmosphere for women in journalism. In the last few years, the plight of female journalists has gotten a lot of attention from both domestic and international sources.

本书版权归Arcler所有

Women in Journalism and Media

23

In general, however, the global conversation is held at a high level, and the female journalists who confront real prejudice and injustice are not directly taking part in this. We want to take advantage of this opportunity to empower women journalists from the grassroots. To help close the gender gap, we have invited female journalists from our partner organizations to participate in the current global discourse. Gender justice report and maybe future attempts will benefit from their skills, we hope. There is never a period when the physical or digital safety of female journalists and other media professionals is not jeopardized. Threats against women have taken numerous forms, including sexual harassment, trolling, and violent and sexist hate speech. As a result of their work as journalists, they have been targets of gender-based harassment and abuse. Furthermore, they have been the victims of such behavior (Lewis & Reese, 2009). Threats to women’s bodies, ethnicity, or cultural heritage are substantially more sexualized than threats to men’s bodies, according to the researchers. This was revealed through research on dangers to women’s bodies, ethnicity, and cultural origins. As a result, there is a risk that the freedom of free expression may be limited by attempts to suppress female journalists and disrupt essential investigative work. They try to eradicate and prolong imbalances in newsrooms and society as a whole, exacerbating the problem. Furthermore, they distort the media atmosphere. Female journalists face a distinct set of threats, both offline and online, that have only recently been brought to light by United Nations resolutions and publications. In addition to information on specific efforts taken by the Member States to safeguard female journalists, the Director-General of UNESCO is seeking information on the consequences of journalist fatalities. The efforts that have been taken are summarized in the General Director’s Report on Journalist Safety and the Risk of Impunity (DRGJSP).

2.2. LIMITATIONS FACED BY WOMEN JOURNALISTS In contrast, an examination of the challenges faced by female journalists demonstrates that, in an atmosphere where enthusiasm and ambition are not fully supported, you can only go so far. Women journalists in Kenya were studied by Ochieng (2017), who found that both male colleagues and the general public place a higher value on a woman’s physical appearance and personality than on her professional accomplishments. It has taken a slew of research to figure out how to better safeguard female journalists by enacting

本书版权归Arcler所有

24

Encyclopedia of Journalism and Mass Communication

new restrictions. If a company employs 20 or more moms with 10 or more children, for example, Jordanian labor law provides “daily breastfeeding breaks and proper daycare” (Najjar, 2013:425). Monitors have found it difficult to keep tabs on these activities because of this, particularly in the private sector. According to Daniel and Nyamweda (2018), there has been a significant increase in the use of gender-balanced interview panels and fasttracking procedures in South African media companies since 2009. When compared to the other countries in our study, South Africa has emerged as an example of gender equality in leadership roles. While the SADC Protocol on Gender and Development has set a target of 50/50 gender parity by 2030 for all media organizations, Daniels and Nyamweda’s (2018: 34) report on gender parity in South African newsrooms found that gender parity has been achieved in 49 of the 51 media organizations included in their study (women 49%; men 49%; other 2%). In this study, gender equality in media leadership may have a major impact on corporate gender awareness and the implementation of womenfriendly policies. The dangers of moral license and tokenism, however, shall be demonstrated in this research. There have been several studies, however, that challenge the premise that “ideal” professional occupations for women are based only on caring for their families (Peebles, Ghosheh, Sabbagh and Darwazeh 2004:24). Many of the difficulties that women journalists in SubSaharan Africa have in being hired, staying employed, and rising to positions of leadership are directly related to their social and cultural status as women. Women in the newsroom are allocated more items on development, fashion, and other “soft news,” rather than stories about politics or business, which are termed “hard news.” Gender-based resource allocation will be shown to be a result of this in this study. In their inquiry into why female journalists in Lebanon were being ignored, Melki and Mallat (2016) discovered several additional gendered experiences of women in the media, such as blaming women for their conditions. At every level, they found that female journalists who chose “safe” careers after marriage or having children were blamed for making it harder to break through the glass ceiling. Blume and Mulupi (2020a) found similar results when researching sexism in the newsrooms of Kenya, South Africa, and Nigeria. Sexual abuse, sexual harassment, incorrect job allocations, lack of power and unjust remuneration were among the “severe concerns” found in the report. With stagnant employment and income inequality, women in the media find themselves in a difficult position.

本书版权归Arcler所有

Women in Journalism and Media

25

The participant’s low-pay experiences emphasized the different expressions of gender pay disparities. According to research, gender-based position assignments, unequal access to training opportunities, and opaque promotion systems contribute to gender wage disparities. According to several respondents, male colleagues were more likely to obtain financial help to attend training and conferences than female colleagues. Participants either received promotions but were paid less than their male counterparts at the same level, or they did not obtain promotions at all because of the issue of openness and transparency in promotion procedures. A lack of access to training, interactions with gendered roles, and budget allocations for specific sorts of stories have resulted in career and wage stagnation for responders. Because of this, a whopping 65% of respondents claimed that poor pay has had the greatest impact on their capacity to grow in their employment, with 43% blaming gender bias for their low wages.

Figure 2.3: A young female journalist. Source: https://media.istockphoto.com/photos/reporter-at-the-airport-pictureid1210513797?k=20&m=1210513797&s=612x612&w=0&h=fcqLeZXLuz9I ocKj35x68YiaKQcP5FzgU0Q-PnwFUx0=

本书版权归Arcler所有

26

Encyclopedia of Journalism and Mass Communication

There is a disparity in the number of women and men in the workforce. A shared experience with sex-based tasks and resource allocation led to the creation of “soft news” and “hard news.” Requests for reports on topics of interest to women, such as fashion, health, and entertainment, were routinely made. The lack of female parity in leadership roles discouraged respondents from pursuing editorial leadership positions, technical careers like camera operation, and specific types of articles that required women to approach unfriendly or protest-filled locales (Lingwall, 2009). Employees who were asked about their experiences of being discriminated against in the workplace because of their marital status described being told by their bosses that they could not accept technical duties. Bullying, sexism, sexual harassment, or racial discrimination are all examples of undesirable behavior. The second most common occurrence reported by those polled was an act of sexual harassment. The types of sexual harassment perpetrated were as varied as the victims they harassed. There have been reports of everything from sexually explicit requests for a relationship in exchange for labor to physical assault, including an attack at gunpoint on one occasion, and online sexual harassment. As a result of the widespread use of sex as a means of employment, sexual harassment may be found at all levels of the workplace, from the hiring process to harassment from sources, colleagues, and superiors. According to several respondents, they have been subjected to sexual approaches from superiors in exchange for a rise in their wages. The testimony of others indicated that in some cases they were unaware of the notions of sexism and sexual harassment. Many respondents claimed that developing a thick skin was all that was needed to deal with circumstances like sexual harassment, sexual corruption, and extortion. To gauge the extent of sexism’s pervasiveness, the latter looked at the extent to which it could be seen. Male and female bullies, as well as online watchers, began the bullying in the media and on the internet. Low self-esteem and fear of social media have resulted from cyberbullying and cyber misogyny. Only South Africans reported facing racial discrimination, although ethnic group prejudice was recorded by respondents from other countries. Less than a third of respondents who were married or in a domestic partnership said their marital status influenced their decision to become a journalist, and only 7.2% said it impacted their ability to grow in their role (Korkonosenko, 2013). A mere

本书版权归Arcler所有

Women in Journalism and Media

27

20% of parents believed that having children hampered their ability to grow professionally. Respondents who were married and/or had children had to put family and childcare requirements above their career advancement, the idea that sexual harassment of women in media is “free” since they work in the sector, and a variety of missed chances. A wide range of experiences was shared by female journalists in the study, from a lack of policy concern for childcare commitments to being used as an excuse to limit growth and opportunities. According to research participants, many aspects of the gender pay gap come under the subject of family life, with various examples of employers paying males more because of their perceived position as the family breadwinner. Social gender norms and comparable cultural concepts, such as male workers and supervisors who hold such attitudes in the media have also been linked to workplace discrimination based on gender. Firms have a problem over whether they are sufficiently gender-aware to satisfy parents’ needs and not allow it to affect advancement or whether they have a more gender-sensitive approach to job allocation and promotion that takes into account these social roles. It was thought that maternity policies may serve as examples of how to deal with concerns connected to family life and work. Women mentors were held up as role models, among other things.

2.3. MEDIA AND EXECUTIVE POSITIONS ARE DOMINATED BY WOMEN For women in media leadership roles, the debate between equality and quota politics plays an important role. Responses to the survey indicated that the promotion of female executives was seen as a gesture without the necessary equality to make an impact. The few women who have been promoted as a result of this symbolic move are being pushed to “show” that they are capable of holding high-ranking jobs. Because of this, a structure that allows for career development to be centered on leadership is needed to meet the demand for more inclusive and gender-sensitive leadership (Kalatzi et al., 2018). In combination with adequate training and gender awareness throughout the business, it is projected that such an approach will increase transparency in results and lead to more equal representation in leadership. An intentional reorganization of the corporate culture may also influence the way women are depicted and heard in the media.

本书版权归Arcler所有

28

Encyclopedia of Journalism and Mass Communication

2.4. PLACES THAT WOMEN JOURNALISTS SHOULDN’T BE SENT TO Globally, press freedom is dwindling, and there are fewer countries where journalists can work without interference. As a result of their gender and their line of work, female journalists face a unique set of security challenges. Women may self-censor or withdraw from public life in extreme cases of harassment and abuse. In an international survey, it was revealed that over 40% of female journalists avoided reporting particular problems because they were afraid of being victimized online. Due to safety concerns, women’s voices aren’t heard as often in the media, which harms media diversity and democracy as a whole. When looking at the safety of female journalists, it’s important to consider the interplay between gender and safety. Women journalists face greater dangers than their male counterparts because of the unique challenges they face in the field. A higher percentage of female journalists will be subjected to forms of sexual harassment, such as sexism, unwanted sexual attention, and sexual coercion. A great deal of the “intersectional discrimination and gender-based violence” that female journalists face stem from a variety of factors including their gender identity or expression, race or ethnicity, or other forms of marginalization (Report of the Special Rapporteur on violence against women, its causes and consequences). This is made worse if they are outspoken, noticeable, or have a strong desire to dispel stereotypes about them (Heider et al., 2005). The vast majority of workplace threats, intimidation, and harassment were perpetrated by men in 2014, according to a poll. It was discovered that the majority of harassment and assault incidents were not recorded, even though the majority of women who encountered them claimed to have been psychologically harmed. The freedom of the press is deteriorating throughout the world, and there are fewer nations in which journalists can operate without interference. Journalists, particularly female journalists, are frequently the targets of threats to their safety and security because of who they are and the work that they perform. Depending on the severity of the harassment or abuse, a woman may choose to self-censor her behavior or withdraw entirely from public life. According to the results of a survey conducted throughout the globe, more than forty per cent of female journalists have chosen not to disclose particular problems due to concerns that they will be harassed online. Diversity in the media and, by implication, democracy as a whole are both put in jeopardy if women’s perspectives aren’t heard as frequently due

本书版权归Arcler所有

Women in Journalism and Media

29

to safety concerns (Holbert & Grill, 2015). It is crucial, while considering the safety of female journalists, to think about the connection between gender and safety and how the two are related.

Figure 2.4: Woman journalist delivering breaking news. Source: https://www.ranker.com/list/famous-female-tv-journalists/reference

The freedom of the press is deteriorating throughout the world, and there are fewer nations in which journalists can operate without interference. Journalists, particularly female journalists, are frequently the targets of threats to their safety and security because of who they are and the work that they perform. Depending on the severity of the harassment or abuse, a woman may choose to self-censor her behavior or withdraw entirely from public life. According to the results of a survey conducted throughout the globe, more than forty per cent of female journalists have chosen not to disclose particular problems due to concerns that they will be harassed online. Diversity in the media and, by implication, democracy as a whole are both put in jeopardy if women’s perspectives aren’t heard as frequently due to safety concerns (Holbert & Grill, 2015). It is crucial, while considering the safety of female journalists, to think about the connection between gender and safety and how the two are related.

本书版权归Arcler所有

30

Encyclopedia of Journalism and Mass Communication

Women journalists not only suffer hazards that are distinct from those that males encounter, but they also face more significant risks. There is an increased likelihood that female journalists may be subjected to sexual harassment in their line of work. This includes sexually coercive behavior, unwelcome sexual attention, and gender harassment. In addition, a significant number of female journalists experience “intersectional discrimination and gender-based violence” due, among other factors, to the fact that they are of sexual orientation, color, religion, race, or position as a member of a minority (Report of the Special Rapporteur on violence against women, its causes and consequences). This is made even more difficult for them if they are outspoken, conspicuous, or seek to challenge the preconceived notions that others have already formed about them. According to the results of a poll conducted in 2014, the majority of abusive behavior, threats, and intimidation in the workplace came from male employers, bosses, and employees. It was discovered that the majority of instances of sexual harassment and assault were seldom reported, even though the majority of the women who claimed to have been impacted by these incidents indicated they suffered mental harm as a result. In 2018, the International Women’s Media Foundation (IWMF) and Trollbusters collaborated to research the subject of attacks and harassment directed toward female journalists. The research was based on responses from over 600 different female journalists who participated in a survey. The results of a recent survey indicated that Internet attacks have gotten more blatant and well-planned over the last five years.

2.5. THE DEARTH OF FEMALE EXECUTIVES All of our policy arguments revolve around the issue of women’s underrepresentation in leadership positions. There is a lack of women in leadership positions around the world, which has slowed progress on issues such as compensation, humanitarian aid, and discrimination of all kinds. Our society will advance more quickly if we recognize that men and women alike are hampered by the lack of female leadership.

2.5.1. Patriarchy The president of the African American Intellectual History Society, Keisha N. Blain, is a professor of history at the University of Pittsburgh. Set the World on Fire: Black Nationalist Women in the Global Struggle for Freedom is her co-editor and author. In the United States, patriarchy is the biggest

本书版权归Arcler所有

Women in Journalism and Media

31

obstacle for women. In the political arena, this is most apparent. According to American culture’s sexist and patriarchal nature, women are less competent than men regardless of their experience, education, or abilities. Women who are well-educated and powerful are seen as a threat to social order rather than an essential part of it. Women’s fashion and physical appearance are often overemphasized in the media coverage of female politicians, which lends credence to this belief. As a result, the United States is lagging behind the rest of the world when it comes to electing a female president (Hanitzsch, 2004). Even though women have held leadership positions in Liberia, India, the United Kingdom, Dominica, and several other countries, the United States is not one of these countries.

Figure 2.5: Limitations faced by women journalists. Source: https://thumbs.dreamstime.com/b/young-journalist-having-dictionproblems-failing-pronunciation-front-camera-surprised-reporter-holding-microphone-237168834.jpg

Inequality in education is a major problem for women around the world. Many people believe that women are less deserving of equal educational opportunities than men even though there have been numerous victories for feminist movements in the Americas, Africa, Asia, and elsewhere. Although

本书版权归Arcler所有

32

Encyclopedia of Journalism and Mass Communication

poverty, location, and other factors play a role, patriarchy justifies the denial of educational opportunities. That man should be in positions of power and that women should be subservient to them is a central theme of the book. Gender and educational inequalities are exacerbated by the widespread use of this outdated mentality in both the United States and around the world.

2.5.2. WOMEN’S MARKET IMPORTANCE IN THE FASHION INDUSTRY At the time, Moore was working with Lanny Jones. In the beginning, the staff transformed People from black & white to color pages. As a result of this, the delivery day was altered from Monday to Friday. News is like a loaf of bread. A recent discovery is all the more fascinating. Among the many People, special issues that Moore introduced were “Sexiest Man Alive,” “Best-Dressed, Worst-Dressed,” and others. She laughs and says, “It was a license to steal.” To get the most out of People, you first had to grasp that it’s largely aimed at women. As has been the case for many years, People is the company’s most lucrative title. Additionally, Moore loves to point out that People.com is the most popular source of online entertainment news, with more than 13 million unique users per month (Grimes, 2009). The rest of the book continues Moore’s revolutionary history. It was in 1991 that Moore established InStyle, the country’s largest-circulation fashion and beauty weekly. He says he is “ahead of Vog.” (Sports Illustrated is second) InStyle is Time Inc.’s third-most lucrative publication (Sports Illustrated is second) (Sports Illustrated is second). In 2000, Real Simple came up with its range of items. Researchers found that the average American woman spends 55 minutes per day looking for things. American clients, particularly ladies, have a tremendous lot of time on their hands, according to her. Real Simple was established on this premise. We were able to offer you one extra hour in the day when we got you in order. While reclining in her comfortable chair, Moore brightens as she provides her insider’s guide to producing a prosperous magazine “It was a simple answer to a difficult problem.” Time Inc. was particularly effective in spotting market gaps in this method. For the most part, we come up with the categories for the posts that appear on this site. What hurdles will Moore face as she progresses? She keeps her mouth shut. In light of her father’s second act example and her 26-year-old son Brendan’s enrolment at Harvard Business School and her husband Donovan Moore’s position at Bessemer Trust as a private wealth manager, her future seems to be entirely open.

本书版权归Arcler所有

Women in Journalism and Media

33

What words of advice does she give to young females who wish to follow in her footsteps? As is common with Moore, he is direct: “As far as I’m concerned, everything comes down to one thing: self-evaluation.” So, who are you, exactly? Is there anything about you that sets you apart from others? What do you enjoy doing in your spare time? Then, employ this information to locate a suitable match. Make a profession out of what you love to do. You are ultimately liable for your professional progress (Guo et al., 2016). Young females can also practice filling up their dance cards. Because I finished my dance card better than everybody else, I become Time Inc.’s chairman and CEO. My book production exceeds Henry Luce’s even though I’ve held the post of chairman for 32 years. Because of this, I’m in Luce’s office.” Many women over the world have lately been offered the opportunity to work in the media because of sponsorship for women’s news and feature shows. Using the Women’s Edition program as an example, we can see how women may work together to create a wide understanding of women’s problems and employ this information in their writing. Gathered around a table were twelve female journalists from spanning Africa, Asia, Latin America, and Eastern Europe. Many African moms have more children than they can effectively care for, they believe. According to local sources, families in India, the Philippines, and Peru were smaller than they are now. You may be startled to discover that in Romania, the government actively pays women to have children as part of an effort to fend off population drop. On the Women’s Edition panel of experienced female journalists from major media outlets in the developing world, this conversation took place about a variety of problems affecting women’s health and development. Through studying other nations’ approaches to comparable and dissimilar issues, they get a global perspective on these difficulties. A Nepalese journalist who had participated in the program for some time commented, “Now I think worldwide and write locally.” The United States Agency for International Development (USAID) finances Women’s Edition, which has the long-term purpose of working with journalists. More than 60 journalists have been part of the program since its beginning. As time went on, the number of participants began to dwindle, and a two-year participation restriction was implemented. Journalists are obliged to go overseas twice a year for one-week sessions during their participation in the program. Health and development-related issues are

本书版权归Arcler所有

34

Encyclopedia of Journalism and Mass Communication

generally the focus of these events. For each article, journalists have access to personal testimonies from the field as well as in-depth research on the challenges at hand. In the aftermath of the seminar’s subject, each journalist publishes an article, a series of articles, or a broadcast show based on her country’s perspective. The Population Reference Bureau (PRB), the project’s non-profit operator, hosts a conference every two years to celebrate the accomplishments of women editors, reporters, and producers in the media sector. Journalists learn about it through websites, schools, and national and international journalistic organizations. Applicants are limited to a maximum of 200. Approximately twelve people are invited to participate in PRB. When it comes to reporting women’s problems, PRB is constantly searching for seasoned journalists with editorial clout who have a love for the matter (Gotlieb et al., 2017). Only one journalist from each nation is generally employed to create a regional variance.

Figure 2.6: Places that women journalists shouldn’t be sent to. Source: https://en.ejo.ch/wp-content/uploads/women1–1024x675.jpg

Since its debut in 2007, the Women’s Edition has developed out of a PRB program dubbed Global Edition that brought together important editors from developing nations to debate population and the environment. Additionally,

本书版权归Arcler所有

Women in Journalism and Media

35

Women’s Edition intends to create awareness among the general public as well as officials in developing nations about issues connected to the health and well-being of women. To determine a seminar topic, the PRB interacts with the media before settling on a venue. Journalists from New Delhi visited a brothel in the city’s main red-light district and spoke to Nepali sex workers who had been trafficked years earlier during a lecture on the issue. South Africa has one of the worst rape rates in the world, but the country also has some of the most imaginative solutions to the problem, as described in a lecture by Women’s Edition. International conferences and other events, such as the biennial AIDS conferences and special sessions of the United Nations, have been used to hold seminars. Women’s independence, ecology, and reproductive health are a few of the other issues that will be explored at the conference. Occasionally, a journalist’s narrative can lead to action. Government awareness programs were begun in high-risk areas of child marriage in Tamil Nadu in response to a recent magazine cover piece on the health and social issues encountered by young Indian brides. When they need further information, ministers, MPs, and NGO leaders often engage the media. A Malawian journalist and her Women’s Edition colleagues traveled and reported on a cutting-edge rape crisis hospital in Johannesburg (Grömping, 2019). The daughter of Malawi’s president reached out and vowed to aid local attempts to emulate it. Journalists may operate independently: A journalist from India was so concerned by a seminar visit to a rape crisis center in New York City that she encouraged a medical colleague to construct one in Mumbai. Journalists continue to be touched by Women’s Edition. They become the go-to sources on women’s challenges in their newsrooms. They obtain the information and expertise required to campaign for the inclusion of women’s concerns in the media. They are promoted and given higher weight in judging the relevancy of news. During her participation with Women’s Edition, Ropa Mapimhidze of Zimbabwe, an associate editor at the Herald, stated, “Gone are the days when health and women’s problems were handled once a week.” She is the features editor for the new independent magazine Newsday.

2.6. BEST PRACTICES AND SOLUTIONS Based on the contributions made by our collaborators, we would like to conclude our proposal by offering the following recommendation. Create a

本书版权归Arcler所有

36

Encyclopedia of Journalism and Mass Communication

community of dependable female journalists to serve as a support network. The field of journalism is dominated by male journalists the vast majority of the time, and women are routinely excluded from the conversation. Women’s networks have the potential to be an excellent resource for female journalists looking for support and empowerment. The Network of Women Journalists for Digital Rights in Pakistan, which is run by the Digital Rights Foundation, is responsible for showcasing industry best practices. Provision of Financial Resources for the Acquisition of New Machinery Female journalists should be given access to technological resources, such as laptops and cameras, so that they may get the expertise necessary to advance in their jobs (Gillmor, 2016). In Pakistan, half-rate programs such as this one provide female journalists with the opportunity to purchase high-end equipment at a reduced cost. Personnel who are compelled to go to risky sites as part of their employment are required to have additional safety equipment. Help Women Become Better Journalists by Contributing to Their Education and Development. The double whammy of being a woman and reporting on sensitive topics needs the establishment of proper training programs for female journalists because of the weight of these two responsibilities. As a model for the effective procedure, the International Association of Women in Radio and Television (IAWRT) and the Asian Institute of Journalism and Communication (AIJC) worked together to provide two safety training sessions for female journalists. Free Press Unlimited has just introduced a brand new training program for female journalists that addresses concerns regarding the physical, digital, and psychological safety of their profession. It is necessary to mandate that reports include information from both men and women. In newsrooms, there should be a demand for gender-sensitive and gendertransformative reporting, as well as an examination of societal disparities and a confrontation of gender stereotypes. There is a requirement for gender rules to be implemented internally in newsrooms. If an organization has a gender policy, the activities of the organization ought to be balanced between the sexes (George, 2011). The speed of change will be significantly sped up by the enforcement of these internal gender norms in today’s workplaces, which are predominately occupied by men. It is important to encourage and facilitate the advancement of women into positions of leadership. Policies

本书版权归Arcler所有

Women in Journalism and Media

37

must be enacted at the national level to encourage and ensure the presence of women in positions of authority within organizations. One strategy that may be utilized to improve the level of diversity present in newsrooms is the establishment of quotas for women to hold prominent positions in media companies. The more different people there are working in the newsroom, the more intriguing the stories will be.

本书版权归Arcler所有

本书版权归Arcler所有

CHAPTER

3

JOURNALISM AND BUSINESS

CONTENTS

本书版权归Arcler所有

3.1. Brief Introduction of Journalism And Business.................................... 40 3.2. Primary Types of Journalism............................................................... 42 3.3. Informing the Public Verses Making Money....................................... 51 3.4. Drawing the Line Between Journalism and Cooperate Interests.......... 55 3.5. The Quality of Media Houses and Investors....................................... 58 3.6. Conclusion........................................................................................ 61

40

Encyclopedia of Journalism and Mass Communication

3.1. BRIEF INTRODUCTION OF JOURNALISM AND BUSINESS Journalism and business reflect each other’s world. Both journalists and companies depend on credibility in order to thrive. The skills involved in both are similar: creativity, problem solving and critical thinking. To succeed in both fields, one needs a combination of intensive study and working experience. Notably, the role of journalism has changed drastically due to the rise of the internet (Fleming, 2014). Newspapers are no longer merely printed on paper, but spread across infinite digital screens and read on an infinite number of devices. Yet journalism continues to be an essential part of our culture and it is the primary way we learn about government and politics. Today, news organization has been described as “the bridge between business and society.” Since the dawn of communications, it has been established that journalists have a responsibility to inform their audiences about important issues. A large body of journalism has emerged in the last 20 years, with scholars recognizing its nature and importance to business. Journalism and Business looks at how journalists are able to monitor changes and issues related to business. It provides a broad view of the intersectionality between journalism and business.

Figure 3.1: Modern day journalism has been intertwined with business with the enterprise being a business itself. Source: Image by Media room Hub

本书版权归Arcler所有

Journalism and Business

41

Media companies often view their business as a part of journalism, but are more concerned with profit than ethics. Journalism ethics are based upon the idea of the public’s right to know—without regard to possible consequences. Business ethics are different. They rarely involve anything more than what is profitable or possible. Journalism and business are bound together as an interdependent continuum. They are both predicated upon collecting, analyzing and disseminating accurate information about events that take place in the world. Not only does business rely on a healthy, robust media landscape to drive its success, but the very nature of journalism has been transformed by the rise of digital platforms (Fuerst et al., 2015). The Internet has enabled new voices and viewpoints to be disseminated across the globe in real time. Journalism is a registered business filled with different types of journalism: high tech, general news, financial and political news. Hightech journalism focuses on technology and science while general news focuses on political and social issues that affect the nation and its citizens. The society has become more aware of business and their roles in the economy. The standardization at work determines the success of a company in both local and international settings. Digital revolution has led towards mass communication on social media platforms such as Facebook, Twitter, WhatsApp, etc. Both journalism and business do cover institutions and processes, analyze events being reported and shape them into news stories. Journalists are often working in close proximity with business people and can learn much from them about the way they approach their careers, how they think about reporting and how they respond to pressure from customers. However the case, it is rather important to note that business and journalism are two of the most successful separable careers in the world. Both can be long-term jobs with a high degree of earnings potential. However, to succeed at one, one has to do well at both. Media is one of the most powerful means of socialization in the world. It can affect people’s everyday lives, create perceptions and provide awareness on important issues (Esser & Umbricht, 2014). A business and media ecosystem can also lead to a long-term value creation in terms of reputation enhancement as well as loyal customers. The business case for media companies is different as it attracts both consumers and advertisers. The business, marketing and advertising world is rife with opportunities for journalists to gain valuable insights into the needs of their audiences.

本书版权归Arcler所有

42

Encyclopedia of Journalism and Mass Communication

Journalists can create high-quality marketing content that enhances their companies’ branding, helps them attract customers and ultimately leads to increased profitability.

3.2. PRIMARY TYPES OF JOURNALISM Journalism can be subdivided into: • news; • reviews; • investigative reporting; • columns; • future reporting. More primarily, the basic elements of journalism are the facts and opinions contained in a news story. To decide whether a statement is a fact or an opinion, you must ask: How did it come about? Whose opinion is worth hearing? If you can answer these questions for each statement, then your text has two distinct parts: the first part is factual information and the second part is your personal opinion.

Figure 3.2: A sample image of the various types of journalism. Source: Image by Vector

本书版权归Arcler所有

Journalism and Business

43

Subdividing journalism into different types has been effective in providing new avenues for journalists, such as business news. By separating the two, businesses can highlight their message and reach to a larger audience. In addition to providing more options for businesses looking for a way to get their message out there, subdividing journalism creates the opportunity for more balanced reporting from all sectors of society (Duffield, 2011). In some cases the process may end up undermining its core value and mission: Provide a true and fair source of information to all people, due to irrelevant biasness in the business model. Journalism, as a field of study, has some overlap in its interests. Beyond the idea that journalism is a trade and can be taught, there is also a tendency to find common ground among different types of journalism. Subdividing the study of journalistic practice this way -- into investigative reporting, news, reviews, columns and so forth-is a useful exercise for those who wish to understand how these different types of journalism are produced, shared and consumed. When you do this kind of analysis on a larger scale -studying how various types of media are produced in different countries -- it can be calculated that today’s business journalists will probably gravitate to one type or another early on in their careers. Journalism has always been seen as a business; it’s why newspapers have existed for centuries. So first of all, journalism helps businesses with the way they convey information and what they do. Many print media companies have also diversified into other areas such as online blogs which is another source of information (Domingo et al., 2008). So if you look at it from a business standpoint, it’s just like any type of other form of investment or speculation where you have to have confidence in your product or service before the public buys into it.

3.2.1. News News is a primary type of journalism that involves reporting facts, events and issues in the news. It is the presentation of current events with a bias towards topicality. News is the most common type of journalism and is defined as a neutral or objective account of current events. It is also affected by a variety of competing factors, such as political, economic, social and cultural interests that affect news writing and presentation. These factors may include: country status, government policy, geography and issues of responsibility.

本书版权归Arcler所有

44

Encyclopedia of Journalism and Mass Communication

A news story on the other hand is a piece of news that contains information about current or ordinary events. It is a type of journalism in which the fullest, clearest, and most concise news of the day is presented, especially as written by a particular reporter or news desk for their own publication (Deuze, 2002). News stories are short, often opinionated, and offer scoops on current events. A news story may include some or all of the following: a headline, a description of what happened, quotes from people involved in the incident, viewpoints from other people involved in the incident, and information about who would be able to cover similar incidents further down the line. It is important for businesses to know about news as a component of journalism because it helps to build trust and reputation by providing honest and accurate information. Media also informs the public about outside events and issues that impact their lives, thus creating a better understanding between different people and organizations. News affects business in two ways: it is used as a means to inform others about certain things that have occurred, and it can also provoke a decision from an audience or one’s boss. These decisions can be made according to several factors. For example, some businesses are more dependent on the news media than others. The news can also impact an individual’s immediate activities due to what he/ she has learned through reading or watching it on television. In short, news is the way people see the world and influence their actions within it.

Figure 3.3: News reporting is today the center of business marketing. Not only does it enrich media houses but also helps advertise businesses transmit info from media. Source: Image by 24 hrs Heures

本书版权归Arcler所有

Journalism and Business

45

News can be a component of journalism and help businesses. Good news is spun, bad news is remembered. The quality of journalism matters to businesses, whether they are large corporations or small start-ups. News affects business because it helps us to identify what may be happening or has happened. This can help us make decisions, such as making new product lines, demographics and strategy (Detenber et al., 2012).

3.2.2. Reviews Reviews are a type of journalism and they are both nonfiction and fiction. However, they are different in the way they deal with the content. Nonfiction reviews should primarily focus on how many stars to give something. This is why there are always star ratings on a product or service. On the other hand, fiction reviews will try to dive into what makes a book/movie/other media great. Reviews are identified as one of the oldest forms of journalism. Articles that contain reviews are known as articles of review or reviews. The word ‘review’ refers to a formal approval or judgment as to whether something is ‘worth buying,’ ‘good enough,’ etc. Furthermore, a review may be ‘formal’ in its sense of approval or disapproval (of something) because it is done by some kind of controlling body such as a government agency or publication that has power over that specific object in question. Reviews in journalism impact business positively. They tell people how well a company has performed, revealing any hidden flaws that may come to light. Accepting the review does not mean accepting everything about it; but when it comes to reviews, clients and customers tend to believe what they read in them rather than their own opinions. Reviews can help one’s business in several ways. Consumers tend to trust the wording of a review over ratings and recommendations from friends, family, or strangers. Reviews are also a great way to attract new customers and establish brand recognition.

本书版权归Arcler所有

46

Encyclopedia of Journalism and Mass Communication

Figure 3.4: Reviews give a wider insight on specific businesses and further help businesses air out ideas. Source: Image by CJR

Reviews can also have a huge impact on quality and reputation. Businesses that receive negative reviews may use that as ammunition to fire employees, shed clients, and lose customers. This can hurt the company financially, which could also lead to lower stock prices and job losses. Journalistic reviews however do vary from customer reviews. Businesses can benefit from customer reviews, including for health services and restaurants (Curtin et al., 2018). However, business owners who review employees or service staff may be subject to legal consequences, so it’s important that they be careful about what they say. In the same tone, journalistic reviews impact customers and consumer influencing the way they see various business components. They provide consumers with information they need to make

本书版权归Arcler所有

Journalism and Business

47

well-intentioned purchasing decisions. The negative reviews are intended to help consumers make educated decisions and avoid getting taken advantage of by unscrupulous businesses running unregistered businesses online. For any business, if one wants to engage with customers and increase sales, they would need to be prepared for any demands that may come your way. And if a product or service receives good reviews, word will spread quickly about how great it is. On the other hand, if a business does not receive good reviews, customers may avoid buying from that brand based on their perception that the business is untrustworthy or has quality issues.

3.2.3. Investigative Reporting Investigative reporting, or journalism that reports facts about a subject that may not be widely known. Investigative journalism can range from exposing government waste and incompetence, to uncovering the truth about a scandal. It so happens when a journalist investigates and reports on issues to bring truth to light. Investigative journalism goes beyond the basics of reporting, it involves using in-depth research to investigate stories in depth and find out what really happens. It is the comprehensive examination of an issue, situation, or activity in order to illuminate and explain its nature.

Figure 3.5: Many businesses fear the impact of investigative journalism as it normally tends to uncover the bad about any enterprise. Source: Image by the Wire

The impact of investigative reporting on a business doesn’t take long to be felt. Customers will often learn about product quality issues, fraudulent conduct by employees, poor labor practices and other problems through investigative reports. This impact can however be both positive and negative. Positively, it allows a company to become aware of fraudulent

本书版权归Arcler所有

48

Encyclopedia of Journalism and Mass Communication

practices within its own organization. In this way, it can be highly beneficial for businesses to have the ability to perform investigations into internal and external practices. However, if the company does not react properly or if the findings are not given enough attention by senior management then this could backfire and cause more harm than good (Cohen, 2001). Investigative reporters work to uncover the truth about public life, or public institutions at least. Businesses aren’t immune to this type of investigation either, which can be why it’s become a popular spot for journalists looking to create headlines. This explains the power behind investigative reporting. Many businesses view investigative reporting as dangerous. And there is good reason for this. Business owners do not like the negative publicity associated with stories that are perceived to have caused harm to their brand and reputation. Any negative consequences that result are often blamed on journalists, who were simply doing their job in exposing wrongdoing by a company. As a result, many companies take a strong stance against journalists who report these stories. Investigative journalism can be performed by any journalist with appropriate training who compiles information related to a particular topic. Those who support investigative journalism regard it as a noble and necessary branch of journalism, while those who do not believe it is necessary believe it is not being given the space and money that other forms of reporting need. This branch of journalism involves the use of undercover methods, and the gathering of information through direct contact with sources. When a private organization reveals illegal activity that changes public policy, this type of journalism can have a significant impact on public policy. The most renowned investigative journalists include Gary Webb, who exposed Operation Condor in the 1980s, as well as John Larsson and Roy Greenslade, who exposed corruption inside News International (formerly British newspaper “News of the World”) in 2006–07.

3.2.4. Columns Columns are a type of journalism and often provide news and commentaries, as well as promotions. Journalism is made up of numerous types, most being recognizable by their “columns.” The term “column” refers to the writing that appears on a page, which allows journalists to add a bit of personality and educational content to what you read in the newspaper. The term column appeared during the 19th century, when papers began to publish “op-ed” pieces, written by regular critics of various sorts (Claussen, 2007). These

本书版权归Arcler所有

Journalism and Business

49

were usually not signed, and were frequently anonymous; they usually concluded with a “tone” statement like “In conclusion...” or “Our conclusion is that...” One of the earliest columns had been written by English artist William Hogarth in 1732, who wrote under the name of Pseudolus. Columns are typically written to be published or syndicated on a regular basis. A newspaper might run a daily column during the week, a weekly column covering the whole year and an occasional archive of past columns in a weekly or monthly magazine. In this context, the term paper refers to a news/opinion newspaper. Columns reflect the writers’—and readers’— realistic and thoughtful point of view, values and feelings about the subject. It is opinionated writing that can help readers to consider their own position and personal experience on a topic being discussed.

Figure 3.6: An overview of columns as a type of journalism. Source: Image by Slide Share

Columns are a very popular form of journalism in the field of business. It is easy and fast to do, which attracts readers to read content. Columns can be used to inform people about new products, services or changes in policies that affect their business. It also provides them with guidance as to how they can better run their business through various activities such as promotion, social responsibility and personal development. Columns serve a variety of functions in business. They can be used to create a brand, increase awareness of products and services, respond to customer feedback and share company information. Additionally, they provide official statements on controversial matters that are not suitable for discussion at the moment but should be addressed later.

本书版权归Arcler所有

50

Encyclopedia of Journalism and Mass Communication

3.2.5. Feature Writing Feature writing is a style of journalism which is concerned with human interest or general topics, rather than news and current events. Feature writing is the simplest type of journalism. The feature story is essentially a news article that has a clear thesis. If the topic of an article is unknown by its readers, they may get lost in the details and focus on one thing while neglecting other important things. To expound on it, it is when you explain something in detail. It is about taking an interest in details and/or a subject, researching it and writing about it in detail (Carpenter, 2008). Feature writing can have a major impact on the business of an organization. Feature writers are often able to reach a much broader audience than conventional marketing channels and therefore can really help build brand awareness for organizations. Plus, feature writers also provide information about social issues and other interests of their readership. Feature writing has always been the most popular form of journalism because it focuses on news with a human interest angle. Feature writing is a fascinating way to inform people about events and people having an impact on society. News articles employ different types of feature writing. One type is called narrative journalism, in which you tell a story or describe events chronologically. Another type is called analytical journalism, in which your main concern is hard facts and details, such as statistics and trends.

Figure 3.7: Feature writing is research oriented and tends to award businesses with the relevant information as to how they perceive their economical feature. Source: Image by Goodreads

本书版权归Arcler所有

Journalism and Business

51

Feature writing seeks to gather data, facts and statistics about a particular topic. The purpose is often to convey information in an intriguing way that can attract readers and audiences. Feature writing can display all kinds of topics, but it often focuses on business, labor, politics or other social issues. Feature writing is less tied to the journalistic values of objectivity and technical accuracy. Feature writing describes a person or an event in great detail and allows for varying degrees of imagination; it often involves presenting colorful imaginings of people or events (Bowe et al., 2020). Feature stories are good for newspapers and magazines, but not as suitable for broadcast journalism. Readers expect feature stories to be more inspirational than factbased, so they can enjoy them without worrying about being educated on every detail.

3.3. INFORMING THE PUBLIC VERSES MAKING MONEY

Figure 3.8: Journalism is entitled to be a public informative media as per UNESCO. However, personal interests seem to shatter this dream. Source: Image by UNESCO.

The journalism profession has traditionally been seen as a means of telling the stories of others and not simply making money. Journalists have routinely been asked to tell the uncomfortable truths about their institutions, which is why news organizations have always had a difficult time generating

本书版权归Arcler所有

52

Encyclopedia of Journalism and Mass Communication

revenue streams directly from those who consume it (i.e., they provide valuable content to people who want it accessible). The main purpose of journalism is to inform and educate the public. The ethical standards are those that are normally adopted within professional journalism, such as objectivity, independence and accuracy. Most journalists belong to the organization in which they work, so a conflict of interest rarely exists. Journalism is a profession, it doesn’t mean that news agencies and newspapers are bad, but it is also not a right. Good journalism is not about making money or gaining fame but about informing the public with reliable facts so that they may make good decisions, which benefits both the creator and the public. Journalism is also a profession and a way of life. It involves the responsibility of not only informing the public about important issues, but also giving them the tools to make informed decisions about how their lives are affected by these issues. More so, it is the truthful collection, presentation and analysis of news or information as a profession (Bronstein & Fitzpatrick, 2015). It is a literary medium through which citizens can express their concerns to the government and discuss social issues. Journalism is practiced by those who enlighten others through the written word through news reporting, news gathering and other forms of storytelling. Journalism is not simply about writing facts and working the angles, it is more than that. It’s about the quality of your work so that the people who read or hear it know that you have gone above and beyond what they expect from their favorite journalist. Most journalists have a strong sense of fair play and strive to maintain objectivity in their reporting. Journalists must have integrity and the courage to speak up when it is needed. History has shown that journalism is one of the most influential and powerful mediums of communication in society. Early radio stations were regularly attacked by politicians, who feared that the power of radio news would be used against them. As a result, they placed strict controls on radio stations. Even today, governments around the world employ various tactics to control what the public hears through their media outlets. With time, journalism has been lingered and affected through objectivity, independence and accuracy whose lack of has led to the greed of money.

3.3.1. Objectivity In journalism, objectivity is the principle of avoiding an opinion or slant in reporting. Objectivity means not taking sides, and it is so important when reporting stories that have worked both for and against a particular

本书版权归Arcler所有

Journalism and Business

53

party or cause. The objectivity of journalism is good, but it encourages the greed for money and leads journalist to be irresponsible. Journalists need to be objective in their work and avoid taking the role of judge, jury and executioner when they write articles (Blankenship & Gibson, 2016). Some journalists are greedy for money and could accept bribes to achieve their objectives. Over time journalism has been taken over by a business model where journalists focus on making money instead of getting people’s attention and helping them understand what is happening in society.

Figure 3.9: Dissecting objectivity in journalism. Source: Image by Semantic Scholar

It is very common in journalism to see journalists who have no problem writing articles about celebrities or the rich and famous just so they can sell their articles to those same people with a lots of money. People are beginning to see through this type of journalism and many think that reporters are not pursuing objectivity because they want to make money off of anything that has publicity value.

3.3.2. Lack of Independence News programming is available to everyone, but the profit motive of journalism organizations is a driving factor that leads to corruption in media. In its early days, journalism was about telling the public what it needed to know. Today, stories often focus on financial gain for the reporter rather than informing the public. The journalist’s profit is the reward for his work. The public person has to make a living by earning money, and he can be rewarded too for being good or for his information or for any combination of these things. Journalism is a public service. It is the responsibility of journalists to ensure that the public can discern between fact and fiction, reality and opinion (Biswas & Sipes, 2020). Journalists must avoid conflicts

本书版权归Arcler所有

54

Encyclopedia of Journalism and Mass Communication

of interest, which includes accepting money or being influenced by others who may have financial interests at stake in the news that they report.

Figure 3.10: Independence of journalism is all about their freedom. If businesses do capture media houses, then journalism becomes biased. Source: Image by Medium

Lack of independence in journalism leads to greed for money, therefore causing the public to be unreasonably maligned. Journalism as a profession is at risk with the decline of newspapers and broadcast media. Its independence and impartiality are compromised by commercial motives and closed-door relationships between advertisers and journalists. There are two major schools of thought as to how a journalist should behave. Journalists who care about serving the public and providing accurate information have selfregulated their industry and don’t make money. These journalists have little or no contact with business owners, newsrooms that may not be independent, political pressure groups, advertising firms that use news outlets to push products, or CEOs of corporations (Brandon, 2002). They provide news and information without these corporate conflicts of interest which causes them to lose motivation.

3.3.3. Lack of Accuracy The lack of accurate information has caused many to lose trust in the media. Too many times we see news anchors not telling the truth and instead, spinning a story to fit their agenda. Without the ability to portray reality in a journalistic manner, journalism would not be able to function. Since the

本书版权归Arcler所有

Journalism and Business

55

1950’s, however, there has been a shift occurring for many journalists and news organizations. Many have turned to advertising funded media outlets and have lost sight of their responsibility to inform the public as well as make money.

Figure 3.11: Accuracy desires facts and true ideas. Source: Image by Clipart

It’s not just the lack of transparency in obtaining information that has fallen by the wayside; it’s also how newspapers are run today that has left journalists struggling to stay relevant and make a living.

3.4. DRAWING THE LINE BETWEEN JOURNALISM AND COOPERATE INTERESTS Drawing the line between journalism and cooperate interests is a necessary part of using open-source information. It can also be critical in decision making. This is where journalism has a crucial role to play in creating awareness about certain topics and exposing the hidden truths that surround it, without creating confusion or getting into controversy. However, something must be done to avoid misleading people on the lines of what constitutes good governance (Wanta et al., 2004). Drawing the line between journalism and cooperate interests is important for those who want to hold power accountable for their actions.

本书版权归Arcler所有

56

Encyclopedia of Journalism and Mass Communication

Figure 3.12: Journalism ought to cover public interests and deploy fairness when encountering cooperate interests. Source: Image by Voice of Journalists

The relationship between journalism and cooperate interests is complex, which causes a number of ethical concerns. It’s a sticky wicket, but responsible journalism and supportive cooperation can be complimentary. Just as we should look at the relationship between journalism and the private sector from a different perspective, adopting new strategies for collaborating with businesses to ensure that content is used ethically and responsibly. Drawing the line between journalism and cooperate interests is difficult to do, especially as the lines become blurred—but it’s essential to do so. This can be done effectively and ethically through an objective newsroom review, which is done by a peer group of professional journalists who are knowledgeable about both journalism and cooperative interests. This peer group makes public statements on ethical issues and, in some cases, disputes between journalism and cooperate interests (Wilkinson et al., 2020). The public needs journalists to take part in the public debate and make sure that everyone is able to form opinions about important matters. As well as providing important information, journalists are a source of entertainment for many people and can show us how people live their lives. This includes journalistic standards regarding the protection of privacy and freedom of speech. Journalists have always been involved in a cooperative relationship with their readers. News organizations need to make money to pay the reporters, editors, and photographers who report on stories—and those reporters, editors, and photographers depend on the news that they cover.

本书版权归Arcler所有

Journalism and Business

57

The information they provide readers helps them decide how much product they want to buy in the future or support a particular cause. Journalists and their media institutions have to be accurate in their reporting, but it’s also about the reporter’s own story. The reporter needs a sense of discovery; he or she has to feel like there’s a chance these stories will turn up some illuminating answers – not just from sources, but from his or her self. While journalists used to focus more on reporting what occurred with little room for opinion or discussion about the issue at hand, this is no longer the case. Nowadays, the role of a journalist has become more collaborative in nature as it allows for more people to participate and help disseminate information on a particular subject matter either through their own channels or via third-party media resources.

Figure 3.13: When media houses become partisan, then ethical journalism is shattered in the face of corruption and greed. Source: Image by Ethical Journalism network

There is a strong relationship between journalism and the cooperative interest. Journalists are not just reporters, but citizens who live in a democratic society where everyone has equal rights and obligations. They need to recognize their responsibility to be responsible for the democratic process of self-government and instill public trust in their work. The cooperative relationship between journalism and public interest has been based on long-standing professional norms. The professional development of journalists has often been seen as a key element in this relationship (Wilkinson et al., 2020). Both journalists and the public benefit from this relationship, although the extent to which they do so is more frequently understood in terms of journalists’ perceived professional needs.

本书版权归Arcler所有

58

Encyclopedia of Journalism and Mass Communication

Both journalism and the cooperative are engaged in a relationship. Journalism is based on active reporting and collecting of news, while cooperatives want to maintain their democratic forms of organization. The relationship between journalism and cooperate interest is a symbiotic one. Both benefit from the other, but each must make concessions in order for the partnership to work. But yet, in a world where the relationship between journalism and corporate interest is one of constant tension, it is necessary for journalists to be aware of this tension and how to use these conflicting interests to gain greater access. News and journalism professional may work together to create new stories. Journalists will interview civic leaders, public officials, community leaders, and other citizens to gather information that they can use in their reports. The relationship between journalism and corporate interest is not very clear in itself. The problems of journalism have been discussed under three aspects: the greed for money, the lack of journalistic values and professional standards, as well as one’s competence in the field of discipline. The main reason for these problems lies with economic reasons and interests, so that all sorts of corruption, irregularities and inaccuracy become widespread among media professionals. Corporate interest in journalism is considered a major challenge to its independence and integrity, as it may force journalists to act promptly in favor of advertisers and readers (Vlad, 2021). There are many external factors that can affect the relationship between journalism and cooperate interest. These include journalism’s dependence on advertisers, whose interests may be at odds with other stakeholders such as readers. This can result in ‘cooperative interests’ which are not aligned with the journalistic outlet’s own objectives. In today’s world, the influence of co-operatively interest is also greatly affecting journalism. A lot of journalists are not really taking this into consideration and they do not want to bring in change as it will lead to loss of profits. Journalists need money in order to be able to live a comfortable life due to their nature of work, hence, they always focus on money mongering rather than meeting public needs.

3.5. THE QUALITY OF MEDIA HOUSES AND INVESTORS The quality of media houses attracts investors and advertisers because it affects the portrayal of their brand. Investors want safer options that publish only quality content, while advertisers seek exposure to youthful

本书版权归Arcler所有

Journalism and Business

59

demographics in as many markets around the globe as possible. Quality media houses attract investors because they are successful and known. The sources of their success include the quality of their content, the depth of analysis, high quality graphics, and talented journalists. A strong focus on audience attraction can lead media companies to become more profitable and attract more investors. The quality of media houses attract advertisers is because of their credibility, authority and quality. It builds the trust factor in the minds of the people. When they see your brand name on TV or other media channels then automatically they will think ‘yes’ we can trust them. They want to deal with a credible media house so that their brand gets projected on TV screens. The advertisers feel that it’s safe to invest their money with this person/ company as it has been a consistent performer through many years which means projected returns on invested capital (ROI).

Figure 3.14: Media houses tend to be wayward and partisan when approaching investors such that the highest bidder gets the most of advertisement. This leads to unfairness in the sector. Source: Image by Notes from Poland

A media house is of great importance in a market because it has the ability to bring in drivers, audiences and costs. Hence having quality media houses will attract advertisers who will then purchase their product or services which will make the media house self-sufficient and brings investors i.e. advertisers. For the media houses, quality of content is an important factor to attract and keep investors. Quality content ensures advertisers that their investment in advertisement will not go wasted (Udomisor & Udoh, 2015).

本书版权归Arcler所有

60

Encyclopedia of Journalism and Mass Communication

In addition to the quality of content, a media house should focus on pricing strategy for the advertisers. The prices offered by the media house should be competitive and attractive enough to capture more revenue from one campaign. Media houses have been facing challenges of attracting and keeping advertisers mainly because it is a competitive market. Media houses are competing with each other in order to win the businesses thus, they have to offer good pricing and services to attract more customers who consider every aspect before engaging with a brand. Under this scenario, media houses have become focused on characters, formats that create interest among viewers which can be found on television channels or online media platforms. Media houses have the ability to provide value for advertisers because they are not just focused on the product or service that company provides but also on their image and reputation. Extensive research has found that media houses attract advertisers and retain them through being responsive in terms of product delivery, effective marketing strategies and quality products. Good reputation can be built by being transparent about product testing results, choosing high end equipment during post production stages and employing qualified staffs to deliver professional services. However, media houses can lose credibility if they focus only on advertising sales while neglecting quality journalism or complaints from consumers. In order to understand it better, a standard has been developed by the World Bank for measuring corruption costs for Private Sector as well as for public sector enterprises. This study will demonstrate how the quality of media houses attracts investors and also shows that their business model is built on corruption. Advertisers and media houses enjoy a mutually beneficial relationship that drives the quality of their services, ultimately improving the quality of life of the communities they serve (Thorson et al., 2012). There are many benefits to both parties in this relationship: The advertiser gets access to targeted audiences while maintaining a high-quality product. The media house gains from its reputation as an unbiased source for information and better products. Investors have become major stakeholders in the media industry. They have a right to be concerned about the integrity of their investments, especially when that information was disseminated by media houses that may not be responsible. As such, investors should also be concerned with corruption within the industry. Corruption is always present in any business environment, but it can be believed that it is especially prevalent in the media

本书版权归Arcler所有

Journalism and Business

61

industry given its severe dependence on private funding and immediate profitability.

3.6. CONCLUSION The media industry is fraught with ethical dilemmas that threaten to compromise the journalistic enterprise on an individual and institutional level. This discussion deals with the challenges related to the ethics of journalism in a digital environment. It begins by defining ethical issues in journalism and offers recommendations for best practices and formulaic rules for ensuring ethical conduct, especially when dealing with open secrets and confidential matters. Many investors are looking for an opportunity to invest in a sustainable source of income, especially since the recent economic downturn. A media house with a reputation for supporting good journalism, or investing in technology with a focus on new ideas and technologies can make it easier for investors to lend their expertise and resources to create compelling content.

本书版权归Arcler所有

本书版权归Arcler所有

CHAPTER

4

DANGERS OF INVESTIGATIVE JOURNALISM

CONTENTS

本书版权归Arcler所有

4.1. Common Threats to Investigative Journalism...................................... 64 4.2. Journalists Who Have Suffered During the Process of Investigative Journalism................................................................... 75 4.3. Steps Media Houses Can Take to Keep Their Investigative Journalists....................................................................................... 78

64

Encyclopedia of Journalism and Mass Communication

4.1. COMMON THREATS TO INVESTIGATIVE JOURNALISM 4.1.1. Political and Economic Pressure Investigative journalism faces so much pressure from the political sector. For instance, the general attitude of the government towards Investigative journalism has been noted by the persistence of defamation and insult laws suits. For investigative journalism to thrive in a country, there is great need for strengthened press freedom. However, the strengthened press freedom is rarely actualized as most politicians have little concern for investigative journalism in general in that most of them view it as a nuisance rather than a necessity for democratic governance. This is mostly noted in other areas other than the wealthy West. This is well noted by the problems faced by investigative journalist in those areas. The political sector poses great pressure on news organizations and reporters known to publicize wrongdoings (Seamon, 2010). For instance, many individuals who have been accused of wrongdoings usually resort to both subtle and open methods when suppressing stories by intimidating reporters and lobbying publishers. For instance, in Latin America officials in the government continue to believe that news organizations can he bullied more so those that denounce wrong-doing. This belief is a great damage to investigative journalism.

Figure 4.1: The political atmosphere can negatively affect investigative journalism. Source: https://www.shutterstock.com/search/politics-and-government

Most politicians tend to view news organizations as little more than the expected transmission belts of information. Politicians also place pressure on

本书版权归Arcler所有

Dangers of Investigative Journalism

65

investigative journalist be expecting them to deliver news according to their expectations. News organizations also get pressure from the government by imposing punishment of critical journalism. This has been a common occurrence in most countries. The government uses various ways to punish the media for the kind of content they release. For instance, they can cut down or suspend government advertising, threatening to affect various economic interest of media companies, ordering investigations in to the accounting books of news organizations or shutting down of information sources. For this reason, the relation between government and the press will continuously face constraints. Despite the consolidation of democracy in various regions, authoritarianism is still a crucial obstacle for investigative journalism in various countries including Latin America. For instance, in Peru there are many laws that in principle support investigative reporting, there is the authoritarian position of the Fujimori administration with regards to press issues was among the fundamental adversaries for investigative journalism in the 1990s. The political sector also places pressure on investigative journalism by creating a climate that is conducive for intimidation and persecution. This can be attributed to the fact that investigative journalism in most countries had been able to grow and survive through many years and had produced exposed that has tremendously affected the political sector. Usually each expose causes the news organizations and reporters to incur high costs as they denounce abuses. A good example is of reporters for La Reptiblica and Caretas were targets of intimidation and attacks. There are television reported who were victims of persecution after their news program produced an expose that exposed human rights abuses (Shemberger, 2020). There were various attacks on investigative reporters in Panama and Guatemala that prove that with the consolidation of civilian government there are little changes that have been made on investigative journalism to improve it. Governments have been known to use both legal and other violent methods to bully news organizations. The greatest challenge is that even through military dictatorship has been employed, it does not help with the situation. Political pressure on investigative journalism is also through widespread violence. There are existing data murders and deaths countries such as Peru, Mexico, Brazil and Colombia. For instance, for news organizations that have made reports of drug trafficking and corruption more so in areas outside metropolitan centers. Paramilitary organizations and local politicians are among those found responsible for the violence in

本书版权归Arcler所有

66

Encyclopedia of Journalism and Mass Communication

various areas. The fat that most of those who commit these acts of would not get punished for their actions. As most of these people are not disciplined, it creates more grounds for further violence. The government has also not been successful and effective in finding those who perpetrate such acts and in cases where the perpetrators were found, they are not given the most appropriate sentence. For instance, there have been a number of attacks on reporters of El Periddico and Prebsa Libre and are among the attacks that led to the revelation that members of Congress were guilty of violating laws against investigative journalism and the public at large through allocating of monies for personal use without parliamentary approval. There are recorded evidence of verbal attacks by government officials and negative remarks that condone press violence all of which has contributed to measures to slightly deal with the problem. For instance, in Guatemala, there was a cabinet members who made threats against reporters and publishers of El Periddico after they produced a report after investigating corrupt in the bank Cr6dito Hipotecario Nacional. In some severe cases, government officials have explicitly or tacitly justified attacks in journalists include the former President Menem’s on violence being parts of journalism after a reporter was beaten after denouncing corruption involving some government officials (Rakow, 2011). Economic pressures also affect investigative journalism. There are those who argue that only news organizations that exist economically independent from their country’s governments are much better off when practicing investigating journalism. This is attributed to the fact that it is unconceivable that news organizations relying in the government advertising will denounce that hands that have fed them. In is greatly noticeable that the advertising weight of government more so. In countries having small advertising markets have been said to historically deterred news organizations from taking part in investigative journalism. There are a numbers of examples that can properly demonstrate the traditional pattern in which governments respond to criticism from the press by threatening or actually stopping official advertising. This greatly affects the economic health of news organizations. There are various notable examples that include the Brazilians President who decided to order investigations into the accounting books of news organizations. This was after they had made reports that involved him an influence-peddling ring. The same was noted in Argentina where the Men administration had threatened to stop placing official advertising in Pdginal

本书版权归Arcler所有

Dangers of Investigative Journalism

67

which is a daily newspaper that made investigations on corruption that involved government officials.

Figure 4.2: The economic state can affect how investigative journalists do their work. Source: https://www.shutterstock.com/search/economic-times

With regards to economic pressures, there are recent experiences in Latin America that support the ideologue that investigative journalism needs an economically independent and strong news organization free from the government. This notion of partially correct. There are some news organizations that have a solid, independent economic base which has enabled them to produce a number of exposes on different subjects. News organizations that are rich and able to financially support themselves usually have little to fear in terms of economic consequences of investigating government officials. They are not at pressure of threatened financial cut offs (Auger & Waters, 2020). It is also notable that the privatization of state-owned companies have been said to decrease the advertising power of government officials there by opening better conditions for investigative journalism that can conduct investigations on wrong doings done by officials. It is important to know that the economic reality of investigative journalism is very complex. There are publications that had little economic muscle that tried to practice investigative journalism that ended up with negative economic results. There are other advertisers who opted to withdraw money from such publications for two main reasons including the belief that those publications can offer a controversial environment for their business and the fear that advertising in certain publication wood endanger their relations with

本书版权归Arcler所有

68

Encyclopedia of Journalism and Mass Communication

powerful officials. The other reason is that investigative journalism could step on some political toes that could eventually hurt the economics of news organizations. News organizations are able to gain financial independence by attracting a great deal of commercial advertising that helps then gain a distance from governments. This also means that investigative journalists are able to uncover wrong-doings with the condition that the findings does not affects advertisers or their employer interests. This means that investigative journalism faces various limitations when investigating various subjects more so financial and economic issues as many news organizations are divisions of large businesses with vast economic interests. There are other cases where close-knit ties present between government officials and large advertisers often leads to an economic sanctions and several threats against news organizations seeking to reveal official wrong-doings. There a number of efforts that have been made to help improve news organizations. These efforts include privatization and deregulation of media markets. They have not proven to be very effective in curing all historical problems of investigative journalism. They have however, strengthened the limitations that exist on issues that can be investigated by news organizations. Economic pressures has also led to some news rooms being shut down as they are unable to properly run.

4.1.2. Intimidation Intimidation is a common occurrence for investigative journalists in various parts of the world. There are various groups of people who perpetrate intimidation of investigative journalism. Among them is politicians and those in power. Many of them intimidate investigative journalists who are making or have made exposed on the wrong-doings of such politicians. News rooms can be intimidated when those in power treated to cut off economic provision needed to produce publications and exposes. Intimidation can also occur when them make negative remarks on works done by the journalists or threaten the lives of investigative journalists who have made some exposes on government wrong-doings. Those in power can also create an environment conducive for intimidation from the public. Their remarks may make members of the public react negatively towards news organizations (Porto, 2005). There are various examples of how investigative journalist have faced intimidation. A good example is that of a Dutch investigative journalist Okke Ornstein who did investigation on corruption and fraudulent practices in Panama. Okke stated that he worked with various local journalists on the story on fraud involving government leaders and at one point they

本书版权归Arcler所有

Dangers of Investigative Journalism

69

were followed and people made their way to their offices threatening and intimidating then.

Figure 4.3: Those in power use various. Source: https://www.shutterstock.com/search/intimidation

Intimidation can also come through legal threats. There are a number of investigative journalists who ended up putting their research on hold as they are faced with intimidation through legal threats of arrest. There are a number of investigative journalist who have been arrested and prosecuted because of their work. This works by those in power passing laws that make it possible to criminalize publications made by journalists even after they have released their publications. For example, there was a Filipino journalist who was arrested in February 2019 for libel on grounds of the article that dated back to 2012 though during the time it was not a criminal offense. There are authorities who have introduced changes to the law shortly after she published the article (Perko, 2012). The typing error in the article was corrected in 2014 leading to authorities branding the article as a re-publication and they later on persecuted Maria Ressa. She got a total of six charges that related to her work as a journalist that are still pending. The total charges if presented in court could lead to a 100-year sentence. Those in power also use the phenomenon of SLAPP Suits. This method has become popular over the years as it is a key tool used in obstructing journalists. It works by accumulating lawsuits on journalists so it overwhelms them and forces them to incur high costs. There is also the use of Libel Tourism where an online article is available for readers worldwide and is used to suing writers worldwide. This makes it possible for journalists to build a case against the perpetrators in several countries. Intimidation also comes

本书版权归Arcler所有

70

Encyclopedia of Journalism and Mass Communication

through using various methods to silence journalists falsely by accusing them of criminal offenses though they have committed none and the offense had nothing to do with their journalistic work. A good example is with a Moroccan journalist, Omar Radi who was charged with rape. All these tactics encourage self-censorship or eventually leads to journalists having to stop their investigations.

4.1.3. Censorship Censorship among investigative journalists is a response to legal threats made by governments. Traditionally, there were different methods used by governments to censor investigative journalism. For example, before a publication was released, a member of the government would be given a copy who would check it to ensure that it was right in accordance to the government. However with the growing use of technology, investigative journalists have been able to find loop holes. This however has led to the government tightening their grips on news organizations. They use various tactics to censor information released by media houses. For insane, in Hungary the government’s Media Authority has been granted the power to collect detailed information on journalists and their editorial and advertising content. There are various regimes used by the Prime Minister Viktor Orban that includes the use of fines, licensing and taxes to pressure critical media. This also steers state advertising to friendly outlets. There are comprehensive reports done by several global press freedom organization that came to the conclusion that independent media faces creeping strangulation.

Figure 4.4: Out of fear journalists have to censor information they give to the public. Source: https://www.shutterstock.com/search/censorship

本书版权归Arcler所有

Dangers of Investigative Journalism

71

Another example is with Pakistan where the state regulatory authority suspended the license of Geo TV. The station was very popular in the country. The license cancellation however came after the defamation claim against it by the intelligence service after the shooting of one of the renowned journalists. The channel was officially off the air in June 2014 for 15 days. Many Pakistani journalists may admit to the fact that self-censorship and bribery are rife. Censorship in Turkey came after the recent amendment to the internet law which gave the Telecommunications Directorate the authority and mandate to close any content or website that is a threat to national security and public order while preventing crime. President Recep Tayyio has also faced so much criticism for jailing dozens of journalist, using huge fines and tax investigations as retaliation for critical coverage. A good example is that of 2009 where the tax authorities fined a leading media group about 2.5 billion dollars. The recently, the Turkey government has blocked Twitter and other social media tools as a response to a corruption scandal that implicated various senior officials and the President (Popoola, 2014). Investigative journalists in Russia are more likely to censor information. For instance, the Russian president has been remaking the media landscape in the government’s image. Multiple media outlets were shuttered and blocked in 2014. This saw the editorial line changing overnight in response to government pressure. The government launched its own media operations and it approved its legislation that limits foreign investment in Russian media. It is said that this measure was done with the aim of dealing with publications like Vedomosti which was a daily newspaper respected for its independence and standards and was owned by three foreign media groups namely Finland’s Sanoma, the Financial Times Group and Dow Jones. In Hong Kong, China is obligated to respect free press by treaty. Beijing however has come up and used an array of measures to limit independent journalism. Some of the measures includes selective violence against editors and arresting reported. To the extreme end, it had arranged the firing of critical reporters and columnists. It has also withdrawn the advertising by private and state source that includes multinationals. It has also launch its own cyber-attacks on websites. In 2924, the Hong Kong Journalists Association was described as the darkest for press freedom in several decades. In China, drastic measures have been taken to control independent channels. It is a clear demonstration of the emerging censorship menu in the, it can be direct and visible or indirect and stealthy. In most cases, the stealth strategies have become more popular and important as several

本书版权归Arcler所有

72

Encyclopedia of Journalism and Mass Communication

governments are trying to hide their efforts to control the media and independent news organizations. A good example of stealth censorship is when governments create entities that look like private companies. They can also be non-government or government organizations known as GONGOS. Most of these organizations tend to purport to represent civil society but in actual sense they are government agencies (Pavlik et al., 2020). This kind of approach usually allows the anonymous hackers in China or Russia that attack the networks of critics at home or government thereby portraying them as mysterious members of the sprawling global civil society. In most cases authoritarian governments choose the stealth censorship as they want to appear like democracies. It also appeals to government that do not like old-style dictatorship methods. They are able to get more options on how they can achieve their goals.

4.1.4. Job Insecurity In certain countries, journalism is valued as the forth pillar of the state. For instance in Pakistan there more than 69 private news channels that are fully operational. They have employed thousands of journalist. However, most investigative journalist are at risk of job insecurity in that when there are phases of economic downturn, a number of them have been affected by salary cuts, layoffs, termination and downsizing and other job-related job issues that are job-related concerns in journalists who work in the media industry. There are various factors leading job insecurity among investigative journalists.

Figure 4.5: Harsh economic times and reduced news agencies contribute to job insecurity among investigative journalists. Source: https://www.shutterstock.com/search/job-security

本书版权归Arcler所有

Dangers of Investigative Journalism

73

With the pressure form the political sector, where is a higher risk of investigative journalists being fired after they release an expose on the government wrong-doings. This can be done either directly or indirectly. It is fine directly through making the media houses be shut down. It is done indirectly by arresting the Investigative journalists and giving them long sentences. It is worth noting that job insecurity usually has a positive relationship with stress and has a negative relationship with organizational commitment, work engagement and job satisfaction. Job insecurity among investigative journalist could be as a result of the fact that several media owners and executives are no longer making revenue as they did a before. This crisis has led to several media houses becoming a very stressful working condition for junior employees having low and delayed wage distribution. This is well demonstrated by the Waqt Television which is a widely known channel owned by financially powerful newspaper group that had to shut down operation activities (Pavlik, 2013). This led to a large number of journalists facing unemployment. This is also well elaborated by the Jang Group shutting down three of its journals and laying off of over 900 reporters including investigative journalist who were unemployed. The Express and Dunya Media Group laid off more than 200 journalists. As a result of the magnitude of work done by investigative journalists, some of them end up having severe mental stress that leads to other health problems. Most of such investigative journalists usually end up being fired as they cannot meet the expectations of the media house. This places them at a risk of job insecurity. Increased rates of job insecurity have been linked to the modifications made to the world’s economy that has led to several organizations downsizing or decreasing the number of workers. This has led to media houses opting to use organizational restructuring. Though it help the organization manage itself, it has negative effects on the members of staff. There are various challenges faced by media houses that include the decline in readership of newspaper, global economic shut downs and changes in audience behavior. After distinguishing their problems, the media organizations have noted an adverse economic crisis that affect the organizational setup and its employees including investigative journalist. The occurrence of the COVID-19 pandemic has also increased the risk of job uncertainty among investigative journalists. The pandemic saw journalists unable to move to various places due to fear of contracting the virus and risk of spreading the virus. This greatly limited investigative journalism. They also faced large salary cuts as they were unable to do much journalism. Others were laid off. Shutting down of media houses as

本书版权归Arcler所有

74

Encyclopedia of Journalism and Mass Communication

an actualization of the legal threat on media houses releasing information on government wrong-doings also contributes to the growing increase on job insecurity among investigative journalists. In most private companies known to expose government works, there are higher risks of job loss when the government finds a way to bring down the media house (Mills et al., 2019). The other challenge is that media houses under the government are unable to hire investigative journalist who tend to expose government-wrong found as they do not want to be on the wrong side of the government. The high levels of job insecurity has led to some investigative journalism having to look into other ways of generating income before they are hired by some agencies. It has also affected the number of individuals looking forward to pursuing investigative journalism as a carrier. Others have to look into investigative journalism in other fields such as the environment and climate.

4.1.5. ATTACKS ON THE JOURNALIST SOURCES Journalist are able to accurately make stories form information they gather from individuals in the community. These groups of people referred to as informants play a vital role in journalism. Investigative journalists face great challenges when it comes to handling informants. In most cases, people are usually not willing to give information as they fear for their lives. There are cases after a story has been released, the informants of the story are killed as they have spilled vital information. This has created much fear among the public who may know more and possibly give enough information to deal with the issue. Attacks on informants usually occurs when the informants are discussing issues related to the government or terrorism groups.

Figure 4.6: Informants can be attacked physical or harm could be done on their family members. Source: https://www.shutterstock.com/editorial/image-editorial/yugoslaviabosnia-sarajevo-bosniaherzegovina-7246990a

本书版权归Arcler所有

Dangers of Investigative Journalism

75

For instance with the government, they would not like their wrong-doings to be known to the public. There are cases where a government official is involved in a scandal and those who have information on the scandal agree to speak on the issue with a given news let or journalist but before they get to speak about it, they are killed in their homes or in other places and their bodies are disposed of and found later on. There are cases where by the informant is kidnapped and rendered missing for a number of years before they are found death or in a terrible mental state. The same happens for those who want to give information on terrorist groups (Mowlana, 2007). This could be people who were initially in the terrorism groups but reformed. Such people may be kidnapped and killed or returned after being tortured. There are cases where the informants are used by the terrorist groups to send a message to the government. Attacks on informants usually occurs before or after they have spoken to the journalist. These attacks are perpetrated by people hired by an individual or a group with a certain interested or it may be done by the general public. There are cases when terrorist groups have sent one of their own to implant bombs or kidnap the informant. In most cases, the attacks perpetrated by the public are a result of political pressure or the group wants to uphold their agenda. For instance a government official could make remarks that could insinuate that all spies and informants to the press should be silenced. In this case if a group of people come to know of a person selling their secrets, they could attack the individual. There are various ways in which attacks on the general public has been done. There are those who are physically attacked an end up dying, their family members could also be attacked or their property could also be damaged though burning among other acts. This has led to various measures being taken up by investigative journalists to ensure the safety of their informants. They do not reveal the sources of their informants. For instance if it is an interview, image of the source could be blurred or the camera at an angle that does not expose them. There are those who opt to wear masks on their faces. Their voices are also modified and they take on a different name.

4.2. JOURNALISTS WHO HAVE SUFFERED DURING THE PROCESS OF INVESTIGATIVE JOURNALISM There are a number of journalists who have been injured during the line of duty while others have lost their lives in the process. Daniel Pearl is an

本书版权归Arcler所有

76

Encyclopedia of Journalism and Mass Communication

example of those who lost their lives in the process. He was the South Asia Bureau Chief for the wall Street Journal. He was based in Mumbai, India. He was on his way to Karachi in Pakistan to interview for a story on the “shoe bomber” or Richard Reid where he was kidnapped on January 23, 2002. Some investigators argue that he was led into a trap in the belief that he was going to meet with Sheila Mubarak Ali Shah Gilani. His kidnappers demanded better conditions for prisoners held at Guantanamo Bay (Moore & Shemberger, 2019).. If their demands were not met, they treated to kill Pearl. He was eventually kill between the end of January and early February though the United States government confirmed that he was beheaded on February 21, 2002. There were four men convicted in this case including Ahmed Omar Saeed Sheik who was a British -born Islamic militant. He was sentenced to death while the rest were given life terms. However, in 2016, the Pakistani military thwarted a plot to free Ahmed Omar Saeed Sheikh. Anna Politkovskaya was also a victim in the process of investigative journalism. She was a Russian investigative journalist well known for her reporting on corruption and human right abuses in Chechnya. Since 1999, she reported on war-torn Chechnya for seven years. She worked under Novaya Gazeta, a paper known for its critical coverage in Russian politics. It was through her that the world got to know about crimes against civilians in the course of the dirty war. However, she was shot in broad daylight in the lobby of her Moscow apartment. This was in October 7, 2006 and five men were sentenced for her killing. From the five of them, two got life terms.

Figure 4.7: Many investigation journalist have been victims of shootings and bombings.

本书版权归Arcler所有

Dangers of Investigative Journalism

77

Source: https://www.shutterstock.com/image-vector/modern-gun-bomb-weapons-set-design-1928176913

Chauncey Bailey also suffered from investigative journalism. He was an editor of the Oakland Post which was a California newspaper that majorly focused primarily on African-American issues. He had a very long career as he worked at The Detroit News and the Oakland Tribune. He was later on shot in August 2, 2007. The shooting occurred while he was walking to work. He was shot by a former handyman who worked for Yusuf Bey who was the owner of Your Black Muslim Bakery. He was found guilty of first degree murder. He tried to appeal his case and lost. During the time of his death, it is reported that Bailey was working on an investigation into Your Black Muslim Bakery’s financial dealings (Mellado et al., 2020). He goes down in history as the first US journalist to be killed over a domestic story since 1976. 1976 marked the killing of Don Bolles who was an investigative reporter who was killed in Arizona in a car bombing. Marie Colvin also lost his life when working on a story. She was an American journalist who worked for the British newspaper The Sunday Times. She was regarded as one of the world’s leading war correspondents. She made reports from war zones on three continents during her career life. She was well known for her bravery. She got a blinded eye in Sri Lanka by an army rocket propelled grenade in 2001. She died in 2012 as she was covering the siege of Homes during the Syrian Civil War. It is believed that she was specifically targeted by the Assad regime for the criticism of the Syrian government though the regime has denied any wrong doing. James Foley was a freelance war correspondent who worked in Syria, Libya and Iraq. He worked as a teacher before he stared his journalism career. He worked with the US-based online news outlet GlobalPost during the Syrian Civil War. It was in November 22, 2012 when he was kidnapped by ISIS gunmen in northwest Syria. It was two years later on August 19, 2014 when a video appeared in which Foley was beheaded. Foley’s execution was claimed by ISIS and was a retribution for the US military intervention in Iraq. A Bangladeshi blogger, Niloy Neel, was well known for being an antiextremist voice of reason. He was very bold as he was unafraid to critique politicians and religion. He was hacked to death in August 7, 2015 by a gang armed with machetes at his home in Dhaka. His killing was claimed by Ansar al-Islam Bangladesh, an Al Qaeda group. The Dhaka Tribune says that as of August 2016, about eight men have been arrested by laws enforcement though

本书版权归Arcler所有

78

Encyclopedia of Journalism and Mass Communication

no significant headway has been made in the investigation. Pavel Sheremet was another casualty of investigative journalism. He was a journalist for the Ukrainian news site Ukrainska. The news site also covers corruption in Ukrainian politics. He faced retaliation from the government he criticized during the course of his career. The retaliation was from Ukraine, Russia and Belarus. He was later on imprisoned in Belarus and released (Matthes, 2009). They were later on described as the thorn in the side of the President Aleksandra Lukashenko’s autocratic government. He was later on killed in July 20, 2016 in Kiev when a bomb exploded under his car while he was on his was to record a radio program. There is also Daphne Caruana who ran “Running Commentary .” The running commentary was a blog that exposed corruption in Maltese politics. In some of her work, she reported that the Maltese Prime Minister and his wife were involved in some suspicious financial dealings in Panama and Azerbaijan. All the allegations were denied. She was known to crusade against un-transparency and corruption in Malta. She wrote her final blog post in October 16, 2017 where she categorized the then political situation in Malta as Desperate. She left home 30 minutes late in Bidnija where a bomb tore through her car. None has been arrested for her death.

4.3. STEPS MEDIA HOUSES CAN TAKE TO KEEP THEIR INVESTIGATIVE JOURNALISTS There are various steps and measures taken by news organizations to ensure the safety of the journalists. Some of the steps taken are coming among them all. A good example is training of journalists. Media houses usually invest significant amount of funds to cater for the training of employees. There are different kind of trainings done for investigative journalists. There are trainings on journalism ethics (Maier & Curtin, 2005). They train on the principles of ethics and good practice. It also outlines the duties, responsibilities and rights of journalists. Journalists are also trained on media laws and codes of conduct. This kind of training is classified as legal training. They cover press regulatory bodies and allows journalists to adhere to the laws. Journalists also undergo a conflict sensitive journalism training that allows journalists to cover conflicts professionally without fanning flames of conflict. It also enables them avoid problems such as arrest due to the released content. It also enables know how best they can used their rights and freedoms when covering various stories.

本书版权归Arcler所有

Dangers of Investigative Journalism

79

Most trainings also include a risk analysis course that enables media workers gain holistic knowledge on what they can do in the face of danger. For instance, when they are getting a story in a conflict prone area, they are trained on what to do so as to avoid danger. They are also trained on how best they can avoid placing themselves in danger. During such kind of training, they gain various skills on risk management. Their course also includes training in first aid to enables journalists posted in conflicting areas to assist themselves in light of the occurrence of injuries during the process. There are cases where journalists use their first aid skills you help other who have been injured. Another measure taken up by media houses is utilization of secure communications techniques that allows media workers to avoid having their online communications intercepted and phones tapped. This is very useful more so when they have to ensure the safety of informants. Any case of phone tapping has been known to lead to attacks on journalists as their movements can easily be tracked. Media houses an also take up some practical measures that include the adoption of 24/7 telephone hotlines. They usually have an emergency phone line given to journalists working in that media house let. They can call that line when in danger. Those on the receiving end will be able to give them the most appropriate legal advice or the needed emergency assistance. There are media houses that give journalists identification cards that has been useful to some extent in protecting them from harassment by police and members of the general public. There are meus houses that have safe houses in discrete places that are very far from the firing line (Lingwall & Kuehn, 2013). These safe houses can be used as hiding places for media workers and their families. They can seek protection from local threats. There are media houses that give their employees safety finds for emergency assistance. This is very useful more so in emergency situations. Such kind of funds are usually easily and quickly accessed. These finds can be used to cover legal assistance, safe passage or medical treatments for journalists working Uber attacks. Some media houses have invested heavily in protective gear in that the journalists are given bulletproof vests, press jackets and other equipment that can be used by media houses to ensure the safety of the journalists. Media houses can also provide some legal assistance to journalists. There are cases where some journalists were arrested because of their work or they find themselves in an uncomfortable situation. Legal help enables Journalists to easily deal with legal problems. Trauma counseling is very

本书版权归Arcler所有

80

Encyclopedia of Journalism and Mass Communication

key in media houses. The scenarios encountered by journalists in their line of work is not easy. They need an avenue where they can empty themselves. Services of psychologists have been employed to help deal with various psychological problems. Apart from meeting to the psychologist, they are also trained on how well they can deal with the traumatic event all on their own. This has also been useful in reducing cases of mental stress among other problems faced by journalists while in their line of work. Media houses also offer advocacy for their journalists. Media houses and international bodies usually monitor attacks on media and research and awareness-raising that usually draws attention to media safety issues. It has also been used as a basis for subsequent advocacy. From data on the number of journalist injured or killed in the line of duty can be used to present a motion in parliament to adopt laws that will seek to protect reporters. There have been a number of discussion between media houses and security forces (Lewis & Reese, 2009). These discussions have been aimed at making each party more aware of others roles. Media houses also conduct media law reforms that seek to changes laws used by those in power or members of the general public when intimidating and censoring the media while ensuring that media workers are able to fully enjoy greater legal protection. There are media houses that conduct campaigns seeking to promote the safety of journalists Awareness-raising along decision makers, media workers and the public. They are all thought on matters media safety among other topics of discussion. Media houses also work with international partners in countries where media workers are under sustained attack.

本书版权归Arcler所有

CHAPTER

5

ROLE OF SOCIETY AND CULTURE IN FILM

CONTENTS

本书版权归Arcler所有

5.1. Introduction....................................................................................... 82 5.2. The Role of Film in the Society........................................................... 89 5.3. The Impact of Current Affairs, Social Issues, and Corporate Interests on Film....................................................... 90 5.4. Role of Film Awards in Films, Society, and the Industry...................... 92 5.5. How Different Countries Differ in Their Journalism Practices............. 93 5.6. Film as a Mirror of Society................................................................. 99

82

Encyclopedia of Journalism and Mass Communication

5.1. INTRODUCTION No man is an island; and for that reason, we find ourselves relying on each other; either for company, for help when we are in need; or for the chance to have a feeling of belonging, of being part of something. A society allows human beings to be part of a community, allowing them to live together; either for a particular purpose or activity. Within a society, human beings develop common social behaviors, ideas, and customs that uniquely identify them; differentiating different societies based on their culture (Lingwall, 2009). For purposes of entertainment; passing on a society’s culture to the next generation, or purposes of mocking and ridiculing the negative traits of a society’s culture; the story of the society could be recorded by a camera as a set of moving images and shared with the society in a cinema or television.

Figure 5.1: An image illustrating a society. Source: https://www.freepik.com/free-vector/professional-society-isometricbackground_4430142.htm

The relationship between movement pictures and culture incorporates complicated energy; though American movement pictures certainly affect the mass culture that eats up them, they are as well a vital parcel of that culture, a thing of it, and so a reflection of winning concerns, states of intellect, and feelings. In considering the relationship between film and culture, it is basic to be past any question that, while certain conviction frameworks may be overwhelming in a given period, not because it is American culture as contrasting as the populaces that form it, but it to boot continuously changing from one period to the taking after (Korkonosenko, 2013). Standard motion pictures made inside the late 1940s and into the 1950s, for case, reflected the conservatism that overwhelmed the sociopolitical areas of the time. Be that

本书版权归Arcler所有

Role of Society and Culture in Film

83

because it may, by the 1960s, reactionary youth culture had begun to create resistance to the winning education, and these antiestablishment see some time recently long found their way onto the screen, a removed cry from the demeanors most commonly spoken to as it were a couple of a long time ago.

Figure 5.2: An image showing the storage location of a film. Source: https://aatfweb.org/2017/06/10/film-and-christian-preaching-towarda-cinemate-homiletic-part-ii/

The world is filled with many different cultures, and each one has its own set of norms and traditions. These differences can be seen in the way people dress, eat, talk, and live. Each country has its own culture, which is defined by its traditions and customs. Some of these cultures are very similar, while others are quite different. For example, in some countries like China, you are expected to be respectful to elderly people while in others like Japan the opposite is true. In some places, it is considered rude to put your left hand on someone’s shoulder while in others it is normal. Some cultures believe that there is only one right way to do something while other cultures believe that there are many ways to achieve the same results.

Figure 5.3: An image illustrating the connection between film and the society. Source: https://www.open.edu/openlearn/history-the-arts/history/film-and-society

本书版权归Arcler所有

84

Encyclopedia of Journalism and Mass Communication

The way these differences play out on screen can also be quite interesting as well as funny at times. For example, an American film might have a scene where a character breaks into tears over a minor loss or injury while another character from another culture might have an entirely different reaction such as laughing it off or being concerned about his health but not crying at all. The role of culture in the film is to help viewers learn about other cultures. By watching films like “Life of Pi” or “Avatar,” viewers can see how people from other countries live their lives and what makes them happy. Films like these also help viewers understand why some people act differently than others do, even if they don’t realize it at first glance (Kalatzi et al., 2018). In Western culture, we value individuality, creativity, and free expression. This means that we tend to value things like freedom of speech and religion over conformity to rules. On the other hand, Eastern cultures tend to value harmony with nature over individualism and creativity. One thing that all cultures have in common is the ability to adapt to different situations and circumstances. For a society to survive, it must be able to change its culture to fit new circumstances and accommodate new ideas. Many cultures have similar values such as family, hard work, and respect for elders; but they may differ in other aspects like religion, and language.

5.1.1. Depiction of Different Cultures in Film and Cinema Culture and society are constantly changing. Culture is defined by MerriamWebster as “the social behavior, intellectual, and emotional life of a particular people at a specific time.” This means that culture is tied to both taste and mores, that is, what is considered acceptable or unacceptable in a particular community. It also includes beliefs about human nature and behavior. Culture may be shared among different people within a group or group of groups, but it does not necessarily change over time. Culture can be defined as the way we live our lives, the way we think about those around us, and how we interact with them. It can also include our religious beliefs or cultural identity, the difference between being American versus being British or French Canadian would be considered one type of culture while being Muslim versus being Hindu would be considered another. While some cultures remain relatively steady, others quickly adapt to new circumstances and environments (Heider et al., 2005). Film and cinema represent these changes, as they present a representation of the culture that appeals to the masses. Film and cinema have been an important part of our society for over a century. As such, it is important to understand how culture is portrayed

本书版权归Arcler所有

Role of Society and Culture in Film

85

in film and cinema. This can help us understand how certain societies may be depicted in different ways to appeal to audiences or gain attention from them.

Figure 5.4: An illustration of different cultures in films. Source: https://www.entitymag.com/cultural-movies-see/

In films and cinema, the role of culture is to convey a message about life. This role can be seen in many different ways. Some films attempt to show how different cultures are depicted in film and cinema. For example, a film might portray a very passive culture or one that is very aggressive and violent. This can be seen through the use of language, clothing, or other aspects of the culture. Another way that society and culture are shown in the film is through their role as an educator. Many films have an educational purpose, such as showing children how to behave or how to act in certain situations. This can also be seen in how societies are portrayed in the film, some countries are depicted as being more accepting than others (for example, there may be more tolerance for homosexuality). Films can also portray societies as having different levels of technology available (for example an older society may only have electricity instead of cell phones). In a lot of ways, the role of culture and society in film is an important one. It’s not just that we show how people from different cultures interact with each other, it’s how we see those interactions in the first place. For example, if you were to watch a movie about a white American family living in California, you might assume that their way of life would be fairly similar to your own. But if you were to watch a movie with an all-black cast, that would be very different than what you’d expect from the same setting, and probably even more interesting. This is because the representation of culture and society can shape our expectations and help us get a better sense of what

本书版权归Arcler所有

86

Encyclopedia of Journalism and Mass Communication

things are like overall (Holbert & Grill, 2015). It also helps us connect with characters on an emotional level when we see them living out their lives, whether it be through music or dance or food, or any number of other things. Cultural differences are frequently portrayed in film and cinema. For example, when people from an Asian country visit America, they might be shocked to see that there are many different types of food available for purchase at the grocery store. This could be depicted by showing a scene in which a family of Asian immigrants is shown shopping at the grocery store and realizing that they cannot find anything that matches their traditional diet. In some cases, culture can play a role in how things are portrayed on screen or off the screen. For example, if an actor is playing a character from Asia who has some cultural differences from their American counterparts (for instance, not being able to understand English), then this would be portrayed as a negative aspect of them as an individual instead of just being part of their culture. Just as motion pictures reflect the tensions, convictions, and values of the societies that create them, they too offer assistance to shape and set a culture’s convictions. In some cases, the impact is trifling, as in the case of mold patterns or figures of discourse. Be that as it may, now and then the effect can be significant, driving social or political change, or the forming of belief systems. During the 1890s and up until around 1920, American culture experienced a period of fast industrialization (Hanitzsch, 2004). As individuals moved from ranches to centers of mechanical generation, urban ranges started to hold bigger and bigger concentrations of the populace. At the same time, film and other strategies of mass communication (publicizing and radio) were created, whose messages concerning tastes, wants, traditions, discourse, and behavior spread from these populace centers to distant ranges over the nation. The impact of early mass-communication media was to wear absent territorial contrasts and make a more homogenized, standardized culture.

5.1.2. Impact of film on Modifying Cultures around the World The role of film in modifying cultures around the world is essential. It allows people to see things they never would have otherwise, and it can help us understand those who are different from us. A film is a powerful tool that can change the way we see the world, and it has done so for many years. Many films have been made about society and culture around the world, and many more have been created based on existing films. The impact of these films is incredibly important, especially when it comes to understanding other parts of our world and learning how to interact with them positively.

本书版权归Arcler所有

Role of Society and Culture in Film

87

Figure 5.5: An illustration of the influence of film on culture. Source: ture/

https://prezi.com/qv46c-xkipzs/hollywoods-influence-on-global-cul-

For example, if you were to watch “The Godfather,” you would gain an understanding of how mafia families work and what makes them successful. You would also come away knowing what it means for someone to be loyal or disloyal towards their family members, which will help you decide whether or not you want to become part of such a group when you grow up. While watching “The Godfather,” you would learn many things about life outside America’s borders and how other people live; however, it wouldn’t necessarily change your life by any means because there are lots of other movies out there that do just as much good.

Figure 5.6: An illustration of the Godfather movie. Source: https://elcinema.com/en/work/1462364/

本书版权归Arcler所有

88

Encyclopedia of Journalism and Mass Communication

The impact of movies on the world is undeniable. From the way we dress to the way we act; Hollywood has had a profound effect on our culture. There are many differences between American and international cinema, but one of the more important ones is the role of society and culture in film. In America, there is a strong tradition of artistry and individuality that allows filmmakers to explore their subjects in unique ways. These cultural differences can also be seen in how different countries treat certain subjects or themes. For example, American films tend to focus on sex and violence while international films tend to shy away from such topics altogether, or at least hide them better (Grimes, 2009). The movie industry is one of the most powerful forces in modern culture. It can shape and influence people’s beliefs, values, and behavior. The impact of film on cultures around the world is undeniable. For example, many people in India believe that films are created by special beings called “Brahma,” which means “God” in Sanskrit. In contrast, many people in America believe that films are created by special beings called “directors,” which means “director” in English. In India, films are considered sacred because they often depict stories from Hindu mythology. This explains why so many Indians go to see movies when they want to feel connected with their traditional culture and beliefs. In contrast, Americans go to see movies because they think it will make them feel closer to their Western culture and way of life. In the world of film and television, there are many ways in which it can impact cultures around the world. One such way is by encouraging viewers to look at issues in their own country through an international lens. In recent years, many films have been made about global issues that affect people around the world. These films provide audiences with a sense of empathy for those who are experiencing hardships in their own home countries, as well as insights into how other cultures operate and live. Modern research uncovered more significant viewpoints on film’s effect on society. The account and representational perspectives of the film make it an entire one-of-a-kind shape of craftsmanship. Besides, the collective involvement of film as craftsmanship renders it an entirely particular recreation movement. The one-of-a-kind properties of going to the cinema can have definitively positive impacts on mental wellbeing. Cinema participation can have free and vigorous impacts on mental prosperity since visual incitement

本书版权归Arcler所有

Role of Society and Culture in Film

89

can line an extent of feelings and the collective involvement of these feelings through the cinema gives a secure environment in which to encounter parts and feelings, we might not something else is free to involvement (Guo et al., 2016). The collective nature of the account and visual incitement makes the involvement pleasant and controlled, subsequently advertising benefits past unimportant visual incitement. In addition, the cinema is special in that it could be an exceedingly open social craftsmanship frame, the interest in which for the most part cuts over financial lines. At the same time, going to the cinema permits for the work out of individual inclinations and the human requirements for refinement. In a nutshell, cinema participation can be both an expressive involvement, great fun, and helpful at the same time.

5.2. THE ROLE OF FILM IN THE SOCIETY The film could be a reflection of society, both present, and past. I think the film and its developments some of the time has got to capture up to society but some of the time it leads society as well. Motion pictures are stories, motion pictures are individuals who come out with thoughts approximately something they need to say, something they need to tell somebody. Motion pictures are a shape of communication in which communication, those stories, come from social orders- not fair where society is directly and what it’s doing presently- but where society has been. It’s been that way for as long as motion pictures have been around. Movies are distinctive things to distinctive individuals, that’s what is so extraordinary almost them. As the frames move and tell a story, it is that advancement that candidly interfaces with you. Each country has stories to tell, nearly their past, their culture by and by, and sees of what long run will see like through their eyes. What hadn’t happened for various a long time, and what started to happen moderately as of late was a few things. Firstly, movement picture theaters began to be built all over the world- not reasonable here inside the USA (Gotlieb et al., 2017). In various parts of the world, the marvel of movement picture theaters is because they were ten or fifteen a long time ancient. These theaters convey people a put to go, to evade, to memorize. Sometime recently, society had the stories, but they didn’t genuinely have the places to go and appreciate them like that.

本书版权归Arcler所有

90

Encyclopedia of Journalism and Mass Communication

Figure 5.7. Image showing a brief summary of the role of film in the society. Source: https://www.aplustopper.com/essay-on-impact-of-cinema-in-life/

5.3. THE IMPACT OF CURRENT AFFAIRS, SOCIAL ISSUES, AND CORPORATE INTERESTS ON FILM In the past, the film was seen as a purely artistic medium. However, in recent years it has become more influential in society. This is because of the impact that films have on people’s lives and how they influence them to think about things in a certain way. For example, films can help people understand current affairs and politics better because they show them how important these issues are and what can happen if an issue isn’t dealt with properly. Another example is that films can show people how society works in different ways through their plotlines and characters. For example, if you watch an action movie then you may be able to learn something about fighting techniques from watching someone fight against another person or group of people who want something from them, such as money. In today’s world, where current affairs and politics are often discussed on television and social media, the film can be an important vehicle for these conversations. However, just because the film is a visual medium does not mean that everything in it should be accepted without questioning. Films should be evaluated critically and with an eye toward their ethical implications.

本书版权归Arcler所有

Role of Society and Culture in Film

91

Figure 5.8: An image showing the impact of current affairs on film. Source: https://unesdoc.unesco.org/ark:/48223/pf0000379165.locale=en

The film is a medium that can educate and entertain, while also having the power to inspire. However, when a film’s content is not balanced with an equal number of positive messages, it can hurt society. The current affairs that surround us today can be a source of inspiration for filmmakers who want to create films about social issues and politics. The recent election season in America has provided many opportunities for filmmakers to produce films that tackle these issues head-on (Grömping, 2019). During presidential elections, there are many opportunities for filmmakers to explore issues of racism, segregation, hate crimes, and prejudice: by showing them from the perspective of politicians or candidates running for office. During the Second World War motion pictures within the USA made a feeling of valor and courage in what we were doing and you saw this in movies that came out at the time such as the Purple Heart. It was amid this time moreover that John Wayne got to be a colossal star, having advanced to this fashion from the westerns. We are required to lift our spirits. There’s an ancient movie saying, which the conveyance and showcasing individuals adore. Amid a retreat, commerce gets superior, it doesn’t droop. In case you see the numbers of the motion picture commerce you’ll wonder why that happens. It’s since individuals need to go and get absent, and they need to

本书版权归Arcler所有

92

Encyclopedia of Journalism and Mass Communication

be able to feel distinctive. In this sense, it doesn’t matter whether you concur or oppose this idea with the motion picture substance. Movies moreover make a debate, they make discussion, they make an air. Not all motion pictures of course, but movies are regularly made by filmmakers who want to require a position on a topic, and you’ll wrangle about it. One of the governors of the Foundation may be a noble man by the title of Michael Moore who is to clear out of the clear out. Michael Moore makes motion pictures from a point of view, and whether you concur with him or not, whether you like him or not, it doesn’t matter- his motion pictures make wrangle about, which could be a great thing.

5.4. ROLE OF FILM AWARDS IN FILMS, SOCIETY, AND THE INDUSTRY The role of film awards in films, society, and the industry is to give recognition to the best performers. For a film to be award-winning, it must have a strong cast that can convey its emotions through acting. Award-winning actors are those who can show their emotions through acting. It does not matter if they are good or bad actors; what matters is that these actors can convey their emotions through acting for a film to be award-winning (Gillmor, 2016). The film awards are very important in society and culture because it brings together all the people from different fields to celebrate the importance of cinema. Films have also played a significant role in shaping the lives of people around us through their art and creativity. Films help us to see things from another perspective which helps us to understand each other better. These awards are also considered the most prestigious award of all time because they encourage people to make films that will be remembered for years to come. Film awards allow filmmakers to get their work recognized by others who work hard on their craft every day but need some recognition from others who are just as creative as they are but may not get much recognition due to the lack of funding or resources needed for people to succeed financially at what they do best – making films. Society and culture play an important role in film awards because these two factors help determine what kind of movies get made and what kind of movies don’t get made. For example, if there are plenty of movies about drug addicts and criminals, then society will think that drug addicts and criminals are interesting characters. The society also plays an important role in determining what kind of movies get made because some people may not want certain types of movies made because they don’t agree with them

本书版权归Arcler所有

Role of Society and Culture in Film

93

or think they are illegal or immoral (George, 2011). This leads us back to society being important when it comes down to movie production because it helps determine what kinds of things get made through its influence on society as well as through its influence on film awards which ultimately determines what kinds of movies get made. For example, the Oscars which are an annual award ceremony that recognizes excellence in filmmaking are usually presented by a committee of more than 5,000 members. The Academy Awards are presented at the end of a year and are nominated by members of the Academy of Motion Picture Arts and Sciences. The award is given in several categories including film, actors, actresses, and other categories. The awards can be given to the best films or the best actors in a particular film. There are also many other categories like Best Director and Best Actress which can be awarded to multiple people in a single movie. The Academy Awards are considered one of the most prestigious awards in the world because it showcases the best work done by filmmakers all over the world.

Figure 5.9: An image showing the Oscars awards. Source: https://abc.com/shows/oscars

5.5. HOW DIFFERENT COUNTRIES DIFFER IN THEIR JOURNALISM PRACTICES The role of society and culture in the film is to provide a setting for the story. The story itself is what we are interested in when watching a film, but the setting provides a context for the characters, especially the main character, who is often at odds with society and the culture around them. This can be seen in many films where there is an emphasis on how different countries

本书版权归Arcler所有

94

Encyclopedia of Journalism and Mass Communication

differ in how they practice journalism (Fleming, 2014). The role of society and culture in the film is an important one. As we have seen, journalism can be practiced differently all over the world, but some commonalities help us understand how our society relates to the practice of journalism.

Figure 5.10: An illustration of what journalism entails. Source: https://www.searchenginejournal.com/journalism-tactics-for-seo-content/403226/

Journalism is a profession that has been around for centuries. It has evolved, and how it is practiced differs from country to country. In some countries, such as the United States, journalism is practiced through a free press that publishes newspapers, magazines, and other media of its choice. In other countries, such as China or Russia, journalism is practiced through government-controlled media outlets that receive government funding and have strict rules about what can and cannot be published. In the United States, for example, journalism is practiced by newspapers, magazines, and television stations. This means that different forms of journalism are practiced within each medium—for example, magazines may specialize in lifestyle reporting or feature articles about fashion designers or interior decorators. In other countries such as Japan or China, however, television stations tend to focus more on broadcasting news than they do on journalism itself. In these countries, the practice of journalism can often be seen as less competitive and less refined than its American counterpart because it doesn’t seem necessary for people to be able to read or write before they can be considered trustworthy journalists themselves.

本书版权归Arcler所有

Role of Society and Culture in Film

95

Figure 5.11: An image showing a brief summary of relationship in journalism among different countries. Source: https://www.slideshare.net/macloo/global-journalism

Over its presently 10-year life expectancy, the Universes of News coverage Ponder has ended up a collaborative endeavor that created a life of it possess. Nowadays, the Universes of News coverage Ponder is a mental community, a stage for the trade of information, a device for the sharing of information and involvement, and a vehicle to drive comparative inquiry within the field (Fuerst et al., 2015). Presently, the extension has ended up the largest collaborative endeavor within the field, and a demonstration for numerous other, comparative ponders. In the long, run we trust that the ponder may get to be institutionalized indeed more, to the degree that it may conduct comparative overviews over time for a longitudinal evaluation of the advancement of news coverage societies. Like each other social hone, news coverage cannot presently completely be caught on separated from globalization. This handle alludes to the escalation of social interconnects, which permits securing the world as a single put, making more noteworthy mindfulness of our possess put and its relative area inside the run of world involvement. As a portion of a bigger stage of communication media, news coverage contributes to this involvement and hence speaks to a key component in these social changes, both as cause and result. These issues at the crossing point of news coverage and globalization characterize a vital and developing field of investigation, especially concerning the open circle and spaces for political talk. The think of globalization has gotten to be an elegant development industry, pulling

本书版权归Arcler所有

96

Encyclopedia of Journalism and Mass Communication

in an intriguing grouping of researchers. News coverage, in the meantime, itself has ended up a vital subject in it possess right inside media thinks about, with a developing number of ventures taking an international point of view. Worldwide associations back modern shapes of news coverage, which make politically noteworthy modern spaces inside social frameworks, lead to social alter, and benefit certain shapes. In this manner, we need to know how news coverage has contributed to these unused spaces, bringing together modern combinations of transnational elites, media experts, and citizens. The addition of these unused rationales into national communities, particularly those closed or firmly controlled social orders, can bring a vital motivation for social alter (Esser & Umbricht, 2014). Understanding the complex transaction worldwide and nearby requires an intriguing point of view, blending the humanism of globalization with viewpoints of topography and social human studies. This makes a difference maintain a strategic distance from comparing certain developing worldwide news shapes with a modern and unmistakable open circle. The globalization of news coverage happens through a huge number of levels, connections, social on-screen characters, and places, as they combine to form modern open spaces. Communication inquire about may bring news coverage legitimately to the fore, but it must be considered inside the experiences into places and connections given by these other disciplines. Media globalization has brought many challenges to media organizations, particularly in the area of scale and homogeneity. With the advent of digital media, the ability for organizations to reach large audiences and create content that is accessible to a global audience has become much more possible. However, this ability also brings with it a new set of challenges. To create content that can be used in international markets, companies must take into consideration how their content will be perceived by audiences overseas. In addition, companies must also consider how these local audiences react to different types of content and messages. While some aspects of media globalization are very positive, such as increased access, other aspects can have negative effects on corporate culture and practices if not managed properly.

本书版权归Arcler所有

Role of Society and Culture in Film

97

Figure 5.12: An image showing a summary on media globalization. Source: https://www.slideshare.net/mirakdesai/media-globalization-and-cultural-imperialism

As the world becomes increasingly connected, global media companies face new challenges. To compete in a highly competitive market, these companies must be able to produce content that appeals to consumers across multiple cultures and languages. There are two main issues facing media companies: scale and homogeneity. Scale refers to the size of a company or organization. In terms of media companies, this means the number of countries they can operate in and how many languages their content can be produced in (Duffield, 2011). For media companies to stay competitive and produce content that is appealing across all regions, they must have large enough teams that can produce content in multiple languages at once while also being able to scale up as needed when demand increases. Homogeneity refers to uniformity within a company or organization’s product line or service offerings. Media companies face this problem because consumers in different regions expect certain types of content from them, content that reflects their own culture and values—and those expectations vary from region to region around the world. Media companies must ensure their products are appealing across all cultures without losing sight. The film industry is a global phenomenon that has been around for hundreds of years. It has a history of being highly collaborative and interdisciplinary, and it has also always been a place where people from different countries come together to create something that they can all identify with. When we look at the role of journalism practices in this field, we see that there are many different elements involved in creating a film. Some of these include

本书版权归Arcler所有

98

Encyclopedia of Journalism and Mass Communication

creating sets, costumes, and props; writing scripts; directing actors; editing the footage together so that it fits together seamlessly; etcetera. This means that many different people are working on creating the same thing, it’s not just one person doing everything by themselves! This makes sense because you need multiple people working together to create something as complex as a film, or any other work, especially when there are so many different parts involved (Domingo et al., 2008). In our society today, we live in an age where we have access to almost anything we want right at our fingertips through technology. This means that most people don’t need to go out into the world anymore if they don’t want to. Journalism Space is a term used to describe the space that exists between journalists and their audiences. This can be as simple as having an audience, or it can be more complex, as in the case of journalism’s dependence on digital media. Journalists are often seen as being at the center of this space. Their role is vital for informing and educating people about what is happening in the world. However, they are also inextricably linked with their audience, who are often unable to see themselves or their interests reflected in what the journalist reports on. This creates a gap between them that needs to be filled by other things, like journalism itself. In today’s world, journalism is not only a profession but also a political act. It is a way of life for many journalists and it is an essential part of their identities. The role of journalism in society has changed since the advent of digital technology, which has made it possible for reporters to be more independent than ever before. The role of journalism in the networked global news arena is to provide citizens with reliable information, which they can use to make informed decisions.

Figure 5.13: An image illustrating a journalism space. Source: https://www.poynter.org/educators-students/2021/heres-a-look-intomy-camera-roll-after-a-trek-around-the-countrys-college-journalism-spaces/

本书版权归Arcler所有

Role of Society and Culture in Film

99

The study of journalism practices has long been a key component of the field of communication. In recent years, though, scholars have begun to analyze how journalists’ work is affected by cultural and social factors. In particular, scholars have begun to examine the role that social institutions play in shaping news coverage. For example, many studies have examined how issues like race, gender, and class shape how stories are covered by journalists (Deuze, 2002). A recent study found that when covering police brutality against blacks, white journalists are more likely to use inflammatory language than black journalists. Another way in which society can impact journalism practices is through its influence on the relationship between journalists and their audiences.

5.6. FILM AS A MIRROR OF SOCIETY The film is a mirror of the society we live in. The film industry today is full of stories that reflect the social reality of the present day. It has been said that film is more than just entertainment and art. It is also a great tool for social change and development. The film can be used as a medium for social awakening and change. The film can teach people about their own culture, beliefs, and values through stories and characters that reflect reallife situations or events.

Figure 5.14: An image of a quote declaring film as a mirror of society. Source: https://www.azquotes.com/quote/1575024

While it may seem as though all films are created equal, the truth is that there is a difference between good and bad films. The quality of a film can be judged by its ability to accurately reflect the values of society at large

本书版权归Arcler所有

100

Encyclopedia of Journalism and Mass Communication

and its ability to tell a story that resonates with its audience. The role of film in society has come under scrutiny in recent years, with many people arguing that it has become too commercialized and that this has led to an oversaturation of mediocre content. However, some argue that while the film may have changed over time, it has always been a reflection of what’s going on elsewhere, a mirror of how people feel about themselves and their surroundings (Detenber et al., 2012). Movies have continuously been a reflection reflecting the genuine picture of our society. Cinema as well may be a frame of mass media that is propelled and affected by society and very delightfully and successfully depicts the minutes of life perfectly. Movies are nothing but the amalgamation of craftsmanship, writing, and science. Whereas craftsmanship and writing reflect the minutes of life brilliantly, science considers man and his world. And since cinema is the combination of the three, it without a doubt, depicts a man and his life in society. Indian cinema that completed traveled for hundred a long time reflecting different colors and perspectives of society with each passing decade. Prior, most movies were made with the country’s foundation in their background. But these days, with urbanization taking put over the nation at a quick pace most of the movies being made these days center on the urban lives of the individuals. Today’s movies reflect the changing design of lives in towns and towns, modern social morals, and the impact of modernization and globalization. One of the major advantages of a film being a mirror of society is that it allows people to see themselves reflected in the characters they see on screen. This gives people an opportunity to connect with characters on an emotional level, which increases their empathy for others. However, this also makes it easy for people to identify with fictional characters and feel as though they’re experiencing something similar even if it’s not actually happening in real life. This creates a sense of disconnect between reality and fiction, which can cause problems when viewing media because people might begin to believe things they aren’t actually seeing or hearing are true or believable.

本书版权归Arcler所有

Role of Society and Culture in Film

101

Figure 5.15: An image stating the advantages and disadvantages of movies. Source: https://kidspot.co.nz/school-age/how-movies-can-impact-a-childs-development/

The role of film in society is an important one, and the media plays an important role in the world. However, there are some disadvantages to it being such a mirror of society. The first is that it can be very difficult to change the way people think by simply educating them through film. This is because many people have already been exposed to certain ideas and beliefs already, and so they may not be as receptive as others would be. The second disadvantage is that it can be hard for people who don’t like what they see in film to get out of their comfort zone and try something new (Curtin et al., 2018). They may not feel comfortable watching certain kinds of movies or TV shows, even if their friends are watching them. The third disadvantage is that some people will only watch certain kinds of movies or TV shows because they think they should be doing so; however, this can lead them down a path where they don’t enjoy anything else as much either. A film can be used as propaganda by those who want their own ideas spread around the world too quickly. This makes people believe things that aren’t true because they don’t want other people to know their opinion first before saying anything themselves.

本书版权归Arcler所有

本书版权归Arcler所有

CHAPTER

6

PROPAGANDA IN MEDIA

CONTENTS

本书版权归Arcler所有

6.1. Research.......................................................................................... 105 6.2. Role of Media in Promoting Violence............................................... 105 6.3. Media Impact in Increasing Cases of Violence, Especially Among the Youths......................................................... 111 6.4. Propaganda Models Commonly Followed by Media Houses............ 113 6.5. Leakage-Related Controversies........................................................ 118 6.6. Misinformation and Fake News........................................................ 122

104

Encyclopedia of Journalism and Mass Communication

Propaganda is a type of persuasion that is frequently used in the media to promote an agenda, such as a personal, political, or business agenda, to elicit an emotional or obligatory response from the audience. The goal of public relations is to influence people’s thinking and motivate them to act by disseminating information. Richard Alan Nelson defines propaganda as “a type of intentional persuasion involving the controlled transmission of onesided information through mass media.” Propaganda and mass media are inextricably linked. By disseminating and relaying information and ideas about the social norms and values that govern their lives, broadcasting serves to both entertain and educate the public. As a result, propaganda serves to amplify already existing social divisions. In today’s media-saturated society, propaganda and agendas are primarily advanced through the use of mass media. Today, propaganda can be disseminated through a variety of modern media, ranging from radio and television to films and posters to handouts and music on mobile phones (Cohen, 2001). Despite its religious origins, the term “propaganda” has come to mean something negative in politics. During a conflict, public opinion must frequently be swayed to gain new international allies and persuade civilians at home to join the fight. When the thirteen colonies attempted to secede from Great Britain, the media used propaganda to their advantage. The term has acquired negative connotations rather than neutral ones. In political contexts, the phrase is used in journalism, advertising, and education. Non-democratic countries will continue to use propaganda to indoctrinate their citizens for the foreseeable future. “Propaganda” is a well-known term with a long history. Social media platforms People have unprecedented access to the Internet, and social networking sites such as Facebook and Twitter enable a robust exchange of ideas and discussion. Propaganda can take many forms, such as videos, posts, and comments on social media platforms such as Facebook and Twitter. Another factor in social media’s effectiveness in spreading propaganda is its ability to reach a large audience with little effort, as well as users’ ability to filter content to exclude what they do not want while keeping what they do want. This accessibility can be used by individuals, government agencies, and politicians to disseminate “junk” news in support of their agendas.

本书版权归Arcler所有

Propaganda in Media

105

6.1. RESEARCH

Figure 6.1: Online news search. Source: https://media.istockphoto.com/vectors/online-news-search-andreading-news-updates-news-websites-information-vector-id1368872054?k= 20&m=1368872054&s=612x612&w=0&h=9xkWE8EL20_KitIJ1b18mpHcw59IxJ8kdq9k_cNUrus=

6.2. ROLE OF MEDIA IN PROMOTING VIOLENCE Because it encourages real-world aggression and violence, violence in the media can harm public health. According to one study, young people who watch a lot of violent television and movies are more likely to be aggressive and violent themselves. On television newscasts, mock suicides and violent crimes are becoming more common. Long-term longitudinal studies are lacking, but evidence suggests that video games can increase aggressiveness and violence in the short term. A person’s personality and social environment, for example, can influence how important media violence is in his or her aggression. A public health risk is one with a large enough average effect size to warrant attention (Claussen, 2007). The first startling discovery when discussing the relationship between media and society is that violence depicted in the media can have a specific effect on viewers. Since the turn

本书版权归Arcler所有

106

Encyclopedia of Journalism and Mass Communication

of the twentieth century, study after study has shown how violent content affects both individuals and society. This issue arises to reach a larger audience while protecting financial interests. Selling violence is a piece of cake. It’s common in movies, TV shows, news reports, video games, and social media because it’s intriguing and piques people’s interest. As a result, the question of whether exposure to extreme violence in the media desensitizes viewers and leads to an increase in violence in real life must be addressed. We are all aware of how much attention action and violent scenes receive in films and on television because they pique the interest of the audience. Because it is the most eyecatching element, physical violence is an excellent way to draw attention to a news story’s headline. The most powerful headlines highlight the text’s most violent terms and clauses. Excessive adjectives and adverbs can make even good news appear bad to a reporter and reader. When one person acts violently, others will follow suit. Traditional mass media, such as television, newspapers, and video games, portray violence as a psychological phenomenon.

Figure 6.2: People using smartphones. Source: https://media.istockphoto.com/photos/four-friends-are-usingsmart-phones-while-they-are-sitting-in-a-park-picture-id1350856521?k= 20&m=1350856521&s=612x612&w=0&h=WJb1pSZNjb1DHvaoA9w_ jUIlsO1Mx1_21TRnAWSSNZQ=

本书版权归Arcler所有

Propaganda in Media

107

Children who have been exposed to violence are more likely to exhibit aggressive, violent, and introverted personality traits, according to clinical research. The most intriguing aspect of the situation is that violence does not have to be witnessed in real life. Violent media can have a similar effect, whether it is in the form of a video game, a television show, or a motion picture. These findings also show that this age group of young people is more likely to commit crimes. Criminality and violence are inextricably linked, according to the findings. Every society attempts to reduce and prevent violence in various ways, including the use of the media (Carpenter, 2008). Despite the absurdity of being exposed to violence through the media, this is reality. Crime will inevitably increase in a society where violence is on the rise. We’ve all witnessed violence at some point in our lives because it is a learned behavior. These are the four possible outcomes. Individuals are influenced by media violence in four ways. Some of the side effects include aggression, fear of victimization, depersonalization, and a decrease in appetite. These four outcomes demonstrate the dangers that media violence can pose to our society. If desensitization becomes widespread, it will have a devastating impact on real-world victims of violence. Because violent acts are perceived as normal, natural, and unexceptional, they are more likely to be accepted. This is the single most important factor in the spread of violence in society. The media tools themselves, which are primarily to blame for the depersonalizing effects they have, are the most powerful defenders of the current state of affairs. The media exposes us to a lot of violence in our daily lives, which has an impact on society. The language used in news reporting the use of force, brutality, and abuse of power is the broadest definitions of violence. Despite the term “violence,” there are numerous types of violence, including physical, psychological, verbal, nonverbal, and sexual aggression. It is surprising to learn that media representations of violence predate the advent of mass media in general. It gives the impression that all forms of violence are to be expected or expected in this manner. The fact that many people have never been exposed to this level of violence is no longer relevant. Academics have been debating the prevalence of violence in the media and conducting numerous studies on the subject for many years. The most obvious reason for media violence’s prevalence is that it boosts advertising revenue.

本书版权归Arcler所有

108

Encyclopedia of Journalism and Mass Communication

Figure 6.3: Rioters on Capitol Hill. Source: https://media.istockphoto.com/vectors/rioters-on-capitol-hill-vector-id 1369924715?k=20&m=1369924715&s=612x612&w=0&h=oOwaGyShznrH 1NCSdjPPzYWCemw91SbzaMDCfcy9wD0=

To put it another way, it increases the popularity and consumption of media content. According to some theorists, all forms of violence are a collection of learned behaviors. It is important to note that the media’s portrayal of violent acts can encourage people to commit violent acts themselves (Bowe et al., 2020). Given this, we appear to be in the midst of a major crisis. Any media content created anywhere in the world, regardless of location, can now be instantly broadcasted. It is well known how easily violent goods can be obtained, produced quickly, and widely disseminated. Individuals may be subjected to the same violent element multiple times as a result of factors such as recording, sharing, and rewatching. Instead of being a process that increases the frequency and intensity of media violence, digitalization has evolved into an unstoppable force for good in the world. Some theorists, on the other hand, believe that exposure to violent media does not always result in violent behavior. Violence is a learned behavior, but media-induced violence, according to these people, will soon be obsolete.

本书版权归Arcler所有

Propaganda in Media

109

Figure 6.4: Smartphone streaming. Source: https://media.istockphoto.com/photos/encrypted-mobile-data-from-asmartphone-5g-steaming-service-creative-picture-id1286158491?k=20&m=1 286158491&s=612x612&w=0&h=XYMjEOJ2dRSLIUeMpvtlP82MCizwX8n_ h0gKoFv_fJ0=

They are aware of this. Numerous tests have confirmed this hypothesis. According to a study of children and adolescents, children who watch violent cartoons engage in violent play with their toys, but this behavior is temporary. The central question is how much violence in the media influences children’s behavior. We know that cartoons influence children’s behavior, even if only for a short time. If violence is prevalent in all forms of media, particularly news, which is the most accurate reflection of the real world, it may have an impact on everyone in society (Bronstein & Fitzpatrick, 2015). The next symptom to appear is depersonalization. People who aren’t naturally wary of violent situations may see them as commonplace or unavoidable. Although violent content is prevalent in all forms of media, including video games, TV shows, and films, news articles are no exception. Some people believe that violent news stories are more dangerous than nonviolent stories. According to this viewpoint, the rest of the world’s media is a collection of fictional stories. Regardless, “news” is still viewed as a reflection of reality. As a result of violence in the media, people may begin to believe that it is much more common than it is. The way language is used in the news media can have a big impact on the public. Despite the existence of numerous legal regulations, ethical principles, publishing rules, and responsibilities to protect individuals and society from the negative effects of media violence,

本书版权归Arcler所有

110

Encyclopedia of Journalism and Mass Communication

it has been impossible to completely eradicate violence in media content. Warning symbols and other measures can help to reduce children’s exposure to violent media. However, in today’s digital age, it appears impossible to limit media content. Violence is the only genre in which cultural differences do not affect global marketability, making it an exception to the rule. As a result, many forms of media, including video games, television shows, movies, and newspapers, now frequently contain violent content. Violence can be found in a wide range of media due to the ease with which it can be marketed around the world. Technological advancements that have made it easier for people to access information have also contributed to the disadvantages of constant exposure to information. Unfortunately, a large portion of media content contains violence. Furthermore, news reports are a significant source of violent extremism. Reports of violence against women, on the other hand, have been shown to increase the number of such incidents. People who are prone to violence can benefit from seeing violent news presented in detail and drama. Media language has a significant impact on public safety and should not be overlooked. Desensitization to violence is directly related to the use of language that normalizes violence, which reduces one’s ability to prevent violence.

Figure 6.5: TV receivers. Source: https://media.istockphoto.com/photos/retro-tv-receivers-set-from-circa-60s-70s-and-80s-of-xx-century-old-picture-id1218739882?k=20&m=121 8739882&s=612x612&w=0&h=MWX3iehmvPtM-eltKBHz-xOn3z8BV6gEi6WJA8rcQss=

本书版权归Arcler所有

Propaganda in Media

111

6.3. MEDIA IMPACT IN INCREASING CASES OF VIOLENCE, ESPECIALLY AMONG THE YOUTHS Media violence, according to studies on violent television and movies, video games, and music, enhances the chance of aggressive and violent conduct in both short- and long-term situations. The impacts on severe forms of violence are considerable when compared to other risk factors for violence or medical consequences regarded as noteworthy by the medical establishment. Milder types of aggressiveness appear to be more vulnerable to the impacts than more severe kinds (for example, aspirin’s effect on heart attacks) (e.g., the effect of aspirin on heart attacks). Across a wide range of study approaches and media genres, consistent results may be obtained. The most comprehensive research on violent cinema and television gives the most convincing evidence. An increasing number of video game research are reaching the same findings (Blankenship & Gibson, 2016). Aggression is increased by short-term exposure to violent ideas, feelings, and physical and verbal behaviors. Early exposure to violent media has been related to later aggressiveness, such as physical assault and domestic violence. Large-scale longitudinal research. New longitudinal research with bigger samples is needed to determine how much chronic early exposure to media violence (such as forced rape, serious assault, and homicide) increases the likelihood of extreme violence (such as forcible rape) According to a persuasive argument, violent media exposure is associated with greater hostility and violence. Media violence produces short-term increases by activating preexisting violent scripts and cognitions, increasing physiological arousal, and sparking an innate impulse to replicate witnessed behaviors. People’s normal emotional reactions to violence are diminished as a result, and they participate in multiple learning processes that result in the development of persistent (and easily available) violent scripts, interpretational schemas, and social behavior beliefs that reinforce aggressiveness (i.e., desensitization).

本书版权归Arcler所有

112

Encyclopedia of Journalism and Mass Communication

Figure 6.6: Illustration of reader newspaper. Source: https://media.istockphoto.com/vectors/vector-illustration-newspaperand-reader-vector-id1320644939?k=20&m=1320644939&s=612x612&w=0 &h=7wlWOqKwL8oowIoqqT8P4Egh7H1AWkreT4lQJJvK4Ok=

The extent to which media violence impacts aggressiveness can be influenced by observer qualities (such as affiliation with violent characters) and social circumstances (such as parental influences). Furthermore, this study suggests that parents monitor and evaluate their children’s media intake. According to the moderators’ research, no one is immune to the harm caused by media violence. According to recent polls, violence is a prominent subject in the media. As a result, many adolescents and teens are subjected to excessive quantities of violent media. Reduced media violence exposure

本书版权归Arcler所有

Propaganda in Media

113

decreases aggressiveness and violence; however, it is unclear what sorts of treatments will result in decreased exposure (Biswas & Sipes, 2020). Even if the scientific discussion over whether media violence generates more violent behavior is finished, many crucial tasks must still be done. More study is required to better understand the underlying psychological processes that will lead to more successful interventions in the lab and the field. Longterm research would help us better understand the impact of media violence on the most severe types of violence. Children and adolescents who are exposed to media violence are more likely to develop mental and physical health problems if the scientific, journalism, public policy, and entertainment sectors fail to educate the general public about the underlying consequences of this exposure.

6.4. PROPAGANDA MODELS COMMONLY FOLLOWED BY MEDIA HOUSES The propaganda model was developed by Herman and Chomsky, two notable political economists, to explain how propaganda and systemic biases operate in corporate mass media. According to this view, propaganda may be used to “generate” public support for local and global economic, social, and political aims. Because of its organizational structure, corporate media is viewed as a medium for anti-democratic propaganda, whether it is supported by public funding or private advertising. Herman and Chomsky’s Propaganda Filtering Model The propaganda model: According to the book The Political Economy of Mass Media, corporate media outlets are more interested in collecting money from the sale of their consumers (readers and viewers) to other companies than in public interest journalism (advertisers). Except for the most extreme components or a very tiny proportion of scholarly literature, Noam Chomsky believes that there should be no exceptions to this criterion in terms of “societal goal.” Filters on a media platform, for example, can be used to change the type of news that is disseminated (Ashley, 2015). One of the five components of media control are anti-communism or “fear ideologue.” The first three are often regarded as the most significant. The propaganda function of the media has been assessed in Western Europe and Latin America. The sheer scale and financial interests of large media corporations increase ownership prejudice. According to the authors, in the early nineteenth century, a radical British press was prevented from addressing worker problems by high stamp prices intended to limit newspaper

本书版权归Arcler所有

114

Encyclopedia of Journalism and Mass Communication

ownership to the “respectable” rich. Despite this, a variety of solutions were available. After World War II, radical or pro-worker newspapers in the United Kingdom included the Daily Herald, News Chronicle, and Sunday Citizen, all of which have since ceased publication or been absorbed by other publications, as well as the Daily Mirror, which published such articles until at least the late 1970s. Because they were not influenced by corporations, the first radical journals were able to speak out against capitalism. The top six media businesses in 2014, as well as some of their links, are shown below. [4] Is this information trustworthy? Because most media channels are owned by major corporations or conglomerates, Herman and Chomsky contend that public perception is biased (such as Westinghouse or General Electric). Firms’ financial interests are jeopardized if specific information is revealed by entities that operate beyond the scope of the media.

Figure 6.7: News on a smartphone. Source: https://media.istockphoto.com/photos/online-news-on-a-smartphoneand-laptop-woman-reading-news-or-articles-picture-id1219980553?k=20&m =1219980553&s=612x612&w=0&h=Z_PYN8hUhpybjJhZyIS95qptHXF6UesUQ83miYrSNrs=

Media proprietors will be particularly disturbed since the news threatens their companies. The most profitable news agencies trade impartiality for

本书版权归Arcler所有

Propaganda in Media

115

profit; as a result, their reporting on news with a conflict of interest is inherently slanted. In the propaganda paradigm, advertising functions as a secondary filter. Most newspapers would have to raise their subscription prices if they did not have advertising. If a newspaper is unable to get as much advertising as its competitors, it suffers a serious competitive disadvantage. In the nineteenth and twentieth centuries, the failure of “people’s newspapers” to produce advertising revenue was a major cause of concern. Because companies pay to have their things promoted in a daily newspaper, wealthy readers who subscribe to it are the newspaper’s ultimate clients. They are a well-educated and powerful population in society. According to this filter, the news is essential “filler” aimed to encourage privileged readers to investigate the advertisements that comprise the content; as a result, it will be presented in a manner most likely to appeal to intelligent decision-makers (Brandon, 2002). Marketers, according to the theory, would be forbidden from employing narratives and worldviews that contradict consumers’ “purchasing mood.” According to this viewpoint, the only benefactors of news coverage as a commodity are companies who buy advertising space and people who buy newspapers.

6.4.1. Sourcing The news media is the third of Herman and Chomsky’s five filters. To fulfill the twin demands of economic necessity and mutual desire, influential information sources and mass media must collaborate as a team. News organizations, such as the BBC, simply cannot afford to staff correspondents in every part of the world. The White House, Pentagon, and 10 Downing Street are the key sources of news regarding breaking developments. Despite their continual condemnation of New Labor’s propaganda, the British media continues to depend on “the Prime Minister’s spokesperson” for official information. You can rely on them for reliable information. If these powerful news sources anger editors and journalists by casting doubt on the impartiality or legitimacy of their material, they may lose access to breaking news that is critical to their media business’ existence. Media organizations are afraid of disclosing information that might harm their financing sources. The distinction between “officials have access to facts” and “reporters have access to information” is significant. Journalists must be uncritical to accept corporate ideologueies without experiencing cognitive dissonance.

本书版权归Arcler所有

116

Encyclopedia of Journalism and Mass Communication

Figure 6.8: Manipulation and brainwash concept. Source: https://media.istockphoto.com/photos/manipulation-and-brainwashconcept-picture-id963312776?k=20&m=963312776&s=612x612&w=0&h=x OZ_dB_jewxSUa-Ud0SY8IwJED-DQwc9AgDGpnxJL6U=

6.4.2. Flak Herman and Chomsky describe “flak” as “a negative reaction” to a media statement or broadcast (not to be confused with flack, which implies promoters or PR agents). Complaints, threats, and punitive actions can be made by letters, telegrams, phone calls, petitions, legal action, speeches, and legislation in Congress. Companies regularly work together to develop flak machines. The GCC includes US fossil fuel and automobile companies such as ExxonMobil and Chevron. The GCC, founded by one of the world’s most well-known public relations firms, Burson-Marsteller, intends to delegitimize climate scientists and spread “scare stories” about global warming. The term “flak” is used by Chomsky and Herman to characterize unfavorable reactions to media claims or programs (Berezhnaia, 2018). Chomsky and Herman describe flak as “efforts to discredit organizations or individuals

本书版权归Arcler所有

Propaganda in Media

117

that disagree with or question the mainstream position.” The term “flak” is used to reinforce existing authority (e.g., “The Establishment”). Flak distinguishes itself from other “filtering” systems due to its comprehensive dedication to managing public information. These approaches have been affected by market factors. a dislike or dread of strangers [edit] When we looked at the “fifth filter,” we should have covered all of this, including how bogus fears are exploited to intimidate others and eliminate individuals you don’t want near you. People are more prone to submit to authority when they feel terrified. On the other hand, Mr. Chomsky is accurate. Anti-communism was described by Herman and Chomsky as the ultimate and most essential news filter they could devise. Manufacturing Consent was published during the Cold War. Noam Chomsky defined them as “fear,” rather than “the opponent” or tyrants like Slobodan Milosevic, Gaddafi, Biya, Saddam, and Vladimir Putin. In the United Kingdom, examples of tabloid headlines include “Clobba Slobba!” and “Smash Saddam!” In 1999, the Sunday Times accused the Reclaim the Streets campaign of stockpiling CS gas and other “eco-terrorist” weapons. [8] Anti-ideologues employ fear and hate of imagined or actual dangers. As a result, communism has long been regarded as the most perilous philosophy. Critics of communism and socialism were worried about concerns like free expression, press freedom, and travel. They believe that this depiction was regularly used to silence aristocratic class critics. Noam Chomsky claims that the “War on Terror” has surpassed the Cold War as the most important social control technique since communism’s demise in 1991. According to some analysts, following the September 11, 2001, terrorist attacks, Islamophobia has surpassed anti-communism as the leading source of societal unease. According to Herman and Chomsky, there has been a move from anti-communism to “anti-terrorism. Explanations for Practical Cases [edit] After presenting the propaganda paradigm theoretically, the authors of Manufacturing Consent put their hypotheses to the test. It is normal to assume a bias in favor of companies over individuals based on the propaganda paradigm and media filters (Banda, 2007). Two more events were evaluated using objective criteria, such as coverage of key events (in column inches) or editorials in support of a certain cause (measured in number). This category includes hostile countries. [edit] According to studies, just 9% of the Nicaraguan populace supported all opposition groups, however, Stephen Kinzer had 100% popular support.

本书版权归Arcler所有

118

Encyclopedia of Journalism and Mass Communication

On the other hand, Mr. Chomsky is accurate. Even though the SovietAfghan War was considered an act of aggression, some individuals questioned the legitimacy of the Vietnam War. The propensity to emphasize atrocities committed by hostile or unfriendly governments, such as Kosovo, while downplaying crimes committed by friendly countries, such as Indonesia’s colonization of East Timor, may be viewed as biased. [15] According to this concept, media coverage of international elections is skewed, with friendly nations like El Salvador and Guatemala emphasized while hostile nations like Nicaragua are avoided. According to research done before the Iraq War, the vast majority of sources backed the invasion. Furthermore, Chomsky claims that even when appropriately reporting on events such as the Battle of Fallujah, media outlets propagandized for the government. While covering the attack on the Fallujah General Hospital, he claimed that the New York Times “accurately covered the fight of Fallujah, but it was glorified... it was a celebration of continual war crimes.”

6.5. LEAKAGE-RELATED CONTROVERSIES By focusing primarily on scandals that benefit a small group of powerful people while disregarding those that impact the poor, the authors display their own established prejudices. The Watergate scandal gained public attention in the United States, but the COINTELPRO revelations were mainly overlooked at the time. COINTELPRO, on the other hand, hurt regular citizens and even committed political murders, whereas the Watergate break-in endangered key Democrats. Selective reporting on the Iran-Contra crisis includes ignoring the deaths of Nicaraguan civilians as a result of aid to the contras and focusing primarily on prominent figures such as Oliver North (Ali et al., 2014). Chomsky made a parallel to a study of health risks in Fallujah in a 2010 interview on Wikileaks’ Afghan War Diaries. In the Fallujah report, the British media dubbed the health condition “worse than Hiroshima.” Wikileaks, on the other hand, received a lot of attention in the United States. Only a few instances are provided: Consider the media’s coverage of the Iraq War and global warming. Herman and Chomsky have embraced the notion and integrated it into their publications, seminars, and theoretical frameworks since the publication of Manufacturing Consent. Chomsky has relied largely on this skill to

本书版权归Arcler所有

Propaganda in Media

119

buttress his interpretations of mainstream media coverage of a wide range of events throughout his career. The following paragraphs include examples of this: During the 1990 Gulf War, the media was unable to present Saddam Hussein’s peace efforts truthfully. Despite substantial majority support for only employing action against Iraq with UN authorization, the media neglected to focus on the legality of the conflict (Wanta et al., 2004). The Fairness and Accuracy in reporting watchdog discovered that pro-war sources were overrepresented, with anti-war sources accounting for fewer than 10% of the media (with only 3% of US sources being anti-war). When it comes to global warming, a 2004 research discovered that the media almost always gives individuals who disagree an equal chance, even if only “approximately one percent” of climate specialists agree. Those who disagree with Chomsky’s assessment of climate change say the discussion has “three sides”: those who believe global warming is overblown, and those who do not. Even yet, while reporting on the issue, the media frequently dismisses opposing opinions.

6.5.1. Reception When media outlets even discuss propaganda momentarily, they usually get a significant reaction. Since its start, the show has received over 1,000 emails in response to the discussions between Bill Moyers and Noam Chomsky. His TV Ontario interview generated 31,321 phone calls, a new high for the network. Noam Chomsky was interviewed by Andrew Marr in 1996, and the producer described Chomsky’s reply as “astonishing.” “A project I’ve worked on has never generated as many calls and emails as this one,” he said. What an incredible response we received from the audience.” Chomsky and Herman addressed the theory’s detractors at the University of Windsor in May 2007. According to Herman, propaganda has never been more vital than now, albeit both authors acknowledged that the model had significant weaknesses that needed to be rectified in light of current events. Although media ownership and advertising intensify the propagandist function, Noam Chomsky believes the source of the problem is “ideological-doctrinal commitments that are a component of intellectual life,” or those in power’s intellectual culture (Wilkinson et al., 2020). He compares academic writing to the media, claiming that both are afflicted by the same issues and are not confined by the propaganda framework. However, Chomsky made it plain in his speech at Windsor that the idea originated with Edward S. Herman. Because of Herman’s contribution to theory formation and research, Chomsky suggested putting Herman’s name

本书版权归Arcler所有

120

Encyclopedia of Journalism and Mass Communication

at the top of the book’s cover. [29] A Harvard University inquiry looked at media exploitation. The New York Times and Los Angeles Times both referred to the practice as torture in 81.5% (44 of 54) of their stories on the issue beginning in the 1930s and continuing until 2004. Waterboarding, on the other hand, was practically never mentioned in the media as torture from 2002 to 2008. —Desai’s and the company According to a Harvard Kennedy School research published in April 2010, the New York Times and the Los Angeles Times ceased labeling waterboarding “torture” between 2002 and 2008. According to research, press coverage of waterboarding in other nations would be “far more disposed to deem it severe.” Manufacturing Consent study discovered that the term “genocide” is used to refer to both friendly and hostile regimes, similar to the media research in the book.

Figure 6.9: Media propaganda illustration. Source: https://media.istockphoto.com/vectors/vector-illustration-media-propaganda-concept-vector-id1136343525?k=20&m=1136343525&s=612x612 &w=0&h=PGVJQk0vaQ9kSqpl5fe0qkj7gkakV3IaYggkWU7doVI=

We don’t need a state-run media since present media outlets volunteer for the job, according to Glenn Greenwald, and the media frequently functions as unaccountable government propaganda. Inquiry of the media conducted

本书版权归Arcler所有

Propaganda in Media

121

outside of the United States [edit] While discussing the application of the Propaganda Model to the media landscapes of many nations in the “ChomskyChat Forum,” Chomsky stated that “This has very seldom been done systematically.” A well-known media group from Glasgow University investigated the British media. Mark Curtis investigates the British role in Central America in his book Ambiguities of Power. Serge Halimi, the editor-in-chief of Le Monde diplomatic, just published a book about France. News International’s phone hacking issue highlighted “intimate links” between the press and politics. He remarked in his book that the scandalrelated closing of the mass-circulation newspaper News of the World only partially followed his propaganda model. Mason, for example, stated that “major corporations” canceled their advertising due to “the seriousness of the outrage on social media,” about which Mason provided no information (Vlad, 2021). Despite Mason’s admiration for The Guardian’s candor about phone hacking, he questioned the publication’s capacity to make revenue in the future. Some of Chomsky’s arguments have been proven false. He claimed that truth-telling publications cannot be profitable. The Guardian will have no income in a year since it is losing money. [38] [edit] Readers’ Criticism of Chomsky Reader In his book, The Anti-Chomsky Reader, Eli Lehrer of the American Enterprise Institute argues against this view. Media does not exist as a single entity because publications such as The New York Times and The Wall Street Journal are distinct. According to Lehrer, there is no corporate control in the media since the media uncovers and reports on corporate wrongdoing. Lehrer epitomizes Marxist criticism of right-wing false consciousness. “The media is not a monolithic monolith.” Rather, they argue, it symbolizes a battle between strong interests, in which beliefs that contradict these interests’ “basic premises” are removed (Udomisor & Udoh, 2015). For example, during the Vietnam War, the media mostly overlooked the legality and legitimacy of the battle (see Coverage of “enemy” countries). Despite its opposition to corruption, the media, according to Chomsky, does not oppose the legal strengthening of corporate interests, a manifestation of the powerful interests foreseen by this paradigm. “The influences of media on the public” are not addressed in this strategy, which may render it ineffectual in influencing public opinion. Criticism failed to recognize that the propaganda model focuses on the operation of the media rather than its success”

本书版权归Arcler所有

122

Encyclopedia of Journalism and Mass Communication

6.6. MISINFORMATION AND FAKE NEWS Propaganda and incorrect information can divide the public, incite hate speech and violent extremism, and ultimately undermine democracy and public faith in democratic processes. They are capable of all of this and more. Students must be taught how to use and comprehend media and information in school. Teachers must be well-versed in the topic if they want to give their students the knowledge and skills necessary to critically assess the material they receive in various media. Initiatives that engage media organizations, as well as regional, state, and federal governments, are encouraged. Are they all the same or different? Propaganda, misinformation, and fake news can all have the same meaning. A variety of situations in which the transmission of information has a negative influence on people, either purposefully or accidentally, to further a moral, political, or ideologueical position or cause. In this area, information may be utilized in a variety of ways: False information is disseminated to inflict harm.

Figure 6.10: Glitch fake news. Source: https://media.istockphoto.com/vectors/glitch-fake-news-lettering-overblack-background-vector-id1330096022?k=20&m=1330096022&s=612x612 &w=0&h=4n8EvcxsS-zX97_xBKDZaswfhN-L0vS-tDbaT8nDCVE=

The significance of these instances has grown as improved information and communication technology has been more generally available. Uploading and sharing text, photos, videos, and hyperlinks helps information to spread

本书版权归Arcler所有

Propaganda in Media

123

quickly throughout the internet. What role do rumors, lies, and smears play in schools? Young people are more prone to propaganda, disinformation, and false news as a result of the pervasiveness of information and communication technologies in their everyday lives. Teens spend a lot of time online, whether it’s playing video games, conversing, blogging, listening to music, or posting selfies to meet new people with whom to communicate. The internet provides people with a lot of knowledge about the world and themselves. Parental technological ability is frequently poor, making it harder for parents to monitor their children’s online activity and warn them of potential dangers. As a result, it is the responsibility of schools to give pupils the knowledge and critical thinking abilities that they lack at home. Because of the current rise of propaganda-based misinformation, students must be able to distinguish between prejudice and the truth (Thorson et al., 2012). Critical reaction to internet propaganda, deceit, and false news is an important democratic skill in and of itself. The Reference Framework of Competences for Democratic Culture of the Council of Europe promotes analytical and critical thinking, as well as knowledge and critical perception of the world. These tools are required for developing media and information literacy as well as digital citizenship education.

Figure 6.11: People reading fake news. Source: https://media.istockphoto.com/vectors/people-reading-fake-news-vector-id1323717098?k=20&m=1323717098&s=612x612&w=0&h=b1lF9ksUS v6tVuMbhZe7Ayy35svUkz9ClE1OXFnDO6s=

本书版权归Arcler所有

124

Encyclopedia of Journalism and Mass Communication

Future generations can only be trained to perceive, analyze, and produce data in the framework of education. Critical thinking in the classroom is necessary for a digital citizen’s community involvement. [7] Several academic disciplines, including history, social studies, physics, religion, and art, require students to be able to deal with falsehoods, deceit, and fake news in person and online. During World War I, the employment of nationalistic and patriotic slogans, or so-called “atrocity propaganda,” may be studied in history classes, while works of art that advocate certain ideologueies can be studied in art schools. Another area where ICT presents a difficulty for educational institutions is the use of social media to make disparaging statements about academics and higher education institutions (Seamon, 2010). A growing number of people, including parents, are using social media to express their dissatisfaction with school policies, staff behavior, or other concerns. School administrators are concerned about how to handle slanderous internet campaigns and utterances.

Figure 6.12: Learning about social media warfare concept. Source: https://media.istockphoto.com/photos/learning-about-social-mediawarfare-concept-picture-id1370984376?k=20&m=1370984376&s=612x612 &w=0&h=UPeuGT9oxcyLitLdPmgBy77MeTPRhpCE2wurMwxUDa0=

Are there any problems? Schools must handle propaganda, false information, and fake news as a significant educational and cultural concern. Due to the fast rise of technology and young people’s online activities,

本书版权归Arcler所有

Propaganda in Media

125

teachers’ online involvement and experience are frequently limited and lag behind that of their pupils, making it challenging for educators to keep up. A lack of professional development investment may dissuade people from pursuing a career in teaching and learning. Even professional continuing education programs may become obsolete in a few years. Regardless of how many different disciplines educate about the issue, labeling anything “false” does not imply that it is not news; rather, it may be difficult to find a position in an overloaded curriculum where it may be treated on its own. Every piece of news has been twisted and sculpted to achieve a certain goal. Some schools may be unable to appropriately present this subject matter in depth due to instructor credentials and preparation. States should collaborate with civil society and other stakeholders to increase awareness of these concerns as part of their efforts to foster media and digital literacy. [9] What is the objective of education? To raise awareness of the issue in schools, media, and information literacy training is required (Shemberger, 2020). Regardless of any apparent trend to date, training can at least make instructors aware of the relevance of this field of study for their pupils. Teachers will be more driven to consistently enhance their talents since teaching is perceived as more essential. Although it may be more beneficial in the long run to have one teacher or a small team in charge of the school’s media and information literacy program, as many teachers as feasible should be recruited for this reason. Assisting in the establishment and implementation of school policies and action plans, as well as teaching and equipping employees to deal with propaganda, misleading information, and fake news, are all tasks that may come under the scope of this specific field of specialized expertise (Auger & Waters, 2020). Aside from that, schools may take a variety of initiatives to address the issues posed by an ever-expanding network of propaganda, disinformation, and false news.

本书版权归Arcler所有

• •

Independent specialists, such as journalists, IT companies, and universities; Virtual learning environments where students may learn about propaganda, deception, and fake news; and

本书版权归Arcler所有

CHAPTER

7

PRIVACY AND CONFIDENTIALITY IN JOURNALISM

CONTENTS

本书版权归Arcler所有

7.1. The Relationship Between Journalism and Confidentiality................ 128 7.2. Government Media Policies on Confidentiality................................ 135 7.3. Freedom of Expression and Media Responsibility............................. 138 7.4. The Ethical Face of Confidentiality................................................... 146 7.5. Recommendations for Interacting With Others................................. 147 7.6. Guidelines for the Preservation and Care of Written Material........... 148

Encyclopedia of Journalism and Mass Communication

128

The protection of journalistic sources is central to the ability of journalists to properly investigate stories, as well as for the protection of individuals and whistleblowers who provide information to them. Compelling the disclosure of sources has a chilling effect on freedom of speech and media freedom, in addition to hindering the free flow of information.

Figure 7.1: Paparazzi. Source: https://media.istockphoto.com/photos/paparazzy-picture-id131082920 5?k=20&m=1310829205&s=612x612&w=0&h=5EHk4Fm7m424IYvT3zdGn rKBo4ZdNc6T0LNWGRMBJ8c=

7.1. THE RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN JOURNALISM AND CONFIDENTIALITY To be successful, journalists must find a delicate balance. Investigating public concerns necessitates tight confidentiality at all times. As a result, in rare circumstances, a journalist may be obliged to conduct an investigation that requires invading someone’s privacy. Some instances are as follows:

本书版权归Arcler所有

• • •

aggressive and antisocial behavior injustice or bribery; incompetence or negligence.

Privacy and Confidentiality in Journalism

129

People should be treated fairly and respectfully at all times. If we want to achieve progress, we must be honest with ourselves about our reasons. We cannot have a personal stake in an inquiry that invades privacy. It is the only reasonable explanation for why we are investigating it for the benefit of civilization (Rakow, 2011). Is there a limit to how much personal information may be shared? Private information is anything that a person has a reasonable expectation of keeping private. It may include information to which only a few people have access. A person who is in the public eye and a public venue might expect their privacy to be respected in some instances. Several things might happen when a patient is being treated in a clinic or hospital. Given the resources, journalists are increasingly using user-generated content (UGC). Members of the public can submit video, audio, or still photographs to media outlets and social media sites, which can subsequently be utilized by journalists or uploaded themselves. Even though this raises significant editorial concerns, it does not mean that journalists should abandon their essential editorial ideals. For example, if we choose to omit a vital piece of information from a story because it has already been widely discussed, we may be perceived as neglecting our customers and omitting an important portion of the story. Such circumstances need a thorough editorial inquiry. Any data gathered by cameras, webcams, video cameras, or mobile phones must be handled with caution. We won’t be able to review every piece of submitted content for accuracy. Confirmation from two distinct sources is a standard practice among trustworthy news organizations. Despite the donations, probably, this target may not be attained. The authors and editors must next determine whether or not to use the information. We may be able to avoid this by properly identifying the information, but we must use caution when showing anything that may contravene our editorial standards or those of our employer. These are difficult to acquire virtues that must be protected against exploitation (Perko, 2012). You risk losing your audience’s trust if they notice anything that suggests you’ve deviated from these standards. The jury members and the judge Journalists are responsible for informing the public and promoting discussion for them to create well-informed viewpoints.

本书版权归Arcler所有

130

Encyclopedia of Journalism and Mass Communication

Figure 7.2: Type writer. Source: https://media.istockphoto.com/photos/whats-your-story-typed-on-avintage-typewriter-picture-id840623040?k=20&m=840623040&s=612x612& w=0&h=Cp01P5ZNdQ238krgArQ8w0HBUaLlK-TKQ2b7nBboKJ0=

We do not have the authority to determine what is right and wrong in the communities with which we serve. When it comes to matters of public interest, journalists have both the responsibility and the right to investigate. They cannot, however, believe they are above the law. The destruction and damage that their digging may produce must also be considered. Others feel that an individual’s right to privacy is determined by their actions. If a person is suspected of illegal or antisocial activity, their right to privacy may be violated since exposing their actions is more likely to promote the public good. We cannot make any decisions. These kinds of conversations are tough to handle, particularly in transitional and post-conflict nations where people’s opinions of what is and isn’t acceptable may be so disparate. The only exception is if there is a strong editorial justification to continue recording. As a result, we must be crystal clear about why we are doing something (Popoola, 2014). Justifications such as the need to remain competitive, attract more viewers, or sell more papers are unnecessary. The

本书版权归Arcler所有

Privacy and Confidentiality in Journalism

131

narrative must correctly and honestly portray the relevant facts to contribute to public debate. Before reaching a judgment, the journalist must be confident that all pertinent material has been carefully examined.

7.1.1. Obtaining Approval Journalists require two types of permission for several reasons: permission to gather the material and permission to broadcast or publish it. Medical facilities, educational institutions, and penal facilities are a few examples of these establishments. Uninvited access to a potential interviewee; the use of recording equipment without the agreement of individuals being recorded; the recording of phone calls to acquire background information; and the sharing of user-generated content (UGC). Covertly taped. Before a journalist may make an unlawful recording, there must be a compelling cause for them to do so. It is authorized if it is likely to disclose facts or actions that the general public would otherwise be unable to learn or see. Covert recordings may be used when an open investigation is unlikely to succeed, when gathering evidence, or when undertaking a consumer, social, or scientific investigation in the public interest. Every piece of data acquired should give the entire account of what occurred. At times, the journalist is in charge of preserving the identity of certain people and obtaining prior consent from them. Any of the following methods can be used to make covert recordings: Drones, mobile phones, covert radio microphones, and phone calls are examples of long-range audio-video equipment and phone calls. Continue recording after the interview has ended. Copyright law prohibits you from filming anything without the approval of your editor. You will be required to observe a set of regulations as a journalist. Make certain that you adhere to all of the rules and requirements (Pavlik et al., 2020). The following elements will virtually probably be included: Senior editors’ signatures; an explanation of why the action is necessary for the public good; a statement about the intended use of the material; an accurate record of what happened; a certificate or license, if legally required; a list of what will be broadcast or not; and an open admission of any deception used to gather the material. One more point should be emphasized. Journalists are under increased pressure to avoid unethical editing and news collecting practices.

本书版权归Arcler所有

132

Encyclopedia of Journalism and Mass Communication

Figure 7.3: Lock symbol. Source: https://media.istockphoto.com/photos/creative-idea-concept-withlock-symbol-and-microcircuit-illustration-picture-id1221734388?k=20&m= 1221734388&s=612x612&w=0&h=Zmdpwmw62mjTubtTKVUZ7eDbW9EdSHIhKtF7dXHGwBs=

If you wish to use any material gained surreptitiously while writing a year-end review or revisiting a story in another piece, you’ll almost probably need to go through this process again. You must, however, first obtain legal guidance. You must be certain that your intended action is in the best interests of the community, especially if it involves: a private area to which the general public does not have access; individuals undergoing medical care; or those who are sad or worried. No “fishing expeditions” that entail filming illegal or disruptive behavior on private property are permitted. Similarly, unless you have senior editorial authority, you should never leave recording equipment on private property to collect proof of major misbehavior. You can defend your acts based on public interest capturing thoughts and ideas digitally A growing number of journalists use technology to take notes (Pavlik, 2013). According to others, using recorders rather than notebooks may be a better approach to ensure the accuracy of reports. Taking notes on a digital device should be done for scholarly purposes alone, not for public consumption. If you come across an important news clip that you feel should be aired or published in the public interest, you must consult with senior editors and

本书版权归Arcler所有

Privacy and Confidentiality in Journalism

133

use the public interest criteria. Door-stepping to gain an interview, a reporter may need to be persistent at times. Is this truly required? Is there a special function for it in the world? It is critical to understand what new information will be gained from this activity. As a journalist, you must continuously assess your motives as well as the worth of your job. Even while the general public expects door-to-door solicitation to be safe, noteworthy individuals, and notable politicians, are an exception. To prepare, they should be prepared to answer unexpected inquiries and have their responses made public.

Figure 7.4: Searching through files. Source: https://media.istockphoto.com/photos/searching-through-files-pictureid178434486?k=20&m=178434486&s=612x612&w=0&h=YkkZAXTmCGO Fem9mkMrCgOXDOqx8ySP3DOANkiezg9Q=

If you’re persuaded that the issue you’re researching is of public importance, you can attempt knocking on the person’s door to seek an interview. It’s conceivable they’ll say no. The person’s unwillingness to be interviewed may likewise be communicated to them. A circumstance in which one is left in the dust. When a reporter joins authorities in the course of their duties to cover a topic of public interest, this is referred to as “tagging along.” An observer can monitor the operations of a government agency. This covers the departments of police, customs, immigration, and environmental health. You can follow a government person to a private location as long as you

本书版权归Arcler所有

134

Encyclopedia of Journalism and Mass Communication

can establish a compelling public interest. If you accompany a government official, you must make it clear who you represent and how the information will be used. If the property owner refuses permission, be prepared to depart swiftly, and ensure that your top editors have demonstrated that the subject matter is clearly of public interest. Weeping and mourning loudly and the media’s ability to connect with people at times of tragedy and sorrow is surprising (Mills et al., 2019). Journalists may frequently visit those whose loved ones have been killed, wounded, or bombed. Some of the most popular responses are as follows. Thinking back on the past. Most respected news organizations utilize the past to put current events into context. Journalists must take all necessary precautions to avoid bringing sorrow to the surviving victims and their loved ones. This is critical when considering trauma and suffering. That is true, regardless of how long ago this content was published into the public domain. Whenever possible, relatives of the deceased’s immediate family should be informed in advance that they will be attending the event. All news organizations use archival materials while reporting on current events. This will include the use of dramatic depictions of anguish, sadness, and trauma. This content must be used in an editorially sound manner, especially when it refers to identifiable individuals. This type of evidence should never be used to support a larger argument. People who have been harmed in the past should always be considered when producing such content.

7.1.2. Deficiencies in Human Beings Relatives and friends are frequently asked to provide information to the media about missing people. We are unable to give them control of our journalism. The family’s eagerness to share information is both humiliating and unsettling. The information may infringe on the privacy of the missing person. It’s critical to consider whether the person who went missing would want this information made public. It’s also worth noting that not everyone who has gone missing is actively seeking a reunion. Finding specifics: Journalists must be completely open and honest about how they use personal information obtained from their sources. Phone numbers and email addresses are two examples of private information that should never be shared without the permission of the owner (Mowlana, 2007).

本书版权归Arcler所有

Privacy and Confidentiality in Journalism

135

7.2. GOVERNMENT MEDIA POLICIES ON CONFIDENTIALITY Anyone employed by the Department of Justice (DOJ) is obligated by law to follow its Confidentiality and Media Contacts Policy (the Policy). Individuals’ rights to a fair trial or adjudicative procedure, privacy, government administration of justice, and public safety are all preserved as a result of this policy, while the public has simple access to information about the Department of Justice. When it comes to preserving, and releasing data obtained on the job, employees at the Department of Justice are obligated to follow this guideline. The Policy, which is only intended for internal use, creates no legal or other rights. New policies that conform with and complement current ones may be developed by government agencies. Discrimination Is Required in Every Situation (1–7.100) The Department of Justice (DOJ) deals with a wide range of sensitive and secret issues. Employee non-disclosure agreements, privacy rights, the safety of witnesses, investigations, and legal procedures might all be threatened if confidential and sensitive material concerning Department of Justice (DOJ) cases is released. It might also tarnish one’s reputation and/or jeopardize a defendant’s rights. Information received by DOJ employees in the course of their work should be treated as private and confidential, and should not be disclosed unless it is required to complete official obligations, is authorized by a court order or other legal prescription, and is following criminal and civil discovery laws. Any employee who discloses such information to anybody, including family members, friends, or coworkers, may face disciplinary action (Moore & Shemberger, 2019). The unauthorized revelation of private or secret information may result in legal or administrative consequences. Classified Information Unauthorized Disclosures, was revised. Access to classified material should be restricted to people inside the Department of Justice who have a justifiable need to know about it. Those with access must use extreme caution. Unauthorized recipients cannot be given access to classified material. Anyone who willfully and knowingly releases classified data without authorization jeopardizes national security, and the Department of Justice will use all of its lawful authorities to penalize those who do so. The Department of Justice will also pursue further administrative remedies, such as the loss of a security clearance or termination of employment: Whistleblower Protections Concerns concerning government policies or

本书版权归Arcler所有

136

Encyclopedia of Journalism and Mass Communication

operations should be brought to management’s or the Inspector General’s Office’s notice (OIG).

Figure 7.5. Eavesdropping. Source: https://media.istockphoto.com/photos/female-ear-and-hands-closeupcopy-space-torn-paper-yellow-background-picture-id1170664224?k=20&m= 1170664224&s=612x612&w=0&h=JP1OKMf3DuHEK5jWrwgZwaENogk9FOs5DMCxnr1kqo0=

All discussions on a DOJ-related matter between a DOJ employee and a media representative must be made public by the employee’s authorized media representative. For example, if a defendant’s name is accurately spelled or the date of a court hearing is right, the Department of Justice may not be held liable. If the message contains any data that may be considered classified or relevant to a grand jury inquiry, a supervisor must be contacted immediately. (As of the most recent April 2018 update) 1–7.300 – Components of the Department of Justice Coordination of media relations is the responsibility of the Director of OPA and public affairs personnel at DOJ division headquarters. (As of the most recent April 2018 update) Section 1–7.310 of the United States Attorneys General Act By this Policy, each of the 93 United States Attorneys should exercise good judgment and discretion in matters affecting their local district, but they must collaborate with the Office of Public Affairs (OPA) to coordinate their communications with the media in matters that extend beyond their district or are of national importance (Mellado et al., 2020).

本书版权归Arcler所有

Privacy and Confidentiality in Journalism

137

The U.S. Attorney oversees all media-related matters, including investigations. (As of the most recent April 2018 update) Currently Active Criminal, Civil, or Administrative Proceedings Disclosures Except in emergencies, an open investigation or case can only be disclosed to the media with prior consent from the relevant US Attorney or Assistant Attorney General. Administrative investigations that do not fall under the jurisdiction of a United States Attorney or an Assistant Attorney General must be approved by the Assistant Attorney General for Administration. Before the investigation at the Inspector General’s Office can commence, the Inspector General must offer his or her permission. In general, the DOJ would neither confirm nor deny the existence of any ongoing investigations. Only under this section’s subparagraph ‘C’ are DOJ personnel permitted to respond to inquiries regarding the existence of an ongoing investigation or to comment on its nature or progress before the filing of charges. If the community wants confidence that the right law enforcement agency is conducting the investigation or if the material must be disseminated, an inquiry may be required to maintain public safety, provided the consent requirement of subparagraph A is fulfilled. (As of the most recent April 2018 update) 1–7.410 – Responses to Investigation Requests An individual, group, or organization may send a letter asking that a person or entity being investigated for suspected legal violations. Public notification is feasible in this circumstance. When a request for an investigation is received, care must be taken not to indicate that an investigation will be done (Matthes, 2009). To begin an inquiry, you must first examine the request. It should be stated in any acknowledgment that such requests are forwarded to the appropriate investigative agency for review, that all allegations are reviewed in light of the Principles of Federal Prosecution and that the Department of Justice does not normally confirm or deny the existence of an investigation. The relevant United States Attorney or Assistant Attorney General must sign off on this recognition. If an inquiry is already ongoing, the same factors apply. 1–7.500 – Information That May Be Disclosed – Disclosure of Information in Criminal, Civil, and Administrative Proceedings – This material may be made public in any criminal case in which charges have been filed, subject to any legislative or judicial limits and by this Policy. D. The circumstances surrounding an arrest, such as the time and location of the arrest, resistance, pursuit, possession, and use of weapons; and E. The identification of the investigating or arresting agency; and F. An initial

本书版权归Arcler所有

138

Encyclopedia of Journalism and Mass Communication

statement to the press should make it clear that the allegation is an accusation and that the accused is presumed innocent unless proven guilty. DOJ officials may provide the same types of identification information about parties and government agencies or programs involved in civil or administrative cases, as well as a summary of the claim and an explanation of the government’s interest, as long as they follow applicable laws, court rules, and court orders. If it is in the best interests of the United States Attorney or Assistant Attorney General, public policy issues of a case may be shared. (As of the most recent April 2018 update) 1–7.510 – Criminal Record Information Disclosure During an inquiry or before a trial, DOJ employees are normally prohibited from disclosing a person’s criminal history to the media. There may be circumstances in which DOJ authorities can verify an individual based on their prior crimes, such as a felon in possession of a handgun if this information is recorded in their case file. This section addresses the withholding of information in criminal, civil, and administrative proceedings. (April 2018 update) A DOJ employee may not disclose or expose any statements or facts that might substantially jeopardize the adjudicative process. (In April 2018, Inquiries about Prejudice 1–7.610) The Department of Justice should not provide anything that might jeopardize an adjudicative proceeding unless required by rule or in an official statement issued after an individual is found guilty. B. Statements, admissions, confessions, or alibis attributed to a defendant or party, or the unwillingness or failure of the accused to give a statement; C. If the defendant refuses to cooperate with investigation processes such as fingerprints, polygraph examinations, ballistic tests, or other forensic services, such as DNA testing, DOJ personnel should not assist or encourage the tampering. Only if a defendant’s photograph is required for law enforcement or is already part of the public record in the case should Department of Justice employees readily release it (Ashley, 2015).

7.3. FREEDOM OF EXPRESSION AND MEDIA RESPONSIBILITY Laws, harsh legal implications, and physical assault stymie journalists and media companies. The number of jobs accessible to individuals in the media has significantly decreased. These problems are particularly visible in areas where there is racial friction, political unrest, military conflict, or natural calamities. A second major source of concern is a large number of unsolved journalist deaths and the impunity of those responsible. According

本书版权归Arcler所有

Privacy and Confidentiality in Journalism

139

to the International Federation of Journalists, sixty journalists and media workers are expected to die in 2020. Non-lethal attacks on women, as well as acts of intimidation, harassment, and arbitrary arrest, are common. As digital journalism evolves, defending media freedom becomes increasingly crucial. As the lines between online and offline behavior have blurred, so have security concerns. Evidence of coordinated deception efforts by both state and non-state entities is also possible. Internet harassment and assault against journalists and other media professionals are prevalent.

Figure 7.6: Investigator. Source: https://media.istockphoto.com/photos/private-detective-undercovercop-investigator-spy-or-paparazzi-with-picture-id1204695331?k=20&m=120 4695331&s=612x612&w=0&h=TF-J4W7nNmpJuYq3TlffAk_uzwyNP10KwFZTXe_iiQI=

Any discussion of media freedom must take into account the growing concern about cyber threats. For a democracy to function, there must be free, independent, and diverse media based on freedom of expression and access to information. In reality, defending press freedom is critical to ensuring the protection of all other fundamental rights. Several cases of torture, racism, and corruption have come to light as a result of investigative journalism over the last decade. When dealing with human rights violations, the first

本书版权归Arcler所有

140

Encyclopedia of Journalism and Mass Communication

step is often to inform the public of the facts. Your suggestions are valuable. You have the right as a citizen to express yourself, spread information, and advocate for social progress. You have the right to peacefully support or oppose those in positions of power. To live in an open and just society, individuals must be able to pursue justice and exercise their human rights without interference from the government or other illegitimate actors. Although “free speech” is guaranteed in nearly every country’s constitution, governments all over the world have been known to imprison or jail people for speaking out. Many governments abuse their authority to limit free speech to silence peaceful dissent, which violates the First Amendment. This practice is frequently justified by national security and religion. The government’s recent attacks on activists, non-governmental organizations, and people who help refugees and migrants have put the right to free expression in jeopardy. Tolerance of opposing viewpoints and dissident voices is frequently an indicator of how governments value human rights in general (Maier & Curtin, 2005). Amnesty International, as a human rights organization, supports those who peacefully speak out against injustices, whether they are journalists investigating security force abuses, trade unionists drawing attention to poor working conditions, or indigenous leaders fighting to protect their land from corporate exploitation. People who share the viewpoints of major corporations, law enforcement, and employers would also be protected in their freedom of expression. It is our responsibility to demand the unconditional release of all prisoners of conscience who are being held solely for exercising their right to peaceful expression. The right to free expression is recognized as a fundamental human right in Article 19 of the Universal Declaration of Human Rights. Finally, legal protection was achieved via a series of international and regional treaties. Amnesty International has long emphasized the importance of free speech in holding the powerful accountable. Freedom of expression also supports and promotes other human rights, particularly religious, though, and conscience freedoms. Another aspect of this is the right to peacefully assemble, as well as the right to organize and join organizations such as clubs, societies, labor unions, and political parties with whomever one chooses. Governments that seek to stifle dissent frequently violate these fundamental rights. Even the most heinous opinions are protected by freedom of speech, also known as freedom of expression.

本书版权归Arcler所有

Privacy and Confidentiality in Journalism

141

Figure 7.7: Investigation. Source: https://media.istockphoto.com/photos/smart-detective-looking-attentively-at-investigation-board-evaluating-picture-id1085793262?k=20&m= 1085793262&s=612x612&w=0&h=NdKLrwRPCw6ymNJpvKDn8XvB4cX3qR4YiUhiVWHJ0to=

Even though international law guarantees the right to free expression, it can be legally restricted in certain circumstances, such as when it infringes on the rights of others, preaches hatred, or incites discrimination or violent conflict. Any restrictions on free expression, however, must be fair, tailored to protect specific public interests or the rights of others, and necessary to achieve that goal. Cybersecurity and data security Because of the internet, a much larger number of people now have access to the information they require to challenge governments and corporations. Because information is power, the internet has the potential to significantly increase the power of the seven billion people who inhabit our planet. Today, our ability to freely express ourselves is largely determined by our social standing, privilege, and economic status. Influential people’s opinions are rarely silenced (Lingwall & Kuehn, 2013). People who do not own a laptop with internet access have far less access to information than those who must travel a long distance to a coffee shop. In response to large-scale public demonstrations, an increasing number of countries have sought to protect digital communications by installing firewalls or shutting down the internet.

本书版权归Arcler所有

142

Encyclopedia of Journalism and Mass Communication

Access to digital data is regulated similarly in Iran, China, and Vietnam. Mobile Internet and communications will be disrupted if there is a conflict in Kashmir. Amnesty International is constantly developing new strategies to circumvent China’s censorship of our website. Access to activists’ and journalists’ email accounts and microphones could be remotely activated to secretly record them, allowing the government to spy on them. In 2014, Amnesty International and a coalition of human rights and technology organizations released the anti-surveillance software “Detekt.” Personal information security and cyber security are becoming increasingly inextricably linked as technology advances. Use stringent cyber security mechanisms to protect personal information in transit and at rest. Data protection infrastructure is maintained by cyber security measures in some cases, which protects individuals’ personal information. Many cyber security measures, like many other security measures, have the potential to damage privacy. ‘Detecting dangers and abnormalities in the network may necessitate constant monitoring of network activities. This kind of surveillance may need the gathering and processing of a significant amount of personal data. Concerns about the security of cyberspace: More than three trillion dollars might be lost in 2020 if cyberspace is not appropriately protected, according to a report provided by the World Economic Forum in January of 2014. There is no one-size-fits-all solution to the issue of cyber security. Social media and mobile technologies have become new targets for cybercriminals. The ever-changing landscape generated by cutting-edge technology, social activities, and ever-evolving dangers may expose large amounts of data to cyber-attacks as organizations struggle to keep up with the ever-changing landscape. The following are new issues in data privacy and cyber security to watch out for (Lewis & Reese, 2009).

本书版权归Arcler所有

The interconnectedness of the environment (a) In addition to our real surroundings, linked networks create a wholly electronic world known as “cyberspace,” which is constantly expanding in terms of data volume. Numerous daily activities generate vast amounts of digital data that are becoming increasingly important to today’s economy. These include financial transactions, communications and entertainment, travel, shopping, and surfing the internet. To optimize their value and provide customers with new, improved services, organizations constantly mix, connect, compare, and link data pieces.

Privacy and Confidentiality in Journalism

143

All of our online and increasingly physical behaviors are being tracked by these electronic devices and digital networks. It will be possible to monitor and control equipment from a distance using sensors built into gadgets as part of the “Internet of things” when this concept becomes a practical reality. Controlling and securing cyberspace has gotten increasingly difficult. As the number of mobile devices and “always on” services increases, so do the threats to cyber security and privacy posed by these and other “seamless” or automated business processes in cyberspace, including those involving third parties, cloud computing infrastructures, and information sharing agreements (Lingwall, 2009). All parties involved in cyber security efforts must work together to secure the infrastructure and the data that goes through it from cyber threats, which will continue to target the weakest connections in any complex network.

Figure 7.8: Paparazzi. Source: https://media.istockphoto.com/photos/closeup-young-man-photorapher-sitting-in-the-car-picture-id1133253118?k=20&m=1133253118&s=612x 612&w=0&h=8fn1qadpYYpZ_ZX4BbQrkkw7shkUtfO3jDQVGw3crjY=

本书版权归Arcler所有

(b) The danger’s complexity is increasing. Online dangers may be difficult to see, but their impacts are undeniable, and systems

144

Encyclopedia of Journalism and Mass Communication

that can be accessed from anywhere in the world are at risk. The value of internet information has grown as the volume of information transmitted over cyberspace has increased. Data trails leave a larger footprint in cyberspace, which raises the risk of being harmed by cyberattacks. Hacking has also become more “professionalized,” as Gabriella Coleman argues. Wherever there is a profit to be made, there is a market for unlawful activity and cybercrime greatly complicate these actions. There has also been an increase in state-sponsored threats, whether they are carried out or approved by a nation-state. Theft of secrets and intellectual property is a specialty of these enemies, which are sometimes referred to as “advanced persistent threats.” Cybercrime is increasing in frequency and complexity, “In the first place, the total number of people using the Internet is continually increasing, which means that a bigger base may be used to define possible goals. Second, the way people communicate and exchange information online has evolved significantly with the rise of social networking, cloud computing, and mobile connection (Korkonosenko, 2013). We share more information, send it to third parties we don’t directly control and click on more links and documents on various social networking platforms and services.” the third point is that because companies seldom reveal security breaches to the public for competitive and reputational reasons, little is known about how assaults are carried out, which may hinder long-term cyber security efforts. Mobile platforms are becoming targets for threats. Cell phones will outnumber people in the world over the next three years. Personal information might be stored on our mobile devices. Many people carry their mobile devices with them wherever they go, and they use them for nearly every conceivable purpose, from communicating with friends and family via email and social media, to taking photos, playing games, and uploading them to the web. They also use them to locate nearby stores and restaurants, get directions to specific locations, and access their bank accounts. Customers and clients are increasingly using smartphones, tablets, laptops, and other devices, and these conveniences come with the potential for new vulnerabilities and threats. When it comes to cybercrime, mobile devices and cloud services have been designated as important targets by the International Cyber Security Protection Alliance. The growth of viruses on mobile devices is one of the most pressing issues confronting the mobile sector, according to the report. Malicious programs that appear to be trustworthy in app stores can be used to spread malware to mobile devices

本书版权归Arcler所有

Privacy and Confidentiality in Journalism

145

easily. As a result, using public Wi-Fi may raise the danger of mobile device data interception. Malware can infiltrate tap-and-pay functionalities on mobile devices used for near-field communications transactions. A recent research from the ICSPA states that mobile malware is a growing threat on the internet. Despite claims by cybercriminals that they are developing more complex malware for mobile devices, actual infection rates on mobile devices are still very low, despite the assertions. In the not too distant future, this will undoubtedly alter. Data protection is becoming increasingly important as more and more hackers target mobile devices. It is now possible to track, record, and save personal information, upload contact lists, and perform interactions and transactions directly from mobile devices (Kalatzi et al., 2018). Sensors in mobile devices can be activated to pinpoint the exact location of a mobile device. When confronted with these growing threats, the mobile industry, and enterprises, as well as app developers, have a greater need to safeguard the safety of the platforms and backend systems where so much personal data is gathered, managed, and kept.

Figure 7.9: Handwriting. Source: https://media.istockphoto.com/photos/womans-hand-writing-in-a-diary-with-a-pen-picture-id1312462734?k=20&m=1312462734&s=612x612&w =0&h=iqoNPlKyFjo1bsTnMlyNVmNSTtShmCJ7QIaj9cbNoRA=

本书版权归Arcler所有

146

Encyclopedia of Journalism and Mass Communication

7.4. THE ETHICAL FACE OF CONFIDENTIALITY A study project must be planned with privacy protection in mind. This challenge also includes data interchange and review of study findings for publication (on humans and animals). Everyone participating in the research process, including researchers, human subjects, support employees, editors, and reviewers, should be aware of their responsibility to respect the privacy of their subjects. Under no circumstances should confidentiality be jeopardized. For any research involving human participants, institutional review boards and informed consent forms must be acquired and followed. Human subjects have the right to anticipate that their personal information will be kept private, regardless of whether the research findings are published or data sets from a study are shared with other researchers. Everyone involved in the research must protect the subjects’ privacy. All interactions between a speech-language pathologist and a client or family member must be kept confidential. Clients must have trust in the professional’s ability to maintain their privacy for private examinations and treatment programs to be effective. When a professional invades a client’s privacy, the victim suffers in both visible and subtle ways (Heider et al., 2005). All examinations, treatment plans, therapy sessions, consultations with family or other professionals, treatment records, and payment talks should be kept private. This duty applies to all receivers of consumer information.

Figure 7.10: Censored TV. Source: https://media.istockphoto.com/photos/censored-tv-price-of-democracy-picture-id185325921?k=20&m=185325921&s=612x612&w=0&h=pL9gE TiIpDVrM7Rgk3Z_59OZUqbc8FUIKdciMnUGMOA=

本书版权归Arcler所有

Privacy and Confidentiality in Journalism

147

Therapists, supervisors, assistants, and support personnel at schools, institutions, and enterprises that offer billable services are banned from providing client information to anybody who is not allowed to see it. They must also ensure that their supervisees and support employees follow privacy regulations, as well as maintain track of their contacts, records, and customer information. Employees and students who violate confidentiality while under the supervision of ASHA members shall be penalized by established policies and procedures.

7.5. RECOMMENDATIONS FOR INTERACTING WITH OTHERS Only the client with full legal capacity may provide authorization for information to be released. No one else has that authority over a kid save the child’s parent or legal guardian. There may be situations when a biological or adoptive parent may not have the authorization to view or authorize client information releases (such as in custody battles or under custody arrangements). Only the appointed family member or legal guardian has the authority to approve disclosure in the case of an incompetent adult. In all therapeutic settings, a written document establishing information disclosure should be presented to and signed by the client or the client’s representative at the start of therapy. To disclose information beyond what is agreed in the preliminary privacy agreement or as needed by law, audiologists and speechlanguage pathologists must obtain a release-of-information agreement from clients or their authorized agents (such as a subpoena). Experts cannot exchange their knowledge with one another unless this is approved. When possible, it is better to get written authorization rather than verbal authorization. In rare situations, courts or administrative authorities with subpoena authority can lawfully force the disclosure of private information. However, professionals in these situations should always seek legal counsel before complying with a court’s request for documents or other evidence (Holbert & Grill, 2015). Elevators, cafeterias, staff rooms, and restrooms, as well as clinical or commercial settings, are off-limits for professionals to discuss patients, especially with the practitioner’s family and friends. Practitioners may mistakenly believe that such talks are allowed if a client’s identity is not disclosed. This is not true.

本书版权归Arcler所有

148

Encyclopedia of Journalism and Mass Communication

Figure 7.11: Shut up shadow. Source: https://media.istockphoto.com/vectors/shut-up-the-shadow-of-thespeaker-who-took-the-loudspeaker-turned-a-vector-id1148168185?k=20& m=1148168185&s=612x612&w=0&h=qaxMnODJpTQLefJLiSxE7oSesW7L6MNN7RgJibn0KQY=

When a patient in treatment is mentioned in conversation, personal information about that patient is revealed. Face-to-face communication with professionals, coworkers, and friends has the same limitations as the digital or electronic communication with you.

7.6. GUIDELINES FOR THE PRESERVATION AND CARE OF WRITTEN MATERIAL Because written information is more durable than spoken knowledge, there are additional issues about the administration and security of paper files as well as digital data. The complexity and seriousness of these issues have grown as a result of digitization. The procedures used to produce, store, or transfer records might compromise their privacy. Professionals should not utilize personal electronic devices (such as computers, cellphones, and flash drives) or personal Internet accounts to create, modify, or save documents. If a firm is aware of and agrees to such off-site record processing, rigorous privacy precautions, such as password security or anonymized client identification, should be in place. It is not appropriate to access and review

本书版权归Arcler所有

Privacy and Confidentiality in Journalism

149

papers on a portable device in public areas such as coffee shops and public transit. All therapists and organizations, independent or otherwise, must keep client files by standard operating practices. The following are typical workplace records management policy considerations: The following parts of the record-keeping process must be considered: accuracy and content; record storage; record ownership; record access; record review; record retention; relevant statutes of limitation; information transmission, including electronic transfer; and request processing protocols. If these rules are not strictly followed, the client’s welfare is jeopardized, and the practitioner may face ethical objections and legal action. These requirements must be strictly adhered to for Personnel who engage with clients at institutions and facilities must be aware of who possesses the record (Hanitzsch, 2004). The hospital usually has access to a patient’s medical record. The owner or operator of a private practice receives legal title to the document. When it comes to school records, they are owned by the school district. It is against the law for a speech-language pathologist or audiologist to take or copy a report they wrote while working in a specific area, whether they are employed there or not. The professional must exercise professional judgment and be aware of the content that should be included in the client’s legal record while writing notes in the client’s file. Ensure the security and protection of electronic and digital client data and information. Data and information should be password-protected and available only to those who have the necessary authority. Computer systems must be protected by performing frequent backups of digital documents and putting disaster recovery procedures in place.

本书版权归Arcler所有

本书版权归Arcler所有

CHAPTER

8

THE IMPORTANCE OF ADVERTISING ON MEDIA

CONTENTS

本书版权归Arcler所有

8.1. Introduction..................................................................................... 152 8.2. Advertising as a Means of Earning an Income In Media.................... 155 8.3. An Ad-Blocking Solution.................................................................. 161 8.4. Does Advertising Compromise on Media Standards?........................ 161 8.5. Binding the Direct Communication Relationship Between the Seller and the Buyer.................................................. 163 8.6. Leveraging the Right Kinds of Advertising Media.............................. 164 8.7. Problems Associated with the Use of Newspapers in Advertising..... 169 8.8. Different Kinds of Outdoor Advertising Formats............................... 171

152

Encyclopedia of Journalism and Mass Communication

8.1. INTRODUCTION

Figure 8.1: The importance of advertising on media. Source: https://edkentmedia.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/08/social-mediamarketing-1.jpg

In the field of advertising, a wide variety of methods and tactics are utilized to raise customers’ levels of awareness of a particular product, service, or cause in the hopes of swaying their purchase decisions. Even though the vast majority of advertisements are designed to sell a particular product, the majority of advertisements that promote civic involvement, charitable giving, and safe driving all employ the same strategies. The majority of nations’ media outlets derive the majority of their revenue from advertising revenue (such as newspapers, magazines, and television stations). In nations that have never been under communist rule, advertising has developed into a significant commercial sector (Grimes, 2009). Word-of-mouth advertising was by far the most common method of promoting goods and services throughout history, particularly throughout the ancient and medieval periods. It is generally agreed that the development of the printing press in the 15th and 16th centuries was the impetus for the start of modern advertising. In the 17th century, advertisements first appeared in London’s weekly newspapers. By the 18th century, however, this particular kind of advertising had already reached the pinnacle of its popularity. It was during this period of significant economic expansion that the advertising industry and the very first advertising agencies came into existence. The majority of these agencies could be found in the United States at the time. At one time, advertisements in newspapers were initially

本书版权归Arcler所有

The Importance of Advertising on Media

153

placed via the medium of an advertising agency as a middleman. At this point, advertising corporations were the ones responsible for developing the actual message, both in terms of the language used and the artwork used. Despite this, they were able to develop and execute advertising campaigns by the end of the 1920s. Beginning with research and concluding with copywriting and media distribution, they covered the entire process. Many different kinds of media were used in the production of advertisements. Newspapers were the most popular choice for advertisers because they had vast circulations, a local audience, and advertisements that were often updated. In addition to that, the local community where the newspaper was printed and sold was quite active in its consumption of the publication. It is possible to cater a magazine to a certain audience (such as those who are interested in computers, outdoor activities, or literature, for example), which enables product makers to engage with the individuals who are most likely to purchase their wares (Guo et al., 2016). Now that there are regional editions of numerous national periodicals, advertisers can target their advertisements with a greater degree of specificity. The number of people who watch television and listen to the radio has quickly overtaken that of people who consume any other kind of media in the industrialized nations of the Western Hemisphere. In certain nations, radio and television commercials can be broadcast for as long as thirty seconds, while in others, companies can purchase “spots” for some time as short as sixty seconds. In either scenario, the advertiser and the broadcaster will negotiate the periods and intervals at which the commercials will run, and then they will decide whether to slot them between the regularly scheduled programs or to air them during those programs. The number of individuals that listen to or watch a particular show broadcast on television or radio, as well as the demographic profile of those persons, should be data that is readily available to marketers. When determining how much money a broadcaster can charge for advertising, it is necessary to take into account both the size of the audience and the demographics of that audience. If an advertiser wishes to target a specific group, then the advertiser must also take into account the demographics of that audience. Other types of advertising include dealer displays, promotional items such as matchbooks or calendars, outdoor billboards and posters, transit advertising, which can potentially reach millions of people because it is displayed on public transportation, and direct mail advertising, which can make a highly targeted and individualized appeal, and radio and television advertising, which can reach a wide audience. When developing

本书版权归Arcler所有

154

Encyclopedia of Journalism and Mass Communication

advertisements, it is essential to have a good grasp of the target market as well as an ability to make effective use of the various forms of media. When it comes to advertising strategy, the demographic and consumer behavior data from a certain market region acts as the foundation.

Figure 8.2: Advertising. Source: https://media.istockphoto.com/photos/digital-marketing-concept-online-advertisement-picture-id1284549946?k=20&m=1284549946&s=612x61 2&w=0&h=VVGNI_vARpvpqo2Md_xsfcSiotjVVjzisV75dF15T-0=

The effectiveness of an advertising campaign is dependent on a mix of creative message production as well as smart timing and placement of advertising messages to reach and have an effect on the target audience that the advertiser most wishes. When you use this strategy, you can rest assured that the marketing messages will be successful. If an advertiser is working with a limited budget, they will have to decide whether they would rather communicate with a larger audience on a less frequent basis or a more limited audience on a more regular basis. Evaluations of the effectiveness of advertising campaigns are employed in conjunction with these and other strategic decision-making processes. Through exposure to advertising, consumers are allowed to learn more about the products and services that are available to them (Gotlieb et al., 2017). People are less likely to buy things that they are not aware of, hence it is necessary for every company that operates in a free market economy to engage in aggressive advertising to ensure its continued existence.

本书版权归Arcler所有

The Importance of Advertising on Media

155

People who are opposed to advertising feel that customers are coerced into paying a higher price for the products they buy. It is a common misconception that advertising drives up prices, but the reality is that it drives prices down by allowing for greater levels of mass production of a product. According to one school of thought, the high expense of major advertising efforts is the primary reason why just a small number of businesses can successfully compete in today’s market. Even while smaller businesses may not be able to compete successfully on a national level, they may be able to do so locally and online when it comes to advertising. The last point in this line of reasoning is that marketers have a sizeable impact on the regular content of the media sources that they use, such as the editorial stance of a newspaper or the theme of a television show. We are unable to confirm or refute the notion, but it is something we should think about. When it comes to advertising efforts, putting one’s faith in the media to disseminate a message is one strategy to lessen the potentially damaging impact of this phenomenon. People may stop watching the commercial if the integrity of the media firm is compromised.

8.2. ADVERTISING AS A MEANS OF EARNING AN INCOME IN MEDIA

Figure 8.3: Earning income. Source: https://colibriwp.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/how-to-monetize-a-website.png

本书版权归Arcler所有

156

Encyclopedia of Journalism and Mass Communication

Businesses, individuals, and other organizations can generate advertising revenue by displaying sponsored ads alongside their online content on websites, social media accounts, and other online platforms. Google, Facebook, Amazon, and Microsoft accounted for the majority of the $111 billion in internet advertising revenue in the United States in September 2018. Aside from online advertising, these companies have made it possible for users and “influencers” on social media to earn their own money. Ad networks like Google AdSense, YouTube’s monetization features, or Outbrain can be used by individuals and businesses to generate revenue from advertising. Advertisements can be placed on a website or in other digital media content to generate income for online users and businesses. A wide range of advertising methods and service providers can be utilized to accomplish this (Grömping, 2019). Google, Facebook, YouTube, Amazon, and Microsoft allow website owners and content producers to form partnerships and display advertisements alongside their online media in exchange for a share of the revenue generated by the advertisements. Individuals and businesses alike could potentially make a fortune from advertising. More than $15 million is estimated to have been earned by well-known YouTube content artists like Jake Paul and PewDiePie in 2018 through the commercialization of their online video content. Revenue earned from various forms of internet advertising is subject to taxation in several different countries. In 2015, the Australian Taxation Office confirmed that advertising money earned online is subject to taxation and that content creators need to be regarded as “performing artists.” The Internal Revenue Service of the United States considers the revenue generated through online advertising to be taxable income in the country. If a person or organization earns more than $600 in a calendar year from one of the technological platforms owned and operated by Alphabet Inc., such as Google or YouTube, that person or organization will be issued a Form 1099. Within the realm of advertising, there are a lot of controversial topics to discuss. Businesses and individuals that want to make cash through the placement of adverts alongside their content have a hurdle as a result of the proliferation of technology that blocks advertisements. The usage of ad blocking software, which is utilized by 17% of the demographic including those aged 18 to 34 years old, reduces the possibility that a user would click on advertising.

本书版权归Arcler所有

The Importance of Advertising on Media

157

8.2.1. Google

Figure 8.4: Google. Source: https://media.istockphoto.com/photos/man-sitting-the-macbook-retina-with-site-google-on-screen-picture-id502558343?k=20&m=502558343& s=612x612&w=0&h=cPupEpMojmXQ1obDw2Qi85h4Vc2PatSrHjTdfJmbWOQ=

The online advertising networks that Google is a part of are among the largest in the world. As of March 2019, it is anticipated that Google has enabled more than 90% of all searches. [6] Since October 2015, the legal organization that Google and its online advertising businesses have been operating under is Alphabet Inc., which is an American multinational holding corporation. This alteration, according to Larry Page, one of the co-founders of Google, enables Google and the other firms that are a part of Alphabet Inc. to function more freely and effectively. It is anticipated that the corporation made $39.92 billion United States dollars in revenue from digital advertising in 2018. According to the studies, Google and Facebook dominate around sixty percent of the market for online advertising in the United States (Gillmor, 2016). The Google AdSense program, which makes it possible for websites to show adverts supported by Google, is a crucial part of the ecosystem that Google has created for online advertising. When people click on adverts, Google gets compensated monetarily by the company that is doing the advertising. The remaining 68% of the income is sent to the partner website, while it keeps 32% of the revenue for itself. In January of 2018, internet advertising was responsible for 84% of the income generated by Alphabet Inc. Google’s advertising platform, as well

本书版权归Arcler所有

158

Encyclopedia of Journalism and Mass Communication

as the people and small companies that actively engage as network partners, provide a large portion of the company’s overall income.

8.2.2. YouTube In addition to being a video-sharing site, YouTube is also one of Alphabet Inc.’s online advertising powerhouses. In 2006, Google paid $1.65 billion to acquire YouTube. [9] In 2015, YouTube had an estimated worth of over $70 billion, according to Bloomberg estimates, and had an average daily user base of over 30 million people. It is possible to monetize your YouTube videos if you develop, publish, and distribute your videos. In certain cases, YouTube will split a portion of the ad revenue generated by adverts that appear during, before, and after videos with the creators of such videos. In 2013, it was predicted that the average income per thousand viewers of a sponsored film would be $7.60; this figure has since decreased.

8.2.3. Facebook

Figure 8.5: Facebook. Source: https://images.pexels.com/photos/267399/pexels-photo-267399.jpeg?a uto=compress&cs=tinysrgb&dpr=1&w=500

In March of this year, Facebook and Google were estimated to have just less than 60% of the US online marketing industry. That month’s data is used to calculate this figure. Revenue from online advertising accounted for $16.9 billion in Facebook’s fourth quarter 2018 financial report. Due to its extensive knowledge of user demographics and interests, Facebook assures that any advertising campaign will have a good chance of reaching the target

本书版权归Arcler所有

The Importance of Advertising on Media

159

audience it was intended for. CPC stands for cost per click, and it refers to the price Facebook costs for each click on an ad. Businesses may reach people who aren’t already fans or followers of their brand by using Facebook’s ad targeting tools (George, 2011). Based on the size of the audience who sees an advertisement, Facebook charges for this service. It is possible to create advertising campaigns on Facebook for private businesses and individuals, allowing them to make money. “Facebook Ad Breaks” is a function that allows users to make money from advertisements that appear in their videos. Before the first minute has passed, the videos must be at least three minutes long. The films must also be three minutes or more in duration. Some early testing by users of this site reveals that not all viewers watch the videos for long enough to be monetizable. In light of this discovery, it has been concluded that the expected revenue would be lowered. Facebook bought Instagram for $1 billion in 2012. Photographs might be shared using Instagram’s software. More than 30 million people had downloaded the app at the time of the acquisition. Instagram is expected to be valued at more than $100 billion in 2019 and have more than one billion active monthly users by then. Using Instagram, users may post images and videos to their followers and potential customers to reach out to them (also known as influencers). Individuals and companies can both use this feature (known as influencers). It is possible for advertisers on Instagram to direct clients away from Instagram and onto other websites where they may make purchases or download things from third-party suppliers. Every thousand views of an advertisement that an Instagram influencer generates earns them a few bucks. In 2019, Instagram is expected to produce more than $10 billion in yearly revenue from its service. Instagram generates 17% of Facebook’s total online advertising revenue, according to one estimate.

8.2.4. Amazon Amazon was the third-largest online advertising platform in 2018, according to sources, with estimated advertising sales of roughly $4 billion. In the third position is Amazon, according to this ranking. There are around 197 million one-time visits to Amazon’s website per month, just like Google and Facebook. For their products to be seen by their intended audience, Amazon now accepts fees from consumers. Customers may now earn up to 15% of sales generated by their recommendations by becoming Amazon affiliates. By partnering with other well-known online media firms and websites, Amazon is seeking to broaden the reach of its affiliate marketing program as of May 2019 in the United States. According to Buzzfeed and the New York

本书版权归Arcler所有

160

Encyclopedia of Journalism and Mass Communication

Times, Amazon has approached them with an offer of cash in exchange for the placement of product suggestions or adverts on their websites (Fleming, 2014). A link to Amazon would be included in these advertisements so that potential consumers of the featured goods may purchase them there. A charge would be paid to the advertising business for each Amazon sale. Advertisements are frequently shown during live broadcasts of games and other material on the Twitch live streaming network. Twitch Affiliates and Twitch Partners are available to streamers who have expanded their channels to a specific degree, increasing the variety of ways in which they may generate money from their material. As a result, Twitch Partners are entitled to a share of the advertising income earned by their live viewers and can “select the duration and frequency of mid-roll commercials.” Additionally, Twitch Partners have the option to “select the duration and frequency of pre-roll advertisements.”

8.2.5. Microsoft As of 2018, Microsoft was responsible for around 4% of the projected $111 billion in U.S. internet advertising revenue. Microsoft owns both Bing and LinkedIn, which account for around 6% of all online searches. Seling advertising space on Microsoft’s platforms, notably Bing Ads, generates revenue for the company. Customers can acquire the legal right to view advertisements published by firms and individuals on every platform. The Bing Online Publishers program gives webmasters the ability to earn money from advertising by displaying Bing ads on their web pages. Advertisement placement on Microsoft’s websites also helps the company earn money (Fuerst et al., 2015). Users and corporations on LinkedIn can purchase the display of image and video advertisements with the option to target certain demographics. LinkedIn members who click on one of these ads generate between $2 and $5 in revenue for the company. This year, the business expects to make more than $2 billion a year from advertising on LinkedIn, which has over 500 million registered users. There may be varying income tax obligations for persons and businesses who participate in online advertising programs like Google AdSense and YouTube monetization based on where they are situated in the world. In 2015, the Australian Taxation Office established new rules stating that anyone who makes money from advertising on the internet is deemed a performing artist and must pay income tax. Individuals who earn a living via their intellectual or entertaining abilities are defined as “performance artists”

本书版权归Arcler所有

The Importance of Advertising on Media

161

by the Australian Taxation Office (ATO). Singers, dancers, and others in a related field are all examples of performing artists. Any money made via internet advertising by Australian taxpayers is taxed as compensation for services rendered by the taxpayer as a special professional, according to the Australian Taxation Office (ATO). Answering the question of whether or not internet advertising income is taxed, was done. [4] The Internal Revenue Service (IRS) considers online advertising income to be taxable for individuals in the United States. The business will issue a 1099 tax form to everyone in the United States who earns more than $600 in annual ad revenue from platforms operated by Alphabet Inc.

8.3. AN AD-BLOCKING SOLUTION Computer software and applications may be used to remove all internet advertisements by prohibiting them from being seen. Website owners and content providers can avoid obtaining revenue from software ad blockers by employing this method. Many young people are using ad-blocking software, which prohibits major platforms from taking use of “pay-per-click” advertising to its fullest extent. According to the Wall Street Journal, the poll was conducted. According to a recent report, Google has lent its support to ad-blocking technology. If you’re a Google Chrome user, you’ll soon have the ability to disable ads. Adverts that interrupt the user experience and don’t let them dismiss them until a certain period has elapsed will be targeted by this program. Over 42% of the websites that Google has warned about might be affected by the changes made to ensure that advertising user standards are followed (Esser & Umbricht, 2014). If a website is determined to be violating Google’s user standards, a warning and a thirty-day grace period are offered before any further action is taken against the site. Google recently announced that users of its search engine would soon be able to utilize the company’s ad-blocking technology without having to install any additional software or download any third-party applications.

8.4. DOES ADVERTISING COMPROMISE ON MEDIA STANDARDS? Media coverage of products and editorial recommendations made across a variety of media channels have a significant impact on what consumers decide to buy, according to a recent study. Consumers believe that the editorial content and product coverage in newspapers and magazines are

本书版权归Arcler所有

162

Encyclopedia of Journalism and Mass Communication

unaffected by marketers. These sources are viewed as more credible than advertising because of this general assumption. In this article, we explain how advertising can provide businesses with the same advantages as getting media attention. Data on 291 Italian fashion companies’ advertisements and product coverage in over 120 newspapers and magazines around the world were collected between 2002 and 2003 and analyzed. There is a strong positive influence of advertising on coverage when firm heterogeneity, endogeneity and the simultaneous occurrence of advertising and coverage are considered. In light of these findings, one may wonder about the level of objectivity in magazine reporting and editorial content. An advertising standard authority mandates that promotional materials in the U.K. must be designated clearly as such. Ads, on the other hand, are becoming more “native,” or seamlessly integrated into journalistic content, giving the impression that they are part of the editorial content. Native advertising aims to “deliver sponsored advertisements that are so integrated with page content, absorbed into the design, and consistent with the platform that the viewer feels they belong,” as stated in the industry guide published by the Interactive Advertising Bureau. It is undeniable that it is becoming more commonplace. A total of $26.5 billion was spent on content marketing worldwide in 2014, according to PQ Media, a 13% increase over 2013. Enders Analysis predicts that spending on native advertising in Europe will rise from €5.2 billion in 2015 to €13.2 billion in 2020, which will represent 52% of total display advertising expenditures in Europe. The nature of marketing communications must be made very clear. Branded content has a primary goal of addressing these concerns (Ali et al., 2014). Marketing websites and channels on Instagram, Facebook, and YouTube are examples of places where this type of content can be found, along with other online destinations. After that comes the “native” distribution of sponsored content by marketers, which includes advertisements that appear on websites, apps, and social media news feeds. Programmatic advertising is a significant part of the overall trend toward greater automation in the purchasing, selling, and positioning of advertising space. For instance, content recommendation firms like Outbrain and Taboola place sponsored articles on publisher websites. The third type of branded content is content that is either hosted by the publisher or developed by the publisher. This shift from print to digital and mobile advertising is seen as a “crisis” by the news industry. The idea that

本书版权归Arcler所有

The Importance of Advertising on Media

163

this has increased the media industry’s reliance on advertising income at a time when internet marketers are seeking “more bang for their buck” is less frequently accepted. Native advertising, which is defined as “commercial material that looks to be journalistic,” is now within reach as a result of these features.

8.5. BINDING THE DIRECT COMMUNICATION RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN THE SELLER AND THE BUYER This section covers the concept of relationship satisfaction as well as some of the variables, often known as antecedents that earlier research has found as being important for gaining satisfaction in a relationship. The relevance of long-term orientation and satisfying buyer-seller relationships has been the subject of a great number of studies that have been conducted between companies. The key idea behind this argument is that contented purchasers and vendors are less inclined to sever their professional ties. One definition of satisfaction is “an overall good appraisal of the working relationship between the components firm and another company,” while another defines satisfaction as “the degree to which one is pleased with something.” The phrase has also been defined as the delighted emotional state that follows when the people involved in a professional partnership meet their expectations (Duffield, 2011). This interpretation of the term comes from another definition of the term which reads: “gratification.” Mehta et al. argued that couples should prioritize perceptual compatibility because of the positive effects it has on both partners. The coherence is built on trust, loyalty, and teamwork to ensure that the aims of each partner are, on average, the same. The amount of trust, commitment, and collaboration between customers and merchants will be lower to the extent that the cultural differences between the two groups are higher. Anderson offered a clarification for the question. Both Narus and the statistics that Mehta et al. gave underline the significance of having an agreement between trading partners to achieve buyer-seller transaction satisfaction.

本书版权归Arcler所有

164

Encyclopedia of Journalism and Mass Communication

8.6. LEVERAGING THE RIGHT KINDS OF ADVERTISING MEDIA 8.6.1. Internet

Figure 8.6: Advertising. Source: https://media.istockphoto.com/vectors/online-advertising-vector-id130 0940216?k=20&m=1300940216&s=612x612&w=0&h=yEprrYAe3fZvyfaB4z MCUK_FG0f0PSLLQ0zUdNx2l-U=

It is a sort of marketing and promotion that targets specific markets and platform users over the Internet, known as online marketing, digital marketing, or just online marketing. Digital marketing, online marketing, and internet marketing are some of the other terms for online marketing. Mobile advertising, social media marketing, email marketing, search engine marketing (SEM), and other forms of display advertising are all forms of display advertising. It also includes banner advertising on the internet. Programmatic advertising refers to the practice of distributing advertisements across a wide range of websites, media services, and platforms by means of computerized software systems .A publisher and an advertiser are generally the two parties involved in internet advertising. Conventional advertising

本书版权归Arcler所有

The Importance of Advertising on Media

165

has a similar organizational framework. Advertising agencies, ad servers, and affiliates are all instances of third parties who might have a role in advertising campaigns. Advertisement text is produced and placed by advertising firms. Ad servers employ technology to distribute advertising and collect information. Advertisers’ advertising affiliates carry out independent advertising on their behalf. Advertisements on the internet outsold broadcast and cable television sales in the United States in 2016. In 2017, Internet advertising generated $83.0 billion in revenue in the United States, an increase of 14% over the previous year’s $73.50 billion. Advertising online will cost the United States an estimated $125.2 billion in 2019, compared to television’s $54.8 billion (70.4 billion). There has been a steady rise in regulation on online advertising methods because of the problematic nature of many of them (Domingo et al., 2008). Because so many people find internet commercials to be obnoxious, ad-blocking software is becoming increasingly popular. It’s possible to find a variety of reasons for this tendency. It’s likely that internet advertising income won’t be enough to totally replace conventional newspapers’ revenue sources. Due to a decrease in advertising revenue, several newspapers have decided to put their content behind paywalls. During the early 1990s, the emergence of online banner advertisements was a logical evolution for website owners seeking for new ways to monetize their content. Prodigy, a commercial web service, places banner advertisements for Sears items at the bottom of the screen. To promote a law firm in Silicon Valley in 1993, Global Network Navigator built the first advertisement that could be clicked on from within the internet. In 1994, AT&T and other firms began purchasing banner advertisements from HotWired, the online section of Wired Magazine, and Pathfinder, owned and run by Time Warner. A 44% click-through rate for AT&T’s initial HotWired ad, but instead of directing consumers to the AT&T website, it sent them to an online tour of seven of the world’s top art institutions.

本书版权归Arcler所有

166

Encyclopedia of Journalism and Mass Communication

8.6.2. TV

Figure 8.7: TV adverts. Source: https://media.istockphoto.com/photos/retro-tv-receivers-set-from-circa-60s-70s-and-80s-of-xx-century-old-picture-id1218739882?k=20&m=121 8739882&s=612x612&w=0&h=MWX3iehmvPtM-eltKBHz-xOn3z8BV6gEi6WJA8rcQss=

On July 1st, 1941, the first-ever legal television advertisement was broadcast in the state of New York during a Brooklyn Dodgers versus Philadelphia Phillies game, which was on the screens of about 4,000 televisions. In the decades that followed, the popularity of television advertising swelled along with the popularity of mass marketing. Today, television is one of the most popular media channels for marketers, especially with the advent of connected TV advertising, which uses viewer data for more effective segmentation. Video ads have also expanded beyond the traditional cable box to include YouTube ads and online videos. Media planners can now showcase their commercials across the web on various websites to connect with audiences online Television combines audio with visuals. This creates a multi-sensory advertising experience that shows viewers how your product is valuable. When you play a commercial on someone’s television, the touchpoint takes place in their home. This makes it a more personal medium. Television is also a great way to establish a personalized connection with a viewer. Consider for example The Hyundai Super Bowl ad from 2017. This

本书版权归Arcler所有

The Importance of Advertising on Media

167

commercial reconnected soldiers with their families virtually to watch the game. Although this commercial did not directly speak to the cars they sell, it did reinforce its brand message. Television is a great brand awareness tool – Almost every American has a television, with 83% of adults having two or more, and American households keep their televisions on for 8.1 hours each day on average. As a result, roughly $76 billion was spent on advertising in 2019 alone. By combining television ads with YouTube’s reach, brands can benefit from viewers watching their commercials long after they have aired. However, brands need to be sure that they have a strong message (Deuze, 2002). No commercial will go viral if it does not connect with viewers. In addition to hosting commercials on a specific YouTube channel, advertising on the platform itself can be beneficial. Since many users are logged in when they view videos (2 billion logged-in users), demographic data can be combined with the content they are watching, resulting in relevant content being seen by the target audience. Television advertising can be costly for organizations. It’s a large investment to not only purchase the slot but to develop the commercial’s creative content. Media planners have to forecast which shows will generate a higher than expected viewership in the coming months. An inaccurate estimate can compromise marketing ROI. Additionally, since television ads generally get good exposure, a bad ad can hurt a company’s brand reputation. When there are more eyeballs on an ad, it is more important to make sure the creative is strong. A con of television advertising is that viewers do not always actively listen to television commercials, and often try to skip or avoid them when given the opportunity. Also, not everyone tuning in will be part of your target audience making it easier to waste your advertising budget. Always consider which segments watch a particular television program before purchasing a slot. Although a primetime show may get more eyes, daytime or late-night television could be more targeted and save you money. Additionally, when selecting an advertising slot, we recommend booking live television where possible. When watching a football game, your users will be unable to fast forward through the commercial breaks if they want to watch the game as it is happening.

本书版权归Arcler所有

168

Encyclopedia of Journalism and Mass Communication

8.6.3. Print Newspaper

Figure 8.8: Newspaper. Source: https://media.istockphoto.com/photos/newspaper-headlines-picture-id 160519013?k=20&m=160519013&s=612x612&w=0&h=7xMml2AKYpucvC gRH7I_Urj2Ei52NsFaziQ4aeGjZbk=

Advertisements in newspapers dating back to the founding of firms, making print media like newspapers one of the first forms of advertising media. Advertisers in Italy, Germany, and the Netherlands began inserting their advertisements in weekly gazettes throughout the 16th century as literacy rates increased throughout those countries. Even after over 500 years, the printed newspaper is still a powerful medium that generates around $15.9 billion in income for advertisers in the United States (Detenber et al., 2012).

8.6.3.1. Newspaper Advertisement Benefits When it comes to making a buying choice, 82% of customers rely on newspapers, making them one of the most trusted kinds of media. They might potentially reach millions of people every day. Newspaper advertising is typically sent to certain geographic locations, and different sections of the newspaper can be written to appeal to specific types of readers. As a result, newspaper advertising can be extremely targeted. For instance, newspapers are an excellent medium for reaching senior audiences, which may be less susceptible to advertising sent over the internet. In general, those who read newspapers have better wages and/or greater levels of education. Advertising

本书版权归Arcler所有

The Importance of Advertising on Media

169

through newspapers, just like radio advertising, has the potential to increase the success of your marketing efforts. Even if the number of people reading newspapers has been on the decline, seven out of ten readers have said that they are less concerned about a story when it originates from a news brand rather than social media.

8.7. PROBLEMS ASSOCIATED WITH THE USE OF NEWSPAPERS IN ADVERTISING The number of people who read newspapers is continuing its downward trend. The circulation of Sunday newspapers has dropped from an estimated 59.4 million in the year 2000 to an estimated 30.8 million in 2018. This is because young people rarely read newspapers; just 5% of individuals between the ages of 18 and 29 regularly read a print newspaper (Curtin et al., 2018). Quite frequently, publications like newspapers have editorial standards to prevent invasive marketing, which may be detrimental to efforts to create a brand. Additionally, determining the effectiveness of newspaper ads can be challenging, particularly when compared to the effectiveness of digital marketing. Newspapers, on the other hand, have a far shorter shelf life than magazines do, and as a result, they are often thrown away at the end of each day. Additionally, the majority of periodicals are making the switch to digital versions. However, the vast majority of these adverts take the form of banner ads, which do not always succeed in capturing the attention of website visitors.

8.7.1. Magazines The earliest magazines were published in the late 1600s as a form of leisure for the upper class, and they typically included issues relating to philosophy, culture, and lifestyle. Not until the 19th century did the middle class begin to desire journals, so publishers began selling advertising space to cover sky-high printing costs and improve circulation. By the turn of the 20th century, magazines were well-known for their distinct readerships and huge, full-color adverts. In 2019, the anticipated value of magazine advertising was $15.6 billion. Because magazine audiences are so finely targeted, marketers can target the appropriate customers fast and affordably. Audiences are often more interested in and anticipative of your commercials.

本书版权归Arcler所有

170

Encyclopedia of Journalism and Mass Communication

In addition, newspapers may have a strong brand name, which might increase the credibility of your campaign. In addition, readers frequently recall print ads more vividly. A week later, research participants at Temple University responded more positively to paper advertisements than to online advertisements. When it comes to magazines, 70% of Americans still prefer paper versions over digital versions. Magazines are also increasing as a media. 228.7 million people read print and digital magazines in 2019. (In contrast, there were 210.7 million people in 2012). If you manufacture bicycles, for instance, there are several publications devoted to bicycling, the outdoors, and other related topics. The majority of women’s journals have sections on fashion and/or beauty. It is feasible for someone to carefully study advertising for clothing, accessories, or cosmetics. In addition, publications may already have strong brand awareness, which might be advantageous for your campaign. Compared to other forms of print media, magazines have a longer shelf life (Cohen, 2001). A reader who purchases a magazine may retain it for a few weeks before tossing it. Because magazines are regularly passed between acquaintances and read in waiting rooms, magazines have a greater secondary readership. The Association of Magazine Media reports that this secondary audience “contributes 73% of primary sales reaction,” so enhancing the marketing return on investment. Before negotiating ad space, it is essential to gain a detailed estimate of a magazine’s core audience, notwithstanding its large readership. The secondary audiences may be accounted for in the media buy, but they are only ever approximated (and never guaranteed) (and not guaranteed) (and not guaranteed). Lastly, magazines usually provide full-color and/or full-page ad options, allowing their employees greater creative latitude. Bright colors and captivating images make it easy to attract the attention of readers. Today, many magazines are published digitally, and their email lists are accessible. Advertise your products, white papers, and other content assets to generate leads and build your email marketing lists. Numerous publications are also very customizable and may target readers based on their personalities, occupations, or other information. It may be difficult to place timely advertisements in magazines since advertisers must have their ads ready weeks or months before publication. The national reach of magazines makes it difficult to target specific locations. Moreover, brand damage cannot be rectified in flight if a magazine’s advertising is unpopular or poorly received. This is because magazine

本书版权归Arcler所有

The Importance of Advertising on Media

171

advertising cannot be withdrawn or redirected. Without initially reviewing the database, it may be difficult to evaluate the quality of digital publications. Additionally, not all publications in all industries are digital savvy. Although this trend is beginning to change, you may not have access to the particular data required for a hyper-targeted campaign depending on the industry you are attempting to reach.

8.7.2. Outdoor Posters Out-of-home advertising, often known as outdoor advertising, is directed at customers when they are outside of their homes. The Outdoor Advertising Association of America estimates that consumers spend around 70% of their time in the great outdoors.

8.8. DIFFERENT KINDS OF OUTDOOR ADVERTISING FORMATS Outdoor advertisements come in a variety of forms, the most well-known of which is the billboard. There are three primary categories of outdoor advertising that are utilized in modern times:

8.8.1. Billboard Advertising The vast majority of people are familiar with the concept of advertising on billboards, regardless of where they live or go. The majority of billboards are erected in rural areas along main highways and secondary roads that see less traffic. They are a straightforward and low-cost technique of notifying drivers with geographically relevant information, such as the location of the fast food chain restaurant along the road that is nearest to them, the motel that is closest to them, or the campgrounds that are located at the next exit. Its possible motorists will see them just about everywhere (Claussen, 2007).

8.8.2. Street Furniture The term “street furniture” can be confusing since it refers to things other than park benches and bus seats. Examples of “street furniture” include bus shelters, newsstands, and telephone kiosks.

本书版权归Arcler所有

172

Encyclopedia of Journalism and Mass Communication

8.8.3. Travel The most common kind of outdoor advertising for public transportation may be found on the sides of buses. However, this type of advertising can also be found in taxis, along airport pathways, and, more recently, wrapped around moving items.

8.8.3.1. Alternative Strategies for Outdoor Advertising Customers may feel as though they are being followed by advertising everywhere they go, including the checkout lines at grocery stores, sporting activities, and fitness clubs. They can have a basic level of technology, such as computer-generated mini-posters that are attached to a bulletin board at a coffee shop, or a high level of technology, such as digital ads.

8.8.3.2. Digital Outdoor Advertising Digital outdoor advertising, also known as digital signage, is a kind of advertising that makes use of electrical technology to change the material that is presented on a screen. This form of advertising may be seen in many public places (Carpenter, 2008). Digital billboards cycle through a limited number of advertising at a rate of one rotation every six to eight seconds. Other types of digital signage might take the shape of freestanding displays, which can be placed on a municipal sidewalk or next to a college basketball court. The most important sort of outdoor advertising for any small brick-andmortar business is called integrated outdoor advertising, and it might take the form of exterior signs, for example. Signage used by businesses must be vivid, clear, and able to be read from a considerable distance. It is important that it not only represents the brand of the firm but also makes it simpler for customers to recognize and find the business.

本书版权归Arcler所有

CHAPTER

9

THE FUTURE OF JOURNALISM

CONTENTS

本书版权归Arcler所有

9.1. Social Media, Paparazzi, and Blogging............................................ 176 9.2. Social Media’s Importance in Journalism.......................................... 177 9.3. The Rise of Synthetic Media............................................................. 181 9.4. The Media’s Third Stage of Growth................................................... 183 9.5. Budget-Friendly Creation of High-Quality Material.......................... 183 9.6. Artificial Advertising and Retailing................................................... 184 9.7. Digitally Illustrating the Dead.......................................................... 185 9.8. Hybrid Newsrooms, Generational Change, and New Agendas........ 186 9.9. New Approaches to News Coverage: Greater Diversity and Less Conflict........................................................................... 189 9.10. Journalists, Harassment, and the Role of Social Media................... 191 9.11. Quality and Accessibility of New Communication Technologies.... 192 9.12. New Media Development.............................................................. 193 9.13. The Internet of Things..................................................................... 196

174

Encyclopedia of Journalism and Mass Communication

Journalism is growing more essential, but it is also becoming weaker, according to new research that focuses on five key elements of the future of media and the prospective effect it may have on society. The report’s significance grows, but its dependability suffers. The Future of Journalism examines how rising information disparity, failed journalistic economic models and the effect of social media are all jeopardizing the future of journalism (Bowe et al., 2020). According to this analysis, digital media contribute to a broader range of news sources, and despite the challenges, the best journalism is more effective than ever before.

Figure 9.1: An infographic showing journalists interviewing someone. Source: https://www.istockphoto.com/vector/interview-mass-media-announcement-news-tv-broadcasting-with-cameraman-and-reporter-gm1330617438– 413980911?phrase=journalism

Figure 9.2: A journalist getting ready to present the news. Source: https://www.istockphoto.com/photo/tv-reporter-presenting-the-newsoutdoors-gm1315630659–403562515

本书版权归Arcler所有

The Future of Journalism

175

The five global trends depicted below are based on the most recent Reuters Institute research. Changes in news consumption patterns, advancements in the news industry, and shifting political climates around the world are all considered.

Figure 9.3: An infographic showing various journalist recording via microphones. Source: https://www.istockphoto.com/vector/journalist-hands-with-microphones-reporters-with-mics-take-interview-for-news-gm1306860901– 397318825?phrase=journalism

After years of media outlets functioning as gatekeepers, we now live in a world in which news outlets remain in charge of setting the news’ direction but platform firms control how the public gets to know about it. There are no filter bubbles as a result of the general shift to digital media. When it comes to information, clients are exposed to an ever-increasing number of possibilities. Journalism has a bad track record when it comes to attracting the attention of the public and winning the confidence of the general public (Bronstein & Fitzpatrick, 2015). News organizations are more exposed to corporate and political pressures because the financial mechanisms that sustain them are under threat. Everything from the most well-known politicians to the biggest private firms is now covered by more news sources than ever before, and the finest journalism is frequently better than before. The study projects that these five trends will manifest in a variety of forms around the world in the next several years, depending on cultural, economic, political, and social circumstances.

本书版权归Arcler所有

176

Encyclopedia of Journalism and Mass Communication

9.1. SOCIAL MEDIA, PAPARAZZI, AND BLOGGING Journalism has never been more relevant than now, thanks to social media.

Figure 9.4: A smart phone with social media platforms. Source: https://www.istockphoto.com/photo/social-media-applicationsgm1371763060–441037484?phrase=social%20media

Figure 9.5: A lady using her smart phone as a recorder. Source: https://www.istockphoto.com/photo/smiling-young-african-female-influencer-doing-a-vlog-post-at-home-gm1313649311– 402089101?phrase=social%20media

本书版权归Arcler所有

The Future of Journalism

177

Many purists would have you believe that social media and journalism are incompatible, but nothing could be further from the truth. Indeed, we believe social media has had a significant impact on the journalism industry.

9.2. SOCIAL MEDIA’S IMPORTANCE IN JOURNALISM Not only do digital environments appear to benefit journalists, but they also provide them with access to an infinite amount of data. Furthermore, those working in this field must be connected to the internet to keep up with the various platforms and millions of interactions that occur. Misinformation and fabricated stories abound on the internet and social media. It may be difficult to distinguish between fact and fiction in the digital abyss. Although there have been setbacks, social media has had a positive impact on journalism (Blankenship & Gibson, 2016). Journalists use social media to advance their careers. Even though it’s difficult to imagine a world without social media, it wasn’t long ago that journalists had to make significant contributions to their field or win prestigious awards to establish a solid reputation. Because of the rapid spread of information on the internet, a person’s brand can now be established much more quickly. It’s simple to share a news story immediately after it’s been reported or after you’ve written an article about it. When you establish yourself as a trustworthy source of information for those who follow you, you will be able to distribute your writing consistently. Author biographies are now displayed alongside their @ handles on social media for the majority of publications. They are not required to post business-related content on their social media accounts. Journalists who use social media to build stronger relationships with their readers may benefit. Readers can discuss their work, and they can meet with others in their field to exchange ideas. Increased social media activity increases a journalist’s chances of becoming well-known in their field and among the general public. Social media allows publications to reach a larger demographic. Nowadays, everyone has access to social media, which means that the potential customer base is practically limitless. Globally, 3.96 billion people are expected to use social media by 2022. Because of the large number of potential readers, newspapers and journalists can share their content on social media and reach tens of thousands, if not millions, more people. Publishers and journalists, for example, use Twitter to quickly disseminate breaking

本书版权归Arcler所有

178

Encyclopedia of Journalism and Mass Communication

news because it allows them to do so in real-time) (Biswas & Sipes, 2020). Many customers use it to stay up to date on current events or to express their opinions on a hot topic. Publishing relevant and authentic content that customers want exposes your work to a large audience and allows you to grow your business over time. This is the future of journalism! Social media enables a broader range of conversations. As previously stated, everyone and their mother is on social media. These online communities represent a diverse range of social groups, each with its point of view. As a writer, you understand the importance of constantly broadening your horizons and learning new things. Social media platforms such as Twitter, Facebook, and Instagram are excellent places for journalists to interact with their audiences. Journalists can use social media to pose questions and learn about other cultures, experiences, and points of view because of the variety it provides. To be fair, they aren’t concerned with being honest or balanced in their rants, which are frequently illogical. Because they are so addictive, they could be used as a new form of journalism. Weblogging or blogging is a new media phenomenon with its own set of terms. Bloggers are people who write blogs. If you are a blogger, you are probably aware of the blogosphere’s weather pattern. If you’ve ever wanted to stay up to date on the latest news and developments in the blogging world, you’ve come to the right place (Brandon, 2002). The posts are organized chronologically and can contain anything from simple text to music, photographs, and even live videos. A blog is typically an online stream of thoughts that is highly personalized. According to one example, the rise of the personal homepage is not an uncommon occurrence. It is a phenomenon that so many people are interested in what bloggers have to say. Some people may find blogging’s dynamic and unmediated nature appealing. Writing for a blog allows for direct communication between author and reader, without the use of intermediaries such as an editorial position or a petty subeditor. According to editors millions of readers are flocking to online news sites for the latest information on the Iraq war. The story, however, does not end here. Aside from that, they use weblogs to get skeptic analysis, critical commentary, and perspectives rarely seen in mainstream media, such as those of non-native speakers, as well as the occasional first-person account. Journalists in the Gulf keep weblogs to provide more in-depth, personal, and colorful coverage of events they witness firsthand. The public was eager to obtain as much information as possible to make sense of the September 11

本书版权归Arcler所有

The Future of Journalism

179

terrorist attacks. Because of this demand, a blogger’s fame grows. Bloggers were not required to adhere to the same journalistic standards of objectivity, balance, and accuracy as major news organizations. People turned to the tens of thousands of new blogs to express their emotions rather than provide facts because they could do so in a way that was both personal and open to the public. Blogger.com reaped the benefits of allowing anyone to share their thoughts, feelings, and opinions with the rest of the world through the internet. They promised to democratize the internet by making it easier than ever for anyone with an internet connection to publish content online. Then blogging grew mainstream. Established print journalists from magazines started to establish their weblogs to sit alongside news and features, dissolving the barrier between journalism and blogging even more. And the tools to construct blogs became increasingly popular with internet service providers such as AOL supplying blogging facilities to its subscribers and Blogger.com gaining a financial lift from its acquisition by the search engine powerhouse Google (Berezhnaia, 2018). But if some bloggers feel that a new kind of journalism is emerging, some new media pundits remain skeptical.

Figure 9.6: A writer opening her blog. Source: https://www.istockphoto.com/photo/blogging-woman-reading-bloggm887987150–246375044?phrase=blogging

本书版权归Arcler所有

180

Encyclopedia of Journalism and Mass Communication

Figure 9.7: An infographic showing someone writhing his blog. Source: https://www.istockphoto.com/vector/writer-at-work-gm1318319153– 405487136?phrase=blogging

The question is why so many consumers of online information have decided to leave traditional sources of news in favor of weblogs. Looking at the material blog’s supply, such as varied opinions, first-person experiences, and engagement, one may assume that readers prefer either a balanced or more personal component to their news. At the foundation of this may also be rising unhappiness or cynicism of news given by huge media firms. If journalism is by definition the reporting of news in a fair, balanced, and accurate way, then blogging is not journalism. But if the truth is that not all journalists and media outlets adhere to these principles, the distinction is less clear (Banda, 2007). A result of the disagreement over blogging has reinforced the concept that many big news and media enterprises have lost sight of the idea that no publication or source can automatically command the trust of the reader. The weblogs that have established considerable followings have done so based on establishing an expert on a given subject, or breaking news that has later proved accurate. Authors of blogs are awarded authoritative status by the very readers who have trusted them through time or share the same perspective. The reaction towards blogging as a media mimics that of the New Journalism movement, pioneered by writers such as Hunter S Thompson, Tom Wolfe, Truman Capote, and Norman Mailer. The New Journalism

本书版权归Arcler所有

The Future of Journalism

181

movement transformed the previous idea of news writing by presenting stories as features with more color, and life and imbued with the personal experiences of the writer. The sensation of isolation between the writer and reader faded. At the time of the movement, the sound of guffaws and sneers from news writers and professional journalists echoed just as fiercely as they do now towards blogging. Like them or not, they are here to stay and are now an essential aspect of an online news gatherer’s tool kit.

9.3. THE RISE OF SYNTHETIC MEDIA 9.3.1. Synthetic Media and Deepfakes Artificial intelligence is used to produce or alter media material, and the phrase “synthetic media” is used to describe this. Artificial media, such as Deepfakes, in which a person’s picture or voice is substituted by another’s, has become well recognized by the general public (Wanta et al., 2004). The term “deepfake” was invented by a Reddit user whose account was used to digitally substitute the faces of Scarlett Johansson and Gal Gadot with the bodies of X-rated girls. It’s no surprise that sexual content was the first place deepfakes surfaced.

Figure 9.8: A lady reading fake news on her laptop. Source: https://www.istockphoto.com/photo/fake-news-on-internetgm1003853864–271180257?phrase=synthetic%20media

本书版权归Arcler所有

182

Encyclopedia of Journalism and Mass Communication

Figure 9.9: An infographic on the difference between a real picture and a deepfake. Source: https://www.istockphoto.com/vector/deepfake-deep-face-technologyconcept-vector-illustration-gm1204651308–346708570?phrase=deepfake

As predicted, deepfakes have extended beyond porn and now account for 80% of all deepfakes. The amount of deepfake videos surged 6,820fold between 2019 and 2020, from 14,678 to 100 million. They began to penetrate well-known websites on the web. For example, Tom Cruise isn’t on TikTok. While @deeptomcruise tweets (very convincing) deepfakes of Tom Cruise on Twitter, you could be forgiven for assuming that he is. Here and here are some instances of what I’m talking about. It’s a hoax: Tom Cruise is not on TikTok. The @deeptomcruise TikTok account contains Tom Cruise deepfaking. Synthetic media and deepfakes, in general, are seen unfavorably by the general populace. 90% of Americans feel that deepfakes may be detrimental rather than useful. The concern is well-founded. Nancy Pelosi and Nancy Pelosi’s dementia-related uncertainty in 2019 are two examples of deepfakes. As a result of Facebook’s failure to delete the Pelosi video, it acquired millions of views on the social networking site. Mark Zuckerberg’s dictatorial speech in which he says, “Whoever owns the data controls the future” was mandated to be archived by Facebook (Wilkinson et al., 2020). When Donald Trump says that the Access Hollywood tape is a fabrication, it’s simple to understand how this might have occurred in 2016. In the long term, deepfakes might lead to a rise in “fake news” and a lack of differentiation between the two.

本书版权归Arcler所有

The Future of Journalism

183

To guarantee that synthetic media is utilized in a responsible manner like any other technology, the right protections and regulations must be in place. Despite this, synthetic media should not be considered a bad thing.

9.4. THE MEDIA’S THIRD STAGE OF GROWTH Samsung Next argues that synthetic media is the third stage of media evolution in its Synthetic Media Landscape study. Old-fashioned media helped in the diffusion of a limited number of products via print, radio, and television. As a technological enabler, radio and television. Distributing material via New Media is becoming more accessible owing in large part to social media. Using the Internet is a wonderful method to get things done. Future synthetic media will allow everyone to develop and generate media. There are technical enablers like deep learning and artificial intelligence. Aside from a few more ominous applications, synthetic media may unleash creativity and enhance people’s lives.

9.5. BUDGET-FRIENDLY CREATION OF HIGH-QUALITY MATERIAL Because of technical developments, the cost of generating high-quality material has fallen. What used to take a $1 million helicopter overhead picture can now be captured for less than $1,000 with a GoPro and a tiny drone. There have been countless Oscar-winning films made with Apple’s $299 iMovie editing program. Creation is becoming more broadly available. YouTubers and TikTok users are the most prevalent authors of these videos, which are often the work of a single individual. Anyone may now generate entertainment with a big cast owing to synthetic media. Consider employing virtual actors in your project and personalizing them.

9.5.1. Media that Entices Content has moved from passive viewing to active engagement during the previous quarter-century. Video sharing sites like YouTube and TikTok have displaced traditional media like television and film. Imagine having a group of friends around to watch movies and television. It is feasible to utilize synthetic media to upload the photographs of your pals, who would then appear in an exciting adventure film that you and your friends could watch together (Vlad, 2021). Friends could imagine they’re the Avengers instead of watching the movie. Also, individuals are going to construct digital

本书版权归Arcler所有

184

Encyclopedia of Journalism and Mass Communication

personalities for themselves. It’s easy to modify the looks of individuals in movies, GIFs, and memes using programs like Reface or Avatarify. Anyone may now construct an artificial Zoom conference participant with the aid of free software from Avatarify. Attending a meeting with Elon Musk, for example, maybe a nice surprise for your employees. However, it’s not impossible to foresee a creator getting rewarded anytime their likeness shows in a deepfake. The fabrication of synthetic video and audio. In synthetic media, audio and video can be modified. Reshoots and podcasts were formerly required to be performed. Editing and producing synthetic media may be done with contemporary technologies. Descript, for example, is an audio composition application that enables you to alter your voice recording using a text script. It’s almost surreal: your voice reads aloud the content you input into a page that looks like Microsoft Word. Using Synthesia, firms may generate multilingual movies for use in likes of CEO announcements and training. It is conceivable for an English-speaking CEO to conduct talks in Portuguese, Mandarin, Spanish and other languages utilizing artificial intelligence (AI). In the digital realm, there exist virtual characters. KFC launched a digitized Colonel Sanders in 2019. They also made him a thirst trap for whatever reason. According to a Mashable headline, KFC’s “Virtual Influencer Colonel” is extraordinarily handsome. Thanks to synthetic media, digital brand mascots may look alive. Customers may engage with a virtual facsimile of Ronald McDonald instead of an animated one. Also filling stores will be digital characters. Imagine a virtual person taking your order at a drive-through fast food restaurant or answering your queries at the Apple Store. Artificial intelligence, which usually assumes the shape of a digital person, will automate ordinary chores and jobs (Udomisor & Udoh, 2015). This might be seen as frightening and foreboding. As I mentioned in The Age of Automation, AI will ultimately be highly useful, but it must be accompanied by worker development and lifelong learning.

9.6. ARTIFICIAL ADVERTISING AND RETAILING In the future, product placements in movies, television, and video games will be adapted to the preferences and demands of the audience. Using Samsung NEXT as an example Emily encounters a virtual individual wearing Nike sneakers while playing a computer game. David, a friend of hers who prefers Adidas

本书版权归Arcler所有

The Future of Journalism

185

footwear, plays the same game and witnesses a character wearing Adidas footwear. When purchasing apparel online, clients may view themselves and their bodies in the outfits.

9.6.1. Anonymous Persons Deepfakes were deployed by the creators of the HBO documentary Welcome to Chechnya to safeguard the identities of LGBTQ+ persecutors who recounted their tales. Volunteers’ faces were overlaid over the survivors’ faces as they spoke. The HBO documentary Welcome to Chechnya highlights the value of deep fakes. For the HBO documentary, a deepfake was utilized to superimpose the face of a volunteer on an unnamed Chechen victim of LGBTQ+ persecution. Salutations from Chechnya. People who are less inclined to express themselves publicly lack access to the same avenues for creativity and selfexpression because being a creator in the current day is essentially public. The VTuber movement is one answer to this problem; while the majority of VTubers preserve anonymity, Miko is an exception in that she reveals her face. The growth of social networks utilizing avatars is one outcome. ItsMe, for instance, allows you to meet new individuals using a depiction of your face. New avatar-based social network Itsme receives $15,2 million from Alexis Ohanian and others. ItsMe is a social network where your avatar depicts your face. Thanks to synthetic media, people will be able to separate their private identities from their online emotions by utilizing avatars and deepfakes driven by artificial intelligence.

9.7. DIGITALLY ILLUSTRATING THE DEAD It is now feasible to replicate people’s looks and voices using synthetic media. Although the concept of humans “resurrecting” from the dead is unsettling, it has the potential to be extremely beneficial. The Illinois Holocaust Museum uses holographic technology to bring Holocaust survivors to life for museum visitors. “Deepfakes,” in the words of the CEO of an ed-tech company, are being used to help students learn. Because of our use of deepfake technology, children will be able to see Stephen Hawking teaching physics or Shakespeare explaining his writing— this will be as transformative for education as the first chalkboard.

本书版权归Arcler所有

186

Encyclopedia of Journalism and Mass Communication

MyHeritage is a software application that allows users to animate historical images of deceased relatives and loved ones. An elderly man sees his long-dead wife “come back to life” through digital media in an emotional video, sparking a TikTok craze (Thorson et al., 2012). One of the most intriguing aspects of synthetic media is that it has the potential to greatly enhance a creator’s image, thereby increasing her financial and creative power. The internet allows creators to spread their work quickly and globally, making them more scalable. As a result, artists are under constant pressure to create new work. Ninja, the most popular Twitch streamer, nails the problem: The current creative economy is built on a never-ending hamster wheel, which is a recipe for burnout. Producers can produce their products in a more environmentally and economically sound manner by using synthetic media. Image producers can easily create images that can be used in films, podcasts, and live streams, and they are paid for each time their image is used in one of these formats. Synthetic media, in addition to enhancing real people’s creativity, has the potential to create new generations of digitally native artists.

9.7.1. The End of the Line Synthetic media will have a negative impact. This is true for all cuttingedge technological innovations. It is possible to write a lengthy essay on the ethics of synthetic media safeguards on its own. As a result of the emergence of synthetic media, new forms of creation and art will emerge. There is already a thriving ecosystem: More experimentation will result from the increased use of artificial intelligence in media. When the output of today’s creator’s increases in both volume and quality, a new breed of synthetic-native creators will emerge.

9.8. HYBRID NEWSROOMS, GENERATIONAL CHANGE, AND NEW AGENDAS Many newsrooms are unrecognizable after two years, and some are still mostly empty. Although the constant news cycle is bad for journalists’ health, they also face political attacks, social media harassment, and the

本书版权归Arcler所有

The Future of Journalism

187

isolation that comes with working from home, all of which can lead to burnout (Seamon, 2010). There have been numerous changes behind the scenes. A new generation of leaders is rising to power, each with a fresh perspective on the future and a more open mind.

Figure 9.10: A news presenter presenting the news. Source: https://www.istockphoto.com/photo/presenter-reporting-on-theevents-of-the-day-analysis-of-business-television-cable-gm1395525043– 450598766?phrase=journalism

A hybrid job will be commonplace in the future. If the virus is contained, it will mark the beginning of hybrid working, in which some employees work in the office while others work from home. To accommodate this shift, many news organizations plan to redesign their offices, upgrade their technology, and reduce the amount of desk and office space they have available. In the coming year, workers are expected to work two or three days per week and then spend the rest of their time at home. However, our investigation revealed that the full implications of a hybrid newsroom had not been fully considered. Despite the positive results so far, publishers are concerned about the loss of creativity, collaboration, and communication (3Cs).

本书版权归Arcler所有

188

Encyclopedia of Journalism and Mass Communication

Figure 9.11: A journalist trying to capture a picture. Source: https://www.istockphoto.com/photo/an-old-war-journalist-in-actiongm1183983163–333101338?phrase=photo%20journalism

The culture of the company may suffer, but it is more equitable than hybrid workplaces, where “proximity bias” may favor those who commute every day. This could be the case. Managers and employees will also require new literacy skills, better training, and clearer rules for hybrid work (Shemberger, 2020).

Figure 9.12: The press taking pictures and videos of an event. Source: https://www.istockphoto.com/photo/large-number-of-press-and-mediareporter-in-broadcasting-event-gm697448616–129172963?phrase=photo%20 journalism

本书版权归Arcler所有

The Future of Journalism

189

A new vision for workplaces as community gathering places. Because there are fewer employees in the office, publishers are repurposing their space to better serve their customers. Attempts to combine the immediacy of a live event with the online participation of a larger audience will increase. The beginning of the UK news is slow. Tortoise Media, whose business model is based on events, has worked hard over the last year to improve its hybrid events by incorporating interactive elements to keep remote audiences engaged. The Tortoise Media studio has been renovated to accommodate hybrid “Think-Ins” with large screens, multiple cameras, and enhanced sound. Working from home has many advantages, but it is not without its challenges for those who choose it. Reach, a regional publisher in the United Kingdom has organized social cook-along, online book clubs, and other activities to combat social isolation. Employees can access free counseling and the mindfulness app Headspace through the company’s wellness center. Other publishers should follow their lead in 2022 and provide managers with more training on how to support their employees.

9.9. NEW APPROACHES TO NEWS COVERAGE: GREATER DIVERSITY AND LESS CONFLICT Journalists aren’t the only ones who are under pressure. According to Reuters Institute research, many people avoid the news because it is too depressing. Climate change coverage has exacerbated these trends by focusing on them all the time. As a result of the outbreak, several newsrooms have been forced to reconsider their editorial strategy. Editors’ hierarchies are dissolving as a new generation embraces a more diverse and positive agenda as a result of remote work (Rakow, 2011). As a result of recent gender and racial reckonings, female journalists, the majority of whom were women of color, held many of the most sought-after positions.

What’s next? Diversity shift beyond the U.S. Lack of diversity and equity in journalism are well-documented and won’t be solved this year, but more publications are publicly addressing the harm this has done to public trust and audience interest. Fred Ryan, a publisher of The Washington Post, claimed they were seeking a leader who will encourage diversity and inclusion in news coverage, hiring, and advancement. Reuters Institute factsheet demonstrates uneven progress. In 12 major markets, 22% of senior editors are women, ranging from 60% in South Africa

本书版权归Arcler所有

190

Encyclopedia of Journalism and Mass Communication

to 0% in Japan. Our recent Changing Newsrooms research found that most publishers feel they are doing a reasonable job with gender diversity but need to improve elsewhere. Ethnic diversity is the top newsroom diversity target for media businesses. Outside the US, this year will focus on minority journalist recruitment and media representation. Younger readers may pay more attention to content that speaks to or supports their identity this year. Diverse editors question traditional news coverage assumptions. Many demand alternatives to combative talk shows and columnists. Swedish TV national editors must feature one positive item every night in their main program, and local teams must offer in-depth coverage. 25 According to research, solution-oriented formats appeal to younger audiences and make them feel more informed and powerful. 26 The Constructive Journalism Institute in Denmark has pioneered formats such as ‘Solved or Squeezed’ with a local TV station, where politicians from different parties are pushed to come up with solutions to a specific problem while their physical space grows progressively constricted during 20 minutes. The method will be reproduced this year after good reception from politicians and viewers. A TV station has tried placing politicians in the audience to hear from everyday people, while the Guardian has adopted a model where persons with varied beliefs dine together to discover common ground. Complex narratives like COVID-19 have generated interest in data-rich, explanatory website forms. Ros Atkins has been urged by the BBC to adopt a no-nonsense style of presentation of intricate events for digital audiences. These are fact-heavy, well-produced, and impartial. Boris Johnson’s Christmas party videos got 11 million views in a few days, much more than on TV alone (Porto, 2005). But in 2022 these fact-based forms will face a further battle from opinionated hot takes also demanding social media attention. GB News endured a horrible start and blistering first year, at different periods earning official TV ratings of zero viewers, although regularly boasting about its influence on social media. Rupert Murdoch’s Talk TV is waiting in the wings and is likely to stretch impartiality norms to the fullest in the UK. Meanwhile in the US, with mid-term elections coming and a new social network from Donald Trump on the way, the conflict of facts vs opinion will continue to play out this year in unanticipated ways.

本书版权归Arcler所有

The Future of Journalism

191

9.10. JOURNALISTS, HARASSMENT, AND THE ROLE OF SOCIAL MEDIA The awarding of the Nobel Peace Prize to two brave journalists, Maria Ressa from the Philippines and Dmitry Muratov from Russia have underlined the political and physical intimidation suffered by reporters around the world. Much of this is motivated by political division, but in certain nations, it has been further aggravated by the way that social media have been weaponized. Recent research by the International Center for Journalists highlighted the intensity of the harassment of Maria Ressa and her colleagues in the Philippines, while an accompanying poll of 900 women journalists suggested that nearly three-quarters had faced online abuse. Elsewhere anti-vax activists have also focused their wrath on journalists. In the Netherlands, multiple journalists were physically attacked under a backdrop of rising antipathy against the press. The Head of News at public broadcaster NOS, Marcel Gelauff, believes his journalists are suffering ‘polarization in society, hatred, harassment, and incessant allegations of false news.’ In the UK BBC reporter Nicholas Watt was trailed through the streets of London by a crowd of anti-lockdown activists, with footage streamed live on YouTube. In Los Angeles, spectacular rallies for trans rights and resistance to masks and vaccinations resulted in at least seven journalists being attacked throughout the summer. Publisher’s beef-up assistance: This year we’ll see publishers give additional support to journalists, including security protection for TV crews and better training. The UK’s largest regional publisher, Reach, is appointing its first online safety editor to address ‘endemic abuse and harassment of its writers head on’ and we may expect others to do the same. More broadly, the EU says it will push through a media freedom act in 2022 to safeguard independence, after a string of recent deaths of investigative journalists tied to worries about the takeover or suppression of independent media in member states like Hungary and Poland (Perko, 2012). New legislation for social media: Polarized disagreements in social media are also forcing publishers to reevaluate how journalists should interact on networks like Facebook and Twitter. After worries about reputational loss, some news firms have begun hardening their social media limitations. The BBC’s new regulations, for example, include a prohibition on ‘virtue signaling,’ with workers advised that adding emojis to social media postings would be enough to characterize as presenting a personal viewpoint on an

本书版权归Arcler所有

192

Encyclopedia of Journalism and Mass Communication

issue. Other news sites are urging journalists to avoid getting involved in time-consuming debates on Twitter. In a survey it was found most senior managers (57%) think that journalists should stay to reporting the news while using social networks like Twitter and Facebook but almost four in ten (38% ) feel that they should be able to express their ideas openly. To some extent, these ratings reflect the various histories in journalism, with public broadcasters concerned that the casual tone of social media communication is damaging trust, while newspapers with a ‘point of view’ are anxious to encourage commenters to share their thoughts openly. The social media presence of journalists is growing challenging to control. On the one hand, publishers profit from the strong personal brands of some of their correspondents; on the other, many urge news reporters to remain impartial or objective, especially on political and sensitive matters. This balance is increasingly challenging to maintain in politically and culturally heated contexts like social media.

9.11. QUALITY AND ACCESSIBILITY OF NEW COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGIES So, what specifically are we talking about when we talk about “new media”? Print, radio, and television/movies are examples of “old media,” however they only had a limited influence on our everyday lives and communities in a few unique ways. Radio and television, for example, have long been key instruments in the home’s technological armory. Most people used to go to the movies only to see them at home once VCRs and DVD technologies got accessible (Popoola, 2014). On the commute to and from work, the closest thing to mass media was reading a book or newspaper. When we look at how new media simultaneously divides and binds individuals, we’ll unearth a paradox: new media are more intimate and social than conventional modes of communication. The history of new media and how social and personal media fall under this umbrella will be explored in this portion.

本书版权归Arcler所有

The Future of Journalism

193

Figure 9.13: A phone recording a video. Source: https://www.istockphoto.com/photo/man-doing-live-video-with-phonewith-stabilizer-in-ny-gm1190671525–337618670?phrase=photo%20journalism

9.12. NEW MEDIA DEVELOPMENT The advent of digital technology has let new items exist in the manner we’re defining them to be produced. As a consequence of digital media’s reliance on and capacity to decode numerical codes, the name “digit” was coined (hence the root word digit). Binary coding, the most widely used number system, reduces data to a series of 0s and 1s. Using this coding strategy, any computer that can decode (read) binary code may interpret, store, and replay the data. It is vital to link an analog device to a digital device to read the information stored on the analog medium. Consequently, analog media is unusual from digital media in that it must be utilized with specialist decoding equipment, and this sets it apart the most.

本书版权归Arcler所有

194

Encyclopedia of Journalism and Mass Communication

Digital media, like an MP3 audio file, may be solely electrical and have no mechanical components, as opposed to analog media, which includes both. The second disparity between analog and digital media may be appreciated by looking at pre-digital music and how specific analog music genres are required to be connected to proper decoding equipment (Auger & Waters, 2020). Using archaic media technology, grooves were imprinted onto vinyl to form records, or the electromagnetic signature of ribbon or tape was modified to create cassette tapes. Each of these tangible items must be coupled to a certain device, such as a record player or a cassette deck, to decode and play the music. New media has had a big impact on how we connect and listen to music. Many people who grew up during the digital revolution are utterly unfamiliar with the concept of a tangible music collection. There is a vast assortment of devices that can play music files, from iPods to laptop computers to mobile phones.

Figure 9.14: A lady recording her podcast. Source: https://www.istockphoto.com/photo/young-woman-recording-podcastgm1355369988–429881611?phrase=photo%20journalism

Videocassette recorders, for example, are only compatible with analog media if they have been physically encoded with information (VCRs). When discussing new media, scholars and journalists utilize a vast palette of terminology. Personal media, social media, digital media, and online media are some of the different labels used in this context. New media will be the umbrella word for all of this argument. The name “new media” itself

本书版权归Arcler所有

The Future of Journalism

195

has been critiqued for portraying a false dichotomy between the old and the new. The invention of new media technologies has been going on for a long time now. In August 2012, the World Wide Web celebrated its twenty-first birthday, making the Internet more accessible to the entire people. For more than 40 years, the Internet has existed in one form or another. The swift rate of technical growth leads us to conceive of new as both present and future-oriented, in addition to helping us discern some key technological modifications from prior forms of media. What’s hot today may not be hot tomorrow. The cross-platform interoperability of new media ensures stability in the face of fast technological advancement. However, even as new means of viewing digital information are generated, analog media equipment and products are regularly rendered obsolete by developments in technology. Convergence is a need in the new media (Pavlik et al., 2020). The large majority of new media is digital, and the continuing digitalization of old media promotes their unfettered transit without the need to convert them into new formats. Media genres used to have their own defined platforms, but this has changed. An eight-track player or DVD player cannot play records or VHS tapes. If you choose to read this textbook, you may do it in print, on a computer, on an iPad, on a smartphone, or on any other mobile device that doesn’t require specialized expertise. New media, which breaks the borders between producers and consumers, permits intimate links between individuals and their media. Users of personal media have a broad range of options for how they consume media, including the power to pick and select what they consume, develop and distribute their material, and interact with the content of others. Personal media devices permit a spectrum of communications and social interactions that researchers must explore in depth if they are to have a complete grasp of them. The word “personal media” originated in the late 1970s when the personal computer was first displayed and plans were made to construct future personal (and portable) computing systems. These devices were all invented between 1980 and 1990. The rise of social media can be traced to the fact that personal media devices were not connected (Pavlik, 2013). People crafted their own media landscapes, giving them more say over the messages they were exposed to. The Walkman allowed users to listen to any cassette tapes they owned instead of the station’s programming. Originally, mix tapes were produced by capturing music from the radio or by replicating cassettes that had previously been issued. Mix tapes were the forerunners

本书版权归Arcler所有

196

Encyclopedia of Journalism and Mass Communication

of digital music playlists. Rather than seeing movies on television or in a theater, VCRs made it easier for audiences to view movies at their leisure. Personal media messages are created by individuals or small groups of amateur to professional media makers. It’s plausible for enthusiasts to design their computer apps and distribute them via CDs or early Internet connections. It is possible to generate a wide range of films with camcorders. Portable music recording and listening devices allowed users to make their mix tapes and demo cassettes. Analog technology forced users to contribute their own media creations in the form of cassettes or discs. Personal media are now innovative and social attributed to the internet and digital media. Analog personal media devices were replaced by digital ones as more and more movies, music, and images were taken. Anyone with an Internet connection may now develop and share content owing to new online platforms. On MySpace nowadays, an artist who formerly sold demo cassettes out of their car may become found.

9.13. THE INTERNET OF THINGS For a long time, people have recognized that media and mass media can bring people together. Following the killing of President John F. Kennedy and the terrorist attacks on September 11, 2001, the media heightened the country’s mourning. Online media, in particular, is well-known for its capacity to cooperate. Internet media connects individuals to large-scale media sources and allows them to communicate with them. Previously, a huge number of individuals might listen to or see the same radio or TV broadcast, newspaper article, book, or movie via a one-way communication route that connected one site to many. The Internet is an interactive network that links individual computers, smartphones, and other devices. This web of linked personal media devices, such as computers and cellphones, is what constitutes and characterizes social media (Mills et al., 2019). Since the time of the telegraph, technology has made it possible for individuals to communicate through a third party, but these connections were not as frequent as they are now. Even if we take the telegraph to be the predecessor of a “tweet,” we can see that the means of transmission and the number of people who can see the message are radically different. Michael Phelps can swiftly send a tweet to 1.2 million people, while Justin Bieber’s tweets are read by 23 million people! Social media doesn’t simply let us connect with people; it also allows us more control over the quality and number of those relationships.

本书版权归Arcler所有

The Future of Journalism

197

Web 2.0 is a new approach to harnessing the Internet’s connectedness to bring people together to work together and come up with new ideas, or employ “collective intelligence.” This is when social media achieved its full potential. This involves using the Internet to work together on projects and solve issues instead of developing and guarding your property. A lot of this was done with the support of websites and platforms like Napster, Flickr, YouTube, and Wikipedia that encouraged and made it easy for users to generate their material. User-generated content and collaboration have been a component of the World Wide Web for decades, although largely in the form of self-publishing material like user reviews, online journal entries/ diaries, and subsequently blogs, which connect the “old” web with Web 2.0. Social networking sites (SNSs) are the most crucial aspect of the new web. They enable users to construct a public or semipublic profile, build a network of ties to other individuals, and browse the profiles and networks of other people. Even though social networking sites like MySpace and Friendster have been operating for more than a decade, Facebook has overtaken them. Facebook is by far the most popular social networking service (SNS) nowadays. It has more than 955 million active users per month. [1] The number of users is predicted to surpass one billion by the end of 2012. LinkedIn and other SNSs that specialize in professional networking are like this. In any case, the option to self-publish information, likes/dislikes, status updates, profiles, and links help users construct and share their own life stories (Mowlana, 2007). Users may also follow how the tales of other individuals in their network grow. SNSs are used to maintaining strong, moderate, and weak ties with individuals, even if how often we engage with others’ stories varies on how close we are to them and other aspects of the environment. People can “broadcast” or “narrowcast” their habits and interests through social media, which makes it simpler for people in the same social network to communicate with each other. Let’s adopt a new approach to social media, putting more focus on working together and sharing than on connecting and chatting with individuals. The development of open source publishing and creative commons licensing is also a danger to copyrights and current media outlets and enterprises. Open source publication was first largely tied to software programs. The concept was that people might modify computer programs and codes that were previously available to the public and then share their better versions, sometimes called derivatives, with the community. Crowdsourcing is

本书版权归Arcler所有

198

Encyclopedia of Journalism and Mass Communication

mainly about the concept stage when individuals with diverse points of view provide ideas or information to solve a problem or develop something new. This form of open access and free collaboration stimulates participation and boosts innovation by bringing together diverse points of view. It has been considered the largest invention revolution since the Industrial Revolution. Together, open source publishing and crowdsourcing make it feasible for a community of people to enhance and create new ideas, products, and activities. Open source publishing and crowdsourcing make new media more democratic than typical media goods, which are protected by copyright and strictly watched by the firms who generate them. Existing media sources have simultaneously fought and welcomed the emergence of these new collaborative, participatory, and democratizing media. Conventional media outlets that were used to one-way communication and passive viewers now have to listen to and respond to criticism, some of which are negative and/or critical. Also, amateur and professional usergenerated material may directly compete with content from established mass media that costs a lot more to create. Viral videos are made feasible by social media, which means that a video of a cat performing a flip or a parody of advertising may reach a considerably wider audience than a network video blooper program or a real advertisement) (Moore & Shemberger, 2019). Again, the media are in a tight place. They seek to get more people interested while also managing and anticipating how people will use and react to media. In all of your employment, you will use “open source.” It will presumably be open source software because here is where most open source product development happens. Open source means that anybody may use and edit the primary elements of the product. When software is open source, anybody who wants to edit it has access to the source code, as long as they keep the open notion of product development alive by making their version, which is termed a derivative, available to be updated. When people with various degrees of knowledge, experience, and talent work together, they produce a synergy that leads to new ideas and goods for the commons. The free, open-source Mozilla Firefox web browser is used by many professionals. 3D printing is another open source innovation that might eventually be employed in both business and in people’s personal life. 3D printers can manufacture personalized prosthetic knees and hips, replacement components for electronic and mechanical systems, unique guitars and shoes, meals, and even skin for skin transplants. [2] There are currently a lot of professional and home 3D printers on the market. Before, 3D printing

本书版权归Arcler所有

The Future of Journalism

199

was exclusively utilized by a tiny group of innovators, scientists, physicians, and early adopters. The individuals who use these printers want to keep them open to everyone, so if a user creates software to print a plastic test tube holder that can be added to a regular drill to construct a centrifuge, he or she will make that design available for everyone to use and/or edit. Businesses might save money on design, production, and shipping if they printed their own bespoke or unique things.

本书版权归Arcler所有

本书版权归Arcler所有

CHAPTER

10

TRAINING PERSONNEL IN MASS MEDIA: BOTH PRINT AND ELECTRONIC MEDIA MARKETS

CONTENTS

本书版权归Arcler所有

10.1. Key Research Abilities.................................................................... 202 10.2. Effective Workplace Verbal Communication Techniques................ 202 10.3. Advise on The Best Course of Action.............................................. 203 10.4. Interview Techniques and Strategies: How to Get Ready for a Job Interview?....................................................................... 206 10.5. Fact-Checking................................................................................ 208 10.6. Ridding the World of Misunderstandings....................................... 210 10.7. Disinformation and Facebook........................................................ 214 10.8. International Fact-Checking Day.................................................... 216 10.9. Reception...................................................................................... 217 10.10. Pre-Publication Fact-Checking..................................................... 219 10.11. Checking Original Reportage....................................................... 220 10.12. Education on Fact-Checking........................................................ 221 10.13. Books on Professional Fact-Checking........................................... 221 10.14. Verbal/Written Communication................................................... 222 10.15. Tips to Improve Your Verbal Communications.............................. 226

Encyclopedia of Journalism and Mass Communication

202

10.1. KEY RESEARCH ABILITIES 10.1.1. What Verbal Communication Skills Are Required? •

• •

More than mere fluency in speaking is required for effective verbal communication. Messages are transmitted and received through spoken communication. Communication is one of the numerous soft skills that organizations strongly respect. Employers value employees who can successfully convey their skills. Employees who can absorb knowledge and use it well are more likely to succeed in their careers.

10.2. EFFECTIVE WORKPLACE VERBAL COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUES As a result of these elements, effective verbal communication at work is influenced by both interpersonal relationships and the office environment. Everyone in the workplace speaks verbally, including coworkers, managers and subordinates, employees, clients and customers, instructors and students, and presenters and their audiences (Mellado et al., 2020). Verbal communication is used in interviews, training sessions, presentations, group meetings, performance assessments, one-on-one conversations, sales pitches, and consultancy engagements.

10.2.1. Verbal Communication Skills Examples Several professional examples have been used to demonstrate excellent verbal communication techniques. It is vital for the most effective employers to not merely tell their staff what to do and then expect them to execute it. They rely on verbal communication as well as active listening to grasp the needs and viewpoints of others to resolve conflicts. They also appreciate the opportunity to recognize the achievements of individuals and groups.

本书版权归Arcler所有

Training Personnel in Mass Media: Both Print and Electronic Media Markets

203

10.3. ADVISE ON THE BEST COURSE OF ACTION

Figure 10.1: An article for doing research. Source: https://www.istockphoto.com/photo/newspaper-with-the-headlineresearch-and-development-gm474852858–64935223?phrase=media%20research

10.3.1. Assertiveness Criticism that focuses on particular behaviors that can be changed the capacity to keep control over an organization’s activities while also respecting and crediting other objectors must be addressed as an expression of concern for others via an interest in and regard for their feelings Under hardship, laying off employees, and training replacements are examples of resilience. Using statements and noises that convey understanding, such as “yeah, I see” and “for sure.” Self-disclosure is a technique of motivating others to contribute as a team member. It all comes down to the words: For the most productive teams, working on projects with tight deadlines and high-quality criteria necessitates open channels of communication. Strong verbal communication

本书版权归Arcler所有

204

Encyclopedia of Journalism and Mass Communication

is one of the most crucial team-building abilities for identifying and resolving problems as fast as feasible (Matthes, 2009). Expressing one’s ideas: Making an effort to stay cool and composed when addressing tough issues, as well as making it apparent that you want to support, are just a few examples. By questioning certain issues, inquisitive queries may be used to demonstrate comprehension. Accepting criticism without being defensive Avoid using unnecessary or potentially offensive language. You’re seeking remarks that communicate your feelings without criticizing or blaming others. Conversations on the phone with customers: If you spend a major amount of your workday engaging with clients one-on-one, especially in sales, having the “gift of gab” is advantageous. Use your language skills to facilitate consultations to establish long-term commercial partnerships. When dealing with clients, concentrate on recognizing and meeting their requirements.

Figure 10.2: A man taking notes of his research findings. Source: https://www.istockphoto.com/photo/focused-african-businessman-in-headphones-writing-notes-watching-webinar-gm1150384596– 311390293?phrase=media%20research

本书版权归Arcler所有

Training Personnel in Mass Media: Both Print and Electronic Media Markets

205

Recognizing those who want extra information’s inquiries and concerns. Open-ended questions are an excellent approach to getting people to talk. When a consumer is angry, it may be beneficial to identify and address their concerns. Persuade a person or group by presenting the benefits of a product, service, or concept and resolving nonverbal cues to confirm ambiguity, soothe hostility, and so on (Ashley, 2015) The words of the narrator: Speaking in public is a talent that may be honed with proper instruction and consistent practice. • • •

• • • • •

Before you begin speaking, outline the main topic of the presentation or conversation. To give a strong speech, you must first improve your voice. Speaking understandably, provide specific examples to explain your views, and restate your important points at the end of your speech. It is OK to speak moderately; avoid speaking too quickly or slowly. Highlighting the key concerns mentioned by previous speakers confidently yet humbly Providing evidence and facts to back up assertions altering messages for different recipients Using storytelling to capture an audience. Using comedy to keep an audience’s attention.

Verbal Communication Enhancements

本书版权归Arcler所有

•

•

Even if you are an introvert who prefers to work alone, you may improve your verbal communication skills so that you can more easily create rapport with others. Actively practice the following workplace communication skills: active listening, clarity and conciseness, confidence, empathy, friendliness, open-mindedness, offering and requesting feedback, confidence, respect, and nonverbal communication (body language, tone of voice, eye contact)

Encyclopedia of Journalism and Mass Communication

206

10.4. INTERVIEW TECHNIQUES AND STRATEGIES: HOW TO GET READY FOR A JOB INTERVIEW? •

Do your research: Before applying for a job, learn as much as you can about the company and its products and services. The Internet, a local library, and a career center near you were used for research. • Exercise: Interviewing skills may be improved by practicing in front of a mirror, talking to a friend, family member, or a professional counselor. • Be punctual and well-prepared: Bring extra copies of your résumé, references, a pen and paper, and a list of questions to go through with the interviewer. Arrive at least 10 to 15 minutes early. • Know your strengths and weaknesses, and be prepared to discuss them: Determine and prioritize your most valuable assets. Then, consider your prior work or experiences and identify a few instances where you utilized these abilities to their full capacity (Maier & Curtin, 2005). When addressing them, be prepared to describe how you overcame your flaws and converted them into benefits. At the start of an interview, a polite introduction and a firm handshake are necessary. Ethical conduct Make sure you’re dressed to the nines! It is critical to make a good first impression! Keep your responses brief and to the point. Inquire about something and maintain the conversation’s flow. Answer the interviewer’s queries with a nod and a grin. Expect the unexpected and inquire about the next step in the operation. •

Write a thank-you note and immediately request the interviewer’s business card. Examine the interview protocol, your performance, and the interview itself. When showing interest in the position, keep your thank-you message brief.

10.4.1. How to Dress for a Job Interview That Doesn’t Go Well Both men’s and women’s shoes should be carefully cleaned and polished. A two-piece suit with a long-sleeved shirt or top is ideal office clothing. Trim your fingernails to keep them nice and tidy. Men’s dark shoes, welltrimmed beards, and a simple silk tie are all acceptable office attire. Avoid wearing anything other than your wedding or college ring. Wear a suit, a low

本书版权归Arcler所有

Training Personnel in Mass Media: Both Print and Electronic Media Markets

207

heel or pump, modest hosiery that matches or complements your skin tone, a pocketbook, and as little makeup as possible. Potential employers may ask the following questions. Employers use interview questions to discover whether you are a good match for the role and whether you will succeed in it. Be prepared for a series of questions that will ask you the same subject in different ways.

10.4.2. How to Come Up with Appropriate Interview In addition to the conventional questions, devise your own depending on your study into the organization. What do you want to achieve with this position? Please let me know whether this is a new position for you (Lingwall & Kuehn, 2013). What caused the most recent employee to leave this position? What do you believe are the most significant duties of this position? 4. What kind of supervision or assistance is provided for this position? What exactly is behavioral interviewing, and how does it work? Behavioral interviewing is founded on the assumption that your past conduct is the greatest predictor of how you will respond in a similar scenario in the future. This interview approach evaluates a candidate’s likelihood of success in an organization or a specific function. Interviewers regularly use open-ended questions and phrases of this type to elicit comprehensive replies that may show desirable abilities and habits. As an example, consider the following: “regularly, how do you handle disagreements? There is a limit to the number of submissions you may make.” Alternatively, describe a situation in which individuals on your project disagreed with you. Was your demeanor suitable under the circumstances? There is no single proper answer to a behavioral inquiry. Interviewers ask you this kind of question to obtain a feel of your personality rather than focusing on your specific credentials. The great majority of firms are aware of their own corporate cultures and the types of individuals that would excel in specific job areas. They ask you behavioral questions to determine if you are a good fit. During the interview, candidates are graded using a grading system and a set of criteria. To be a successful candidate, you must be able to completely reply to any questions or comments offered. One strategy for preparing for behavioral interviews is the STAR method: What is the current situation? What exactly is the task? What is the situation? Task or circumstance? Explain a moment when you had to deal with a challenging situation or finish a difficult project. You must include a concrete example of what you have done in the past, rather than a generic review. Give the interviewer

本书版权归Arcler所有

208

Encyclopedia of Journalism and Mass Communication

as much information as you can so that they understand the nuances of the interview situation. It might be a recollection from a previous job, volunteer activity, or any other relevant circumstance that comes to mind (Lewis & Reese, 2009). Which of your pursuits? Maintain the focus of your explanations on your activities. When describing a team effort or project, avoid focusing on your team’s contributions. Tell me what you did, not what you may have done. Your efforts were successful. There was quite a hubbub. Finally, what happened was... What were your most notable achievements today? What have you learned? For each behavioral interview concern, one unique example from an event or narrative should be used. It is appropriate to use the same example to demonstrate many ideas when drawing from a restricted set of examples—follow the SPARE story guidelines. Is there anything more you’d want to say? (Situation, Problem, Action/Reaction/Experience) Don’t be hesitant to ask for clarification when you don’t understand a question. During an interview, both sides are tense. Make a determined effort to have fun. Be true to yourself. Your achievements should make you proud. Nobody cares if you are not flawless. If something didn’t go as planned, don’t be afraid to communicate it with your audience. Learn from your errors and use what you’ve learned the next time.

10.5. FACT-CHECKING

Figure 10.3: Fact checking. Source: https://www.istockphoto.com/vector/fact-or-fake-making-decisionconcept-of-thorough-fact-checking-or-easy-compare-gm1408479730– 459326678?phrase=media%20factchecking.

本书版权归Arcler所有

Training Personnel in Mass Media: Both Print and Electronic Media Markets

209

The technique aims to check factual information to promote reporting’s integrity and correctness. A third party does external fact-checking while the publisher performs internal fact-checking. Pre-delivery fact-checking looks for inconsistencies before the information is sent to fix or even eradicate them. Many post hoc fact-checking projects end up with the factchecking group producing an error report and/or an accompanying visual meter for the public to see. Post-hoc fact-checking is a specialty of several organizations, including Full Fact in the United Kingdom, FactCheck.org, and PolitiFact in the United States. As early as the early 2000s, the United States saw the formation of the first external post-hoc fact-checking groups, and the idea spread to many other countries by the end of the decade. Factchecking services continue to have the biggest market share in the United States (Lingwall, 2009). Findings from a study show that fact-checking can prevent politicians from making false or misleading statements to the public. As time goes on, corrections may become outdated or overtaken by more elite indicators that support less believable claims. Political fact-checking has been called opinion journalism on occasion. Post-hoc fact-checking was first carried out by external entities in the United States in the early 2000s. With an increase in popularity and an expansion into other countries, mainly Europe and Latin America, fact-checking became more widespread in 2010. Following Donald Trump’s victory as U.S. president in 2016, this was especially true. Despite this, the United States is still the most important market for factchecking in the world today. Consistency in fact-checking Research shows that the findings of fact-checking groups PolitiFact, FactCheck.org, and The Washington Post’s Fact Checker are essentially comparable. Despite this, “substantial discrepancies persisted between the questions asked and the answers given.” Fact-checking, they discovered, was less useful for determining which version of contested reality to adopt because of this. In a Stanford University Ph.D. student’s research, Chloe Lim showed that the vast majority of allegations fact-checkers analyze do not match. Most of the 1,178 statements examined by PolitiFact and The Washington Post’s Fact Checker were vetted by both organizations. For 49 of the 77 statements, fact-checkers agreed with each other 92% of the time, and for 22 of those assertions, they were very close. According to Lim’s conclusion, “at least in certain circumstances, politicians’ purposeful opacity may hinder the purposes of the fact-checking movement.” There are instances when it is possible to doubt the approach of fact-checking since it is just human and because some fact-checking was done with questionable motivations.

本书版权归Arcler所有

210

Encyclopedia of Journalism and Mass Communication

Figure 10.4: An interview between two people. Source: https://www.istockphoto.com/photo/reporter-interviewing-in-a-3dprinting-office-gm920357244–252918952?phrase=media%20interview

10.5.1. Effects Research has shown that post-hoc fact-checking can have a significant impact on both the speaker and the listener or reader. For example, the tendency of audiences to be completely unmoved by corrections to errors regarding the most contentious subjects, or the tendency to be more aggressive in their criticism, has been observed.

10.6. RIDDING THE WORLD OF MISUNDERSTANDINGS There was evidence of this in a 2014 research “a phenomenon known as the “backfire effect,” according to which the correction of inaccurate information may lead partisans to tighten their grip on their ideas even further (Korkonosenko, 2013).

本书版权归Arcler所有

Training Personnel in Mass Media: Both Print and Electronic Media Markets

211

Figure 10.5: A research on COVID-19. Source: https://www.istockphoto.com/photo/the-world-after-covid-19-articlegm1224333792–359953928?phrase=media%20research

Flu vaccination myths and concerns about vaccine safety can be dispelled with accurate information from the Centers for Disease Control and Prevention (CDC) website. Respondents’ vaccination intentions plummeted after the modification, even though those with low levels of anxiety did not show this effect.” A 2017 investigation was launched to verify the findings of a 2015 research, however it was unsuccessful. There was no evidence to support the “backfire effect,” according to a study conducted in 2016: The majority of individuals, regardless of their political or ideological inclinations, are interested in scientific evidence. Results from a study of Trump supporters in the 2016 election were comparable. Respondents’ misperceptions of crime decreased when they read an article about Trump’s speech that included F.B.I. statistics showing that crime had “fallen significantly and consistently over time” (though misperceptions persisted among a significant minority). There was no evidence of a backfire effect, according to a study done in 2018. Fact-checking has been shown to alter people’s belief in the veracity of political commercials, according to research. After fact-checking, Marine Le Pen’s claims during the 2017 French presidential election campaign: (i) successfully persuaded voters, (ii) lost their persuasiveness, and (iii) did not reduce voter support for Le Pen when her claims were fact-checked according to a study published in 2020 by economists from Sciences Po

本书版权归Arcler所有

Encyclopedia of Journalism and Mass Communication

212

and the Paris School of Economics. The Journal of Politics published a study in 2017 that said, “Even when facts have apparent repercussions for the reputations of political parties, people consistently update their political beliefs in the appropriate direction.” People who identify with a political party are no more biased or cautious in their learning than pure independents, depending on the underlying beliefs (Korkonosenko, 2013). When compared to a control without tags, Facebook tags “decreased their perceived accuracy, but only a little.” More than what the Yale study, it was discovered that Facebook tags had more impact than previously thought. Using the “rated fake” tag reduced the number of people who thought the title was legitimate from 29% to 19%, whereas using the “disputed” tag did the reverse. Facebook users were less inclined to share a news story marked as “disputed” in 2019, according to research. Trump supporters under the age of 26 may have experienced a “boomerang effect” in which the presence of both untagged and labeled false news made the untagged pieces look more trustworthy. In December 2017, Facebook decided to stop using the “disputed” tags because of studies that questioned their reliability. As a result, when false news reports are posted on Facebook, links to fact-checking websites will be shown. Researchers in 2017 found that correcting misinformation by limiting detailed descriptions or arguments in support of the falsehood, explaining why the misinformation is false rather than simply labeling is false, and providing readers with new, reliable information that allows them to update their knowledge of events and understand why they develop are the most effective methods. Ethan Porter and Thomas J. Wood performed an extensive study and found that it was more difficult to refute the incorrect information provided by Donald Trump using the same tactics, thus they proposed the following: Information that challenges the reader’s preconceptions is the most compelling. Contextualizing the problem and portraying it as erroneous or unproven may be more effective. It is more effective to do factchecking early on before erroneous ideas have the opportunity to spread extensively. By questioning the reader’s identity or viewpoint, which reduces its effectiveness. This effect is lessened when fact-checkers utilize “truth scales,” reject only a piece of a claim, or fact-check campaign statements, according to a meta-analysis published in 2019 on the effects of fact-checking on disinformation. Because of people’s personal biases and expertise, fact-

本书版权归Arcler所有

•

Training Personnel in Mass Media: Both Print and Electronic Media Markets

213

checking was less effective than it may have been because of this. Research published in 2019 by the Journal of Experimental Political Science found “strong evidence that individuals are prepared to accept corrections to fake news, regardless of their ideology or the content of the false reports.” According to a 2018 study, Breitbart News corrections were more likely to persuade Republicans to recant their false claims about voter fraud. Researchers observed in 2020 and 2021 that fact-checking had a longterm effect on reducing misunderstandings. Researchers in 2022 concluded that the COVID-19 fact-checks’ permanent influence was negligible. Discussions on politics [change] Fact-checking may deter politicians from distributing incorrect information, according to a 2015 trial. According to the findings of the study, political discourse might benefit from bringing to light the risks and costs of spreading misleading information to political leaders’ reputations (Kalatzi et al., 2018). If they are shown to have made dubious assertions, scientists received an avalanche of letters warning them of the ramifications for their reputation and the security of their employment. Fact-checking tends to diminish inaccuracies when they pose a substantial threat since politicians who got these letters were considerably less likely to obtain a low fact-checking score or have their accuracy questioned in public. Personal preferences in terms of politics. Voters are more inclined to vote for politicians who are confirmed to be truthful by fact-checking, according to an experimental research study. It was found that fact-checking Trump’s exaggerations during the 2016 presidential campaign diminished their belief in the exaggerations but had no effect on their view of him. It was shown that fact-checking a politician’s utterances has less of an impact on their popularity than “summary fact-checking,” in which the fact-checker notes the number of erroneous assertions a politician has made. Fact-checking in the middle of a conversation. For example, readers can compare two news stories to verify their information. The modern student’s networked environment encourages skepticism and challenges orthodoxy, according to him. There are favorable consequences on the development of values, according to him. Using technology, it is possible to automate the process of fact-checking. When technology can be integrated into the classroom, students will see how seamlessly their virtual and physical worlds come together. Instead of two circles orbiting each other suspiciously and shakily, there is a sense of cohesion. According to Queen’s University research, those who do fact-

本书版权归Arcler所有

214

Encyclopedia of Journalism and Mass Communication

check on news stories they read may mistakenly think a fake news item to be legitimate since it is created with the intention of misleading readers. A conscientious internet news consumer is likely to draw truth from erroneous premises constantly. Even still, Rose believes that fact-checking should be part of the curriculum in schools to help battle misinformation (Heider et al., 2005). Discerning bogus stories. Fake News is the main topic of this article. Internet-based media outlets are particularly vulnerable to spreading false information, as seen by their role in the 2016 presidential election. False news articles may come from satirical news sites or websites with a financial incentive to promote misinformation, such as for clickbait or other objectives. It may be difficult to recognize these publications since they frequently try to spread misleading or biased information. Many elements, including but not limited to the email’s content and its social media activity, must be taken into account when evaluating the source of information. This is especially true when it comes to the vocabulary employed in false news, which tends to be more controversial than in genuine articles. In addition, linguistic strategies for assessing the authenticity of a news course include n-gram encodings and a bag of words. In addition, research has shown that visual clues can help categorize an object. In particular, some characteristics may be created to assess the veracity of an image and provide us with more context for the tale. Certain aspects of the social environment, in addition to news-sharing methods, may be significant. There are websites like “Snopes” that attempt to manually discover this information, while other colleges are building mathematical models to do so automatically. Fact-checking websites may be included in the list of websites. Grouping of important fact-checking sites. Some persons and groups post their fact-checking results publicly for everyone to see. Snopes.com debunks urban legends, for example, or the Reporters’ Lab at Duke University provides resources for journalists.

10.7. DISINFORMATION AND FACEBOOK There are substantial worries about the transmission of inaccurate information in this business because of the widespread use of social media. Social media sites like Facebook, Twitter, and Instagram, where false news can spread quickly and easily, are driving the creation of new disciplines of research into how to detect it. On social media, however, it may be difficult to spot bogus news, making outdated data mining and detection systems worthless (Holbert & Grill, 2015).

本书版权归Arcler所有

Training Personnel in Mass Media: Both Print and Electronic Media Markets

215

Psychological and sociological ideas related to false news are now being studied by researchers, and existing data mining techniques are being adapted for use on social media networks [49]. More and more academic studies have come out calling for the profession to keep looking for ways of automatically removing false information from social media timelines.

Figure 10.6: A person being interviewed in a news room. Source: https://www.istockphoto.com/photo/journalists-sitting-with-businesswoman-gm1059228126–283113409?phrase=media%20interviewing%20techniques

Donald Trump is well-known for his support of incorrect information. Since the 2016 presidential election, President Trump and the mainstream media have paid close attention to the spread of false information. There has been a lot of research done to understand, detect, and prevent the spread of fake news. Researchers have begun looking at the role that misinformation had in the 2016 presidential election. Fake news in support of Trump targeted conservatives and supporters in 2016, according to one research. Facebook, for example, was shown to be an excellent tool for distributing misleading information to specific populations to elicit an emotional response from them. Stanford, New York, and the National Bureau of Economic Research provided statistics showing that Facebook and Twitter users were more likely to engage with incorrect news in 2016. Fake news has recently been detected and identified using machine learning and artificial intelligence. CSAIL researchers at the Massachusetts Institute of Technology (MIT) have created and tested a machine learning system that can detect fake news by looking for patterns, phrases, and symbols that are commonly used in fake news (Hanitzsch, 2004). Opensource data collection of historical news sources with veracity scores was also made accessible to encourage other academics to study and develop new ways and technologies for spotting false news.

本书版权归Arcler所有

216

Encyclopedia of Journalism and Mass Communication

Figure 10.7: A man doing research. Source: https://www.istockphoto.com/photo/man-doing-market-researchgm949350864–259154567?phrase=media%20research

10.8. INTERNATIONAL FACT-CHECKING DAY The London School of Economics hosted a symposium for journalists and fact-checkers in June 2014 to officially launch International Fact-Checking Day. The holiday, which was declared by law in 2016, began on April 2 of this year. The rise of online misinformation efforts, mostly on social media platforms, spurred the establishment of International Fact-Checking Day. As a result of the 2016 presidential election, media attention to fake news and the accusations that go along with it has grown. Because of this, the holiday falls on the second Monday in April. April Fool’s Day is on April 1, but Fact Day falls on April 2. International Fact-Checking Day is a day dedicated to educating the public and schools about the dangers of spreading misinformation via the use of fact-checking resources and publications Ali et al., 2014) (Banda, 2007) (Berezhnaia, 2018) (Brandon, 2002) (Biswas & Sipes, 2020) (Blankenship & Gibson, 2016) (Bronstein & Fitzpatrick, 2015) (Bowe et al., 2020) (Carpenter, 2008) (Claussen, 2007) (Cohen, 2001) (Curtin et al., 2018) (Detenber et al., 2012) (Deuze, 2002) (Domingo et al., 2008) (Duffield, 2011) (Esser & Umbricht, 2014) (Fuerst et al., 2015) (Fleming, 2014) (George, 2011) (Gillmor, 2016) (Grömping, 2019) (Gotlieb et al., 2017) (Guo et al., 2016). (Grimes, 2009).

本书版权归Arcler所有

Training Personnel in Mass Media: Both Print and Electronic Media Markets

217

According to COVID-19, the 2020 International Day of Fact-Checking will focus on improving the capacity to recognize the information.

Figure 10.8: Researchers conducting a research. Source: https://www.istockphoto.com/photo/college-students-using-computers-on-media-studies-course-gm510617595–46949034?phrase=media%20 research

10.9. RECEPTION It has been argued that fact-checking in the context of politics is an opinion piece. In the past, fact-checking organizations have been accused of prejudice or of being unable to use absolute terms like “true” or “false” when dealing with disputed assertions. Less than a third of eligible American voters support media fact-checking of campaign remarks, according to a Rasmussen Reports study conducted in September 2016. 62% of those polled believe that the media distorts the facts to further the political agendas of the journalists who cover them. The research found that those who consume erroneous news, particularly Trump supporters, had a worse perception of fact-checking as a result of this study. More than half of Americans who visited a fake news website throughout the study period saw a fact-check from one of the professional fact-checking websites.

本书版权归Arcler所有

218

Encyclopedia of Journalism and Mass Communication

Fake fact-checking websites have also been used by Russia and Turkey to promote misinformation.

Figure 10.9: A media personnel interviewing a member of a rescue team. Source: https://www.istockphoto.com/photo/reporter-interviewing-a-male-firefighter-gm1289331468–385038336?phrase=media%20interviewing%20techniques

Facebook has stated that it will “remove false or discredited comments on the new coronavirus that started a worldwide epidemic,” according to the International Fact-Checking Network. A statement published in the journal Science by eighteen experts stating that “theories of accidental release from a lab and zoonotic spillover remain conceivable” prompted Facebook to reconsider its restriction on content that suggested that the COVID-19 illness originated in Chinese labs in 2021. To start, a laboratory leak may be labeled as “false information,” according to a report in the New York Post. Sixty-seven. This re-ignited the debate over scientific (Guo et al., 2016).. “The problematic nature of these assessments is partly owing to how social media platforms understand the hazy concepts of misinformation and disinformation,” This choice is supported by scientific consensus. Doing so, according to some scientists, is problematic because it creates the false impression that science is a monolith. “Scientists spend the entire day disputing and disagreeing on some very basic topics,” Winton Professor of the Public Understanding of Risk at Cambridge University says. Scientific results are either true or wrong according to Clarke, and this dichotomy has led to the epidemic’s divide.

本书版权归Arcler所有

Training Personnel in Mass Media: Both Print and Electronic Media Markets

219

10.10. PRE-PUBLICATION FACT-CHECKING

Figure 10.10: A lady writing down her research findings. Source: https://www.istockphoto.com/photo/female-journalist-atpress-conference-writing-notes-holding-microphone-gm831659632– 135277491?phrase=media%20research

The benefit of merely printing the proof is that it saves time and money by avoiding the need for further printing steps. Inaccuracies that cause harm to persons or companies can lead to legal action, but even minor mistakes can harm a publication’s reputation. Journalists are more motivated by the risk of harming their reputations. Fact-checkers examine the accuracy of names, dates, and material in a book or essay. Even if the individual whose opinions will be featured in a planned news piece is not contacted directly, they may query about how to spell their name, for example, or inquire about the veracity of the quotation. Fact-checkers, on the other hand, do not always deter individuals who seek to commit journalistic dishonesty.

10.10.1. As a Career It used to be uncommon for publications like newspapers, periodicals, and books to employ the services of fact-checkers. The publication of Time magazine in the United States in the early 1920s is credited with starting this tendency. Others are aspiring authors, trainee editors, or freelancers working

本书版权归Arcler所有

220

Encyclopedia of Journalism and Mass Communication

on various projects. It’s possible that women made up the majority of factcheckers in the media until the 1970s, as was the case with the country’s first professional fact-checker in the United States. Fact-checkers are utilized in a variety of ways by different publications. Fact-checking is a major focus for several groups. Compared to The New Yorker’s 16 fact-checkers in 2003, had 70 fact-checkers in 2017. Another option is to engage freelancers on an as-needed basis or integrate factchecking with other work. Fact-checkers are more typically employed by magazines than by newspapers. The fact-checking for television and radio broadcasts are commonly delegated to non-professionals, especially senior members of the crew, instead of being handled by paid fact-checkers.

10.11. CHECKING ORIGINAL REPORTAGE

Figure 10.11: Microphones for doing interviews. Source: https://www.istockphoto.com/photo/news-conference-gm622278110– 108926007?phrase=media%20research

In the journalism business, Stephen Glass began his career as a factchecker. Fact-checkers at The New Republic (and other weekly publications) accepted fake stories as journalism with little fuss. It was Michael Kelly who altered portions of Glass’ imaginary works, not fact-checkers, who said, “I’m to blame,” not fact-checkers. “The foundation of any fact-checking

本书版权归Arcler所有

Training Personnel in Mass Media: Both Print and Electronic Media Markets

221

system is trust consensus (Gotlieb et al., 2017). If a reporter is prepared to fabricate notes, the integrity of the system is in jeopardy. Editing, not factchecking, is the ultimate stage in the screening process.”

10.12. EDUCATION ON FACT-CHECKING Several organizations have pledged to establish reading standards to help people check the material they consume in response to the rise of fake news on the internet. Students at colleges and universities around the country have access to resources and procedures for verifying the reliability of their sources. Students receive guidance from their academic institutions on how to do in-depth academic research using credible sources for their assignments. The websites FactCheck.org, OntheMedia.org, and PolitiFact. com, to name a few, provide guidelines for fact-checking sources. The Sorting Truth From Fiction: Civic Online Reasoning MOOC will be released by MIT and Stanford in the fall of 2020. Educators who want to introduce their students to the basics of fact-checking would benefit greatly from taking this course.

10.13. BOOKS ON PROFESSIONAL FACT-CHECKING

Figure 10.12: A man communicating through writing. Source: https://www.istockphoto.com/photo/e-learning-from-homegm1220111612–357133750?phrase=written%20communication%20skills

本书版权归Arcler所有

222

Encyclopedia of Journalism and Mass Communication

For the New York Times, Sarah Harrison Smith worked as a fact-checker for several years. Among her many publications is The Fact Checker’s Bible, which she authored on her own. An inside look at a disagreement between a fact-checker over an article that pushed the boundaries of what constituted “artistic license” in a non-fiction book is presented in The Lifespan Of A Fact. He worked for The Believer and McSweeney’s for many years as a fact-checker. When you think about editing, what is the first thing that comes to mind? Grammar or spelling problems may be considered the editor’s primary responsibility. A lot of time and work goes into editing. A piece of writing must be edited to improve its content, structure, language, and presentation. To make your thoughts as obvious as possible to the reader, editing is a necessary step (Grömping, 2019). Proofreading’s primary goal is to ensure that your text’s finer details are accurate. A final pass through the editing process is recommended, although it may be done at any point. You’ll discover how to structure an editing process that begins with general concerns, then moves to proofread.

10.14. VERBAL/WRITTEN COMMUNICATION The ability to successfully communicate orally, in writing, and nonverbally (to inform, instruct, and persuade) are all part of effective verbal and written communication.

10.14.1. What Can You Do to Improve Your Verbal Communication Skills? Effective verbal communication requires more than just speech fluency. Verbal communication is used in both sending and receiving messages. Communication is one of several soft talents that are highly valued by businesses (Gillmor, 2016). When it comes to hiring, employers prize employees who can successfully communicate ideas and information with their coworkers. Employees that can absorb information and apply it are more likely to succeed in the workplace.

本书版权归Arcler所有

Training Personnel in Mass Media: Both Print and Electronic Media Markets

223

10.14.2. Techniques for Verbal Interaction in the Workplace

Figure 10.13: A lady communicating verbally to other people. Source: https://www.istockphoto.com/photo/ambitious-african-blackfemale-employee-speaking-at-diverse-meeting-gm1090216744– 292468596?phrase=verbal%20communication%20skills

What defines successful verbal communication in the workplace depends on the relationship between communication partners and the context in which they operate (George, 2011). Employees, supervisors, and subordinates all engage in verbal communication, as do customers and other stakeholders, as well as educators and students. There is a wide range of situations in which verbal communication is necessary, including job interviews, training sessions, and presentations, as well as meetings with colleagues and supervisors.

10.14.3. Examples of Verbal Communication Skills Here are some examples of effective workplace verbal communication skills employed in different workplace contexts.

本书版权归Arcler所有

Encyclopedia of Journalism and Mass Communication

224

10.14.3.1. Verbal Communications for Supervisors The best bosses don’t just give orders and then expect their employees to follow through. For conflict resolution, they rely on verbal communication, as well as active listening to understand the needs and perspectives of others. They are also open to celebrating the accomplishments of both individuals and groups. •

• • • • • • • •

•

advise people on the best course of action to take and speak up when necessary positive feedback that focuses on specific actions that can be changed. when discussing disciplinary actions against employees, be kind and honest; affirming the worth of others; identifying and dealing with problems; ability to empathize with other people’s feelings and express care for them; maintaining composure in stressful situations; firing of employees; instructing others on how to carry out a task; understanding may be demonstrated by making pleasant noises and expressions, such as “uh-huh,” “got it,” “I get it,” “I can see,” and “yeah;” promoting sharing through the use of self-disclosure.

10.14.3.2. Verbal Communications for Team Members Open and constant lines of communication are vital to team success, particularly when completing quality- and deadline-critical projects. One of the most important team-building skills, strong verbal communications help to ensure that issues will be spotted and resolved in the formative stages, averting costly escalation (Fleming, 2014).

本书版权归Arcler所有

• • • • • •

Conveying messages concisely Encouraging reluctant group members to share input Explaining a difficult situation without getting angry Explaining that you need assistance Paraphrasing to show understanding Posing probing questions to elicit more detail about specific issues

Training Personnel in Mass Media: Both Print and Electronic Media Markets

• • • •

225

Receiving criticism without defensiveness Refraining from speaking too often or interrupting others Requesting feedback Stating your needs, wants, or feelings without criticizing or blaming

Figure 10.14: Verbal communication between two individuals. Source: https://www.istockphoto.com/photo/they-share-a-great-working-relationship-gm612387410–105468669?phrase=verbal%20communication%20 skills

10.14.3.3. Verbal Communications with Clients If a large part of your work involves one-on-one communications with customers, it’s helpful to have a “gift of gab” – particularly if you are a sales professional (Fuerst et al., 2015). Keep in mind, though, that your conversations need to be focused on identifying and addressing your clients’ needs; using your verbal talents to encourage consultative dialogs will ensure positive client relations.

本书版权归Arcler所有

• •

anticipating the concerns of others; asking for clarification;

Encyclopedia of Journalism and Mass Communication

226

• • • •

asking open-ended questions to stimulate dialog; calming and agitated customers by recognizing and responding to their complaints; emphasizing the benefits of a product, service, or proposal to persuade an individual or group; noticing non-verbal cues and responding verbally to verify confusion, defuse anger, etc.

10.14.3.4. Verbal Communications for Presenters Public speaking is a talent that is honed both through practice and formal training. Speaking articulately and persuasively to a live audience involves: • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

enunciating each word you speak clearly; introducing the focus of a topic at the beginning of a presentation or interaction; planning communications before delivery; projecting your voice to fill the room; providing concrete examples to illustrate points; restating important points towards the end of a talk; selecting language appropriate to the audience; speaking at a moderate pace, not too fast or too slowly; speaking confidently but with modesty; summarizing key points made by other speakers; supporting statements with facts and evidence; tailoring messages to different audiences; telling stories to capture an audience; using humor to engage an audience.

10.15. TIPS TO IMPROVE YOUR VERBAL COMMUNICATIONS The ability to create rapport with others may be improved even if you are an introvert who enjoys working alone. These job-related communication skills must be actively practiced to be mastered: For good communication, you need to be able to listen attentively and empathize with the other person’s

本书版权归Arcler所有

Training Personnel in Mass Media: Both Print and Electronic Media Markets

227

point of view. You also need to be able to express yourself clearly and concisely (Esser & Umbricht, 2014).

Figure 10.15: A man being interviewed. Source: https://www.istockphoto.com/photo/public-relations-pr-media-interview-press-conference-gm944137528–257921856?phrase=media%20research

10.15.1. Restarting the Engine During the initial few minutes, a lot of engagement is needed. An attractive look, voice tone, and mannerisms are just a few of the factors that make up a person’s initial impression, which may have an enormous influence on the quality of future relationships. The impression you make in the initial discussion has a lasting impact on your later interactions. When you meet someone for the first time, it’s easy to form conclusions about them based on their words. This may affect your capacity to express yourself verbally. People with a foreign accent can understand you better if you utilize terminology that is easier to understand. Depending on what they are saying, you may need to pay greater attention to their words (Duffield, 2011). It’s conceivable that you’ll alter your mind after that. The better you get to know someone, the more vital it becomes to keep your ideas and opinions “up to date.”

本书版权归Arcler所有

本书版权归Arcler所有

CHAPTER

11

MONITORING AND CONDUCTING RESEARCH IN COMMUNICATION, MEDIA, AND INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY CONTENTS

本书版权归Arcler所有

11.1. The Assessment of Alternate Sources.............................................. 231 11.2. Pre-Press Production...................................................................... 233 11.3. Study of Public Discourse.............................................................. 234 11.4. Media Effects on Social Issues........................................................ 234 11.5. The Role of the Media In Research Uptake..................................... 235 11.6. Using the Media for Research Communications............................. 236 11.7. Media/Internet-Based Tools and Services for Creating, Sharing and Exchanging Information and Ideas Relevant for Research Uptake.......................................................................................... 238 11.8. Importance of Engagement............................................................ 239 11.9. Media Being Used as a Method for Improving Study Acceptance or Leading to the Adoption of a Scientific Theory/Idea In Relevance to Research Uptake............................... 241 11.10. Implications For Resourcing Successful Research Communication............................................................................ 241 11.11. Key Components Required For Successful Communication.......... 242 11.12. The Types of Communication Required/Needed for a Successful Research Study..................................................... 243 11.3. Engagement with the Private Sector............................................... 247 11.4. Information Monitoring and Evaluation Tools................................. 249

230

Encyclopedia of Journalism and Mass Communication

This is a process that involves collecting and analyzing information relevant to a specific project, institution or organization within and beyond journalism. Media and information technology specialists are expected to conduct research on the latest technology trends and products, as well as keep current with media-related industry developments, such as the rapid changes in digital technologies. In addition, media and information technology specialists need to be able to utilize the latest software programs and hardware systems in order to perform research tasks accurately and efficiently (Domingo et al., 2008). Monitoring and conducting research in communication, media and information technology is an exciting career for someone who wants to create a career working in the field of communications media and information technology.

Figure 11.1: Media research is integral in communication. Source: Image by Market Research Services Limited

Media research is an integral part of communication. Media can be defined as the electronic mass media, including the Internet, radio and television or newspapers. Media plays both a positive and a negative role in society. There are positive effects of media on society like social change and dissemination of information. But there exists negative effects of media

本书版权归Arcler所有

Monitoring and Conducting Research in Communication, Media, and Information...

231

like speeding up information overload, let alone identity crisis. The scope of conducting research in journalism and media as a whole is outlined with reference to the defining characteristics of journalism research. Research is conducted by journalists, media scientists, instructors and students who are involved in the production of content that is screened or censored by governments or organizations that use censorship laws as a means of privacy protection. Technological advances make it possible for newsgathering organizations to collect more data about their audiences than ever before. In Public Relations, we are encouraged to conduct research in communication and media. This involves analyzing the methods and impacts of communication, as well as studying how people respond to information. In Journalism and Media, we study the similar (and related) topics of news reporting and other forms of written or visual media (Deuze, 2002). The research in communication, media and information technology involves the development of technologies that support the dissemination of information, create and communicate information, distribute it efficiently and provide easy access to it. The scope of monitoring and conducting research in this field may include;

11.1. THE ASSESSMENT OF ALTERNATE SOURCES In the 21st century, the impact of a “false balance” between media sources has been debated. With more outlets of information available than ever before, it is essential for researchers to investigate where one source ends and “alternate” sources begin. Using a method known as alternate sourcing, which allows for the comparison of multiple disparate reports on the same topic, professionals in the field can rank and assess media of various types. The purpose of the assessment at alternate sources is to find out current trends and changes in the use of media in different parts of the world. This way, it becomes possible to develop plans and policies that can be implemented in various regions or countries. As an example, if a country has a history of censorship, the media there will be limited and controlled before agreeing to any reforms or opening up to the new ideas or information they offer.

本书版权归Arcler所有

232

Encyclopedia of Journalism and Mass Communication

Figure 11.2: Assessment of different media sources. Source: Image by LibGuides at Youngstown State University

11.1.1. Qualitative Research Design Qualitative research design is a method of conducting and monitoring media research. It involves the use of in-depth interviews, focus groups, documents and other sources that allow you to explore the meaning of a message. Qualitative research aims for depth rather than breadth and recognizes the importance of context when it comes to interpreting findings (Detenber et al., 2012). This means that you are using the qualitative research design of getting research participants to tell their stories about what they believe about an issue, rather than using quantitative methods to simply measure how many people think about or support a certain topic.

11.1.3. Media Literacy Teaching Media Literacy is an important stepping stone to media understanding and also to deeper critical consideration of media messages. It helps provide an

本书版权归Arcler所有

Monitoring and Conducting Research in Communication, Media, and Information...

233

understanding of the historical, social and political context of media and its importance in contemporary society. It will introduce the researcher to theoretical approaches to media literacy teaching and examine several case studies that illustrate methods of bringing these methods into practice.

Figure 11.3: Media literacy teaching. Source: Image by The Council of Europe

11.2. PRE-PRESS PRODUCTION Pre-press production is a method of conducting and monitoring media research, which involves the production and production control of the publication. This method allows researchers to cover the entire process from concept to publication. It entails the combination of research and the creation that results in a final piece. This type of production is most commonly used to conduct research and analyze media outcomes, especially

本书版权归Arcler所有

234

Encyclopedia of Journalism and Mass Communication

in communication, media and information technology. Any form of research conducted in media and information technology requires the ability to track down relevant data and perform extensive evaluation of that data. It is important for researchers to have access to the necessary tools and training to handle this task.

11.3. STUDY OF PUBLIC DISCOURSE Media and communication has a major role in our society. We use media to inform us, learn more about other people, and it can even make or break events in the news. Monitoring public discourse as a way of conducting research allows students to have input into the design and delivery of their own knowledge. This course will introduce you to the different methods used by researchers to monitor public discourse on media and information technology issues (Curtin et al., 2018). Public discourse is the study of responses to public issues through a process of questioning, public explanations and media coverage. The term ‘public discourse’ covers the ways in which people use words and images to communicate with one another around an issue or event. Researching public discourse involves analyzing the language used by subjects in published texts, visual material or spoken word. Basic research questions focus on what factors influence people in their opinions or actions.

11.4. MEDIA EFFECTS ON SOCIAL ISSUES For many years, media effects on social issues have been one of the most studied aspects in communication research. In order to discuss the effects of media and communication, media studies are conducted. Various methods are used, such as surveys, content analysis and interviews, which are then combined in order to gain a better understanding of media effects on social issues. Media affects society in a wide range of ways. In the past, media has been blamed for creating social problems, but it is also suggested that media can help to solve these problems through providing information and allowing citizens to express themselves (Cohen, 2001). Media can also be used to monitor general attitudes towards issues and how they are reported in the media. This type of research involves looking at the overall pattern of interest shown towards various issues across multiple sources.

本书版权归Arcler所有

Monitoring and Conducting Research in Communication, Media, and Information...

235

Figure 11.4: Media effects on social issues. Source: Publi

11.5. THE ROLE OF THE MEDIA IN RESEARCH UPTAKE It is crucial path for researchers to access and make use of information about society and its environment. The media cover issues that are relevant for everyday life and are often used for learning about these issues in education. By using information from the media, researchers can analyze ways in which people think about their environment and adopt new behaviors or views. Media can be used as a method for improving study acceptance or lead to adoption of a scientific theory or idea. Research has found that the media often presents methods in ways that are very different from how they were presented by professionals.

Figure 11.5: Media is important in research uptake. Source: Image by UNICEF Innocenti

本书版权归Arcler所有

236

Encyclopedia of Journalism and Mass Communication

Media is a powerful tool for disseminating knowledge. Media can help researchers conduct inquiries and collect data, especially in the field of communication, media and information technology. The role of the media in research uptake is to fulfill the needs of their audience. They thus decide what information is relevant to their audience and also what format it is presented in. this role has further been extensively researched by scholars in Communication and Media studies. They have offered a number of theories that relate to this process with respect to the research methodologies adopted by scholars across different disciplines and utilize varied forms such as social, political, cultural and commercial (Claussen, 2007). The use of this medium in research evaluation, monitoring and conducting research has become more widespread in recent years. This is due to its ability to provide a snapshot of an event or phenomenon in time and space that may not be possible using traditional methods. Research using media can help lead scientists to the right answer more quickly than if they had to rely on other means for data collection like census surveys or laboratory experiments. The role of the media in research uptake is to inform, educate and persuade. Informing provides information about a subject, which is useful for decision making. Educating increases knowledge and understanding. Persuasion influences attitudes and behaviors that can lead to action.

11.6. USING THE MEDIA FOR RESEARCH COMMUNICATIONS Using the media for research communications is an important aspect of the scientific process. It can increase the number of people who hear about your research and motivate them to participate in it. Research communications from scientific research is a special kind of information that is often shared with the general public. It is essential that these messages are created with a space to make an impact and be heard by the wider target audience. This is achieved through various means, these include television, radio, magazines, newspapers and online social media as well as other forms of communication channels. One of the most common mistakes individuals make is not hearing about the media and how it relates to the research uptake. While it isn’t necessary to become a journalist, describing your research in a way that makes it ‘sticky’ with potential subjects will help to raise awareness. Once you’ve done this, it will be easier for others to understand why you are doing what you do.

本书版权归Arcler所有

Monitoring and Conducting Research in Communication, Media, and Information...

237

Figure 11.6: Media use in research communications. Source: Image by SlideShare

Research-specific media are important to communicate research findings, not only because they can amplify the general publics’ understanding of science but also because they provide many opportunities for researchers to interact with their audiences. The public also has a role to play in helping researchers both discover new things about their diseases and make them more aware about outcomes of these studies. The media participation can be useful in marketing research uptake through its impact on people (Carpenter, 2008). Through social media and mass media, research scientists can make people more aware of their research topic and what it does. Not only that, but by using the media for research communications, researchers also have a voice to express their opinions about the process of doing research and what needs to be done so that the benefits from this are more clearly understood by the public. The role of the media in research uptake is not just to report on research and tell others what research has achieved, but also to promote it by putting it in context and explaining how it will impact upon us all. Research communications can only be successful if you have very clear and precise objective. In order to do this, you need to understand what kind of qualification your audience has. The media are an excellent tool for building a connection with an audience who share similar interests as you in your research topic. In the 21st century, research has been democratized as information is openly available to everyone from anywhere. However, there are few websites and services that enable researchers to share their findings easily with the public. Research uptake has been increasing in recent years due to the increasing availability of research outputs and data.

本书版权归Arcler所有

238

Encyclopedia of Journalism and Mass Communication

11.7. MEDIA/INTERNET-BASED TOOLS AND SERVICES FOR CREATING, SHARING AND EXCHANGING INFORMATION AND IDEAS RELEVANT FOR RESEARCH UPTAKE

Figure 11.7: Internet-based tools for research and communications. Source: Image by WordPress.com

The role of the media in research uptake is to present and disseminate the results of research to a wide range of stakeholders. This can be done via various means such as press releases, blogs or other web based tools and services. Besides the traditional media (newspapers, radio and television), there are many other online and internet-based resources that can be easily used to research uptake. More specifically, search engines such as Google, Yahoo!, Bing and others can provide a lot of information about products or services related to health and wellness. Other tools for consuming Internet-based news are blogs and podcasts where you can find interesting content about research. Finally, websites such as Wikipedia have advanced guidelines on when, where and why to cite sources from several academic journals in order to improve your article or dissertation (Bowe et al., 2020). The media environment influences consumers’ attitudes and perceptions, thus influencing decisions about the products or services they purchase or use. Media producers influence consumer decisions by shaping how they create and disseminate information. This includes creating stories that reflect an advertiser’s needs or highlighting the benefits of products and services. Media has a major role in the development of research uptake. Media is information and entertainment that people consume through various

本书版权归Arcler所有

Monitoring and Conducting Research in Communication, Media, and Information...

239

electronic devices. The media itself is a tool that can be used in research uptake because it allows users to exchange information, ideas, and opinions on issues relevant for their fields.

11.8. IMPORTANCE OF ENGAGEMENT Engagement is one of the most important factors affecting research uptake. It can be used as a tool for identifying new health care problems, and for explaining medical information to consumers. Research uptake is an important factor in research and development, as it is only through the media that research findings are disseminated. The media plays an important role in promoting awareness of a project, its progress and future planning. In order for research uptake to happen there must be a centralized web presence and well-managed social media sites such as Facebook, Twitter and LinkedIn. There needs to be effective communication with researchers (including academics) working in different fields related to the field of interest so that they can help promote research uptake.

Figure 11.8: Engagement in media. Source: Image by ZenSuggest

It is vital that the population has the ability to engage with the research and see the benefits of it. Media engagement is an essential form of dissemination in research. Publicity and promotion drives media attention, which can trigger awareness, interest and demand. Research results are read

本书版权归Arcler所有

240

Encyclopedia of Journalism and Mass Communication

or viewed by journalists who then write articles and broadcast programs that advertise their findings. The role of media in research uptake is evident in traditional methods such as press releases, keynotes and press conferences, as well as more modern forms such as blogs, videos and social media posts. Research uptake is generally measured through the number of research articles that are published in the target field. As a result, a growing body of research has been devoted to understanding its determinants, and a number of important factors have been investigated such as journal impact factor and its role in uptake (Bronstein & Fitzpatrick, 2015). The extent specifically on which mass media can influence people and make them aware of new products, brands or services in the society. This is another area where marketers could focus on developing integrated marketing strategies allowing them to identify and address this market segment.

Figure 11.9: Research uptake needs engagement of social media. Source: Image by CiteSeerx

It is essential that research uptake policy makers and practitioners engage with the media to ensure that the messages they want to get out can be effectively conveyed. The communication of research results and policies to the public has been likened to a war between “culture and technology.” The challenge that faces researchers when communicating their findings and policy recommendations through the media will be different for many, including for those at institutions where traditional methods of disseminating scientific results are not widely used (e.g., government organizations).

本书版权归Arcler所有

Monitoring and Conducting Research in Communication, Media, and Information...

241

11.9. MEDIA BEING USED AS A METHOD FOR IMPROVING STUDY ACCEPTANCE OR LEADING TO THE ADOPTION OF A SCIENTIFIC THEORY/ IDEA IN RELEVANCE TO RESEARCH UPTAKE Research uptake is the adoption of a scientific theory, process or product by those who should be using it. S. Bernhard (1995) argued that the media can be used as a method to improve study acceptance or lead to the adoption of a scientific theory/idea in relevance to research uptake, based on examples such as better communication between public and science, and education of consumers, through the production of more informative texts. The media can also be responsible for conveying information about the importance of research, which makes it more accessible to researchers. Media, such as TV and print media, are used to promote or to raise awareness about a targeted scientific hypothesis/research object. This can be achieved by the use of visuals such as graphics and text but also sound (like an interview) and even images. The media can be used for informing the public of what is happening in research studies. They may also accompany these studies with interviews from scientists explaining the current state of knowledge on a subject. The media can also be used to encourage scientists and experts to explain their research to the public, which could then result in better understanding and acceptance towards a particular study.

11.10. IMPLICATIONS FOR RESOURCING SUCCESSFUL RESEARCH COMMUNICATION With the increase in scientific research and its increasing importance, researchers are required to present their results using various forms of communication. Researches need to be more professional in their writing which could make a difference to the effectiveness of research communication. This can be achieved by implementing specific processes for writing, editing, publishing and disseminating of a research article or report.

本书版权归Arcler所有

242

Encyclopedia of Journalism and Mass Communication

Figure 11.10: Research requires successful communications. Source: Image by Dinas Perhubungan Provinsi NTB

11.11. KEY COMPONENTS REQUIRED FOR SUCCESSFUL COMMUNICATION Successful communication in media and journalism research is dependent on the development of key components. These include familiarity with a researcher’s methods, understanding of the purpose of the study and its practical application, the ability to appropriately convey findings in diverse media, and an awareness of ethical considerations. Communication in research is a key component for successful research communication, especially in media and journalism research. However, it is not always clear how to do that or what kind of audience can be reached with these activities. While Media and Journalism Researchers can be found in academic, corporate environments as well as educational institutions, they require familiarity with various communication formats and platforms (Blankenship & Gibson, 2016). Research communication also involves a wide range of activities, including: preparing a research document, conducting interviews and collecting primary data, analyzing the results of the study and reporting your findings. Theories of research communication have provided a solid framework to help define research writing styles and their uses. While this framework has been useful, it has not helped researchers develop effective ways of communicating their results through effective media and journalism research. As long as there is no clear understanding of how those

本书版权归Arcler所有

Monitoring and Conducting Research in Communication, Media, and Information...

243

factors should be integrated into the project, there will always be room for problematics. For accurate implementation, there are six key components that attract the eyes of most media houses and journalists. For successful research communication, there are six key components: (i) a research topic with a clear purpose; (ii) a strong audience through the effective emerging of the project; (iii) effective and targeted outreach efforts that include information summits and events for the target audience; (iv) an informative research report including the methodology and results; (v) the ability to build partnerships with other organizations and researchers; and (vi) an expert editor who is able to make sense of comprehensive data and facts. These components would require integration of effective strategies and techniques. These include managing the timing of your research findings and the media response, analysis of audience perceptions and engagement with media coverage and use of appropriate techniques to communicate with each audience. Successful research communication can be achieved by combining these strategies with a marketing management strategy that is focused on increasing awareness amongst stakeholders and enhancing stakeholder satisfaction. The press and other media play an important role in communicating information about research. Research communication requires effective planning, which requires strong intuition and analytical abilities. It also requires creative writing skills and knowledge of the most appropriate wording to convey research findings in a clear and concise manner with appropriate visuals (both color and black & white).

11.12. THE TYPES OF COMMUNICATION REQUIRED/NEEDED FOR A SUCCESSFUL RESEARCH STUDY Research communication is essential for a successful research study. Research leads need to understand the benefits, limitations and possible implications of conducting such a study. Communication will also play an important role in how the research community perceives the work that has been done. Communication is also characterized by different types of messages – some are formal whilst others are informal; some are informative while others tell you why your work should be accepted or rejected; some communicate feelings and emotions, which can lead to biases and misinterpretations; it

本书版权归Arcler所有

244

Encyclopedia of Journalism and Mass Communication

may be direct, indirect or interpersonal – either between members of one group or between many groups. There are three main types of communication that are required: the presentation of findings, their interpretation and the presentation of methodologies used in conducting a study (Biswas & Sipes, 2020).

11.12.1. Presentation of Findings Researchers must make themselves and their work visible to the general public if they are to be able to engage in a conversation with theoretical, empirical and methodological issues, key terms, and a sense of what is new in their field. The presentation of their findings as writing or verbal presentations assists in informing other researchers about issues that arise from their research. The presentation of findings as publications (with or without illustrations), websites, reports and similar are good means for others to get information about the results of your research. The means by which one can communicate findings is important in a successful research study. This begins with the structure of the final report, which must be clear and concise. The presentation of statistics will also communicate important information to readers but it should be presented in a consistent format to ensure that readers have enough information to understand it clearly. If our presentations, whether in writing or oral, are clear, coherent and accurate we can expect our audience to seek out further information about the topic and be willing to discuss it further. The degree to which communication is achieved will dictate how successful the study itself is. This may result in higher levels of acceptance by participants and more favorable responses from opinion leaders.

11.12.2. Interpretation of Findings Research results must be interpreted by the audience in order for them to understand and use the information effectively. Information as interpretation of findings has different implications and strengths. The most important implication is to simplify the message because users will not be able to determine if they understand the message that was being communicated by the author. An example of this that came to my mind is when we use words in a sentence, so much more time can be wasted due to misunderstanding based on the way we use words incorrectly (Brandon, 2002). Another implication is that users can learn the truth behind the study’s results by reading between

本书版权归Arcler所有

Monitoring and Conducting Research in Communication, Media, and Information...

245

the lines (if there is any), or possibly getting another opinion about what it means in relation to other studies that are similar but have different messages that may be more appropriate for their needs.

Figure 11.11: Interpreting research findings. Source: Image by SlideShare

Communication is not directly implied as a resourcing factor, but often the first step taken by professionals to promote their research. In order to increase your chances of receiving funding and government or corporate grants, or pursuing employment alongside your research, you should ensure that all stakeholders (potential funders, your supervisor, other scientists and reviewers) can easily understand your results. Therefore, this means successfully communicating those results through written reports or oral presentations is essential.

11.12.3. Presentation of Methodologies Methods are no longer viewed, as they were in the 1990s, simply as technical details of a study. Today, methods have become an integral part of the research report, and a method that communicates effectively will lead to more successful and meaningful findings from the reader. Effective methods will allow you to explain your research process clearly and concisely; knowing what has been done helps others understand so much more about your work than just a table of data. The research communication methodology is the method by which a researcher can present and present their results to potential readers (Berezhnaia, 2018). This method is integral to producing success for investigators who conduct studies. While some methods resemble traditional research writing, others may be more experimental in nature or involve the use of case studies.

本书版权归Arcler所有

246

Encyclopedia of Journalism and Mass Communication

Research output is not easily communicated to a wide audience, which requires more than just putting the results in a paper. Methods are used to facilitate communication and peer review, as well as aid in making sure the findings are valid, reproducible and reliable.

Figure 11.12: Presentation of methodologies. Source: Image by saylordotorg.io

The types of communication required by a researcher can be as different as their research topic. For example, a study on a specific subject may require more technical details in terms of the methods and analysis rather than an explanation of how an idea came about. The best way to ensure successful communication is to plan ahead. Successful research communication has a number of challenges, including: the research design and methods; quality assurance; dissemination; and social challenges to the success of specific communications. The research communication field has changed since the 1990s, when it was dominated by training and development in organizational and project management. Now research is more complex, with more channels and formats, complicated data analytics and new areas of content delivery. No wonder that in the future there will be a need for a different approach to resource successful research communication endeavors in the journalism sector (Banda, 2007). These challenges are not just in the process itself, but also in finding suitable topics and in writing a clear and interesting article. Another important part is to market the article/research with all its elements to potential readers.

本书版权归Arcler所有

Monitoring and Conducting Research in Communication, Media, and Information...

247

11.13. ENGAGEMENT WITH THE PRIVATE SECTOR The media today plays a number of roles, but these roles in the private sector vary depending on their type and size. The media can act as a news source, advertisement medium or service provider, providing a mix of these services to the public. However, they cannot do all these activities at once. Media engagement with the private sector has been affected by many factors like economic development, political and legal changes and technological advancements. In the current ecosystem, the public sector is increasingly in competition with the private sector for what we call “public good” goods and services. This can include such things as information, knowledge production, dissemination and access, education and training, infrastructure/infrastructure maintenance and improvements and security (i.e., crime prevention), for example.

Figure 11.13: Engagement with private sector in media. Source: Image by Sustaining Technical and Analytic Resources

The media today is a highly dynamic and increasingly sophisticated technology. Its impact on private sector engagement with the public, coupled with its penchant for creating new channels to make their voices heard, has been significant. Major media companies have become business partners in global supply chains; they are involved in mineral exploration and extraction projects; they are producers of agribusinesses and livestock farms with vested interests in rural communities; they operate as employers of hundreds of thousands who create news and help provide employment opportunities for others (Wanta et al., 2004).

本书版权归Arcler所有

248

Encyclopedia of Journalism and Mass Communication

In the public sector, the private sector is seen as something that works for a solution for reaching goals and objectives. The private sector is an independent actor, as it does not need to get approval from its counterpart in the public sector for its actions. This independence makes it easier for companies to quickly react to changes in market conditions and competitive pressures. When engaging with the private sector, government leaders are well aware of this fact and understand the importance of agency relationships on their own enterprise. Media are often regarded as the ‘fourth estate.’ While governments and public institutions are responsible for setting the overall public agenda, media influence how citizens understand and engage with issues that affect them. And in many developing countries, media outlets have played a critical role in promoting accountability and transparency. The media and its engagement with the private sector affects the process of conducting research for several reasons. First, it can influence the results of your research by providing information about certain companies or companies in general. Second, it can influence your study based on your attention to certain subjects or topics. Third, it can manipulate the outcome of your study by understanding the way you conduct research or write articles. Through its reporting and opinion pieces, the use of social networking sites, blogs and other online platforms, there is an increased possibility that this information will reach a wider audience than those who could otherwise attend an event for the same issue. The private sector can also be affected by interest groups across various platforms such as Twitter and Facebook who may be part of specific groups that are directly related to their business practices e.g. energy companies offering support regarding emissions reduction targets or diesel car manufacturers promoting alternative fuels (Wilkinson et al., 2020). This increased exposure can encourage debate within public policy making bodies on issues like climate change which could help refine proposals for new policies or changes to existing legislation. The role of the private sector in research is complex and evolving. Journalists, researchers and industry specialists can influence this change by adopting new tools and approaches that allow them to keep up with media developments. To the extent that media choice plays a role in private sector decision making, clear distinctions can be made between the roles of government and the firm in shaping industry standards. In this context,

本书版权归Arcler所有

Monitoring and Conducting Research in Communication, Media, and Information...

249

it is important to remember that it is not just the presence of a regulator but its influence over private sector behavior that determines organizational responses to regulation. Because public policy has an impact on firms directly and through a variety of channels (e.g., power and prestige), it can be useful to examine how these factors shape regulatory responses. Media engagement with the private sector has encouraged researchers to focus more on their research. In addition, media coverage has helped to broaden the reach of research teams in Nigeria and other African countries.

11.14. INFORMATION MONITORING AND EVALUATION TOOLS Information monitoring and evaluation tools (IMET) in journalism and media research can identify, measure and evaluate the quality of journalism and media information with the help of statistical results. IMETs have been useful for journalists who produce or edit news reports, who consult for newspapers, journals, or magazines about journalistic issues such as ethics or accuracy, who monitor performance indicators (used internally, externally or internally/externally) and use IMETs to improve their practice. Information monitoring and evaluation tools in journalism and media research, such as the Trust Project, help journalists and data scientists to find out about how their work is being used. The project’s methods are based on the experiences of over 50 journalists around the world who have been using its open source platform to store, search and analyze information about the uses of their work (Vlad, 2021). Monitoring and evaluating journalism projects remains a difficult task. It is important to remember that reporting is not just the gathering of facts or information, it is also an art form. Ideally, journalists are able to combine both reporting and interpretation in whatever medium they use (print, television, internet). Formal tools use a combination of computer software, coding systems and linguistic analysis to collect and analyze data on both qualitative (such as products/services provided) and quantitative (such as timeliness of responses) outcomes. These data then feed back into ongoing decisionmaking processes. These tools focus on gathering information about various aspects of a given area or story, evaluating the quality and quantity of that information, and communicating it back to readers with an explanation of how it was gathered.

本书版权归Arcler所有

250

Encyclopedia of Journalism and Mass Communication

Information monitoring and evaluation tools include software, hardware, policies and procedures, surveys and questionnaires, focus groups, polls and casual conversations. They allow information analysts to collect the data that they need for the purpose of analysis and decision-making. In order to make an accurate measurement of a situation or event’s impact on an organization they can identify key indicators that may affect its performance such as customer satisfaction, sales volume levels and conversion rates. By collecting data, an analyst can create reports that show trends in these areas. These technical guidelines are used when making decisions about how resources should be allocated based on various aspects of business operations.

11.4.1. Software and Hardware Information monitoring and evaluation is the process of gathering information to support a decision, estimate performance, or understand what happens in an organization. This can include using software programs as well as hardware devices (Udomisor & Udoh, 2015). Many new software programs have been created to make use of devices that monitor data such as cameras and thermometers in order to help businesses analyze their sales and marketing strategies.”

11.4.2. Policies and Procedures The choice of policies and procedures as information monitoring and evaluation tools used in media research are always driven by the researcher’s objectives. The data, analyzed through qualitative and quantitative methods, will identify information monitoring and evaluation tools as they relate to insights gained from media analysis.

11.4.3. Surveys and Questionnaires Surveys and questionnaires are an information monitoring and evaluation tool used in media research. Surveys, or primary data sources, can be any aspect of a research study—content analysis, focus groups, or individual interviews. Survey instruments are generally structured with response options tailored to fit a specific purpose (e.g., analyzing attitudes toward the news). Questionnaires are multi-part (multiple choice) forms designed to collect specific demographics and attitudes about a particular topic. Questionnaire responses can then be aggregated for demographic comparisons.

本书版权归Arcler所有

Monitoring and Conducting Research in Communication, Media, and Information...

251

Surveys collect information from a large number of respondents and provide an opportunity to analyze the data within a short timeframe. Questionnaires work like surveys, but they have their own advantages such as instant feedback and shorter response times. Both types can be used alone or combined to create effective information gathering efforts. The two can be used to gather information about the general population of news consumers, such as age, gender, employment status and other demographics. They can also provide information on news media behavior and coverage, including how much people watch or read an outlet in a given category.

11.4.4. Focus Groups Focus groups are information monitoring and evaluation tools used in media research. Focus groups are well suited to qualitative research because they allow you to test hypotheses in a controlled setting, allowing you more confidence in your results than in surveys or experiments. They allow you to get direct input from your target audience and collect data to inform decisions about future policies, practices, or programs. Focus groups should be taken seriously and considered a valuable source of information rather than a disposable item (Thorson et al., 2012). Focus groups have become an important research tool in social science. Focus group are conducted to collect data on perceptions, attitudes and opinions of the consumers or members of target audience towards a specific product or service. Focus group meetings allow researchers to ask questions directly and in depth to a group of people that they know well. The researcher can measure their responses and generate more accurate results compared to relying just on surveys or exit polls.

本书版权归Arcler所有

本书版权归Arcler所有

CHAPTER

12

UPDATING MEDIA PERSONNEL ON CURRENT TRENDS IN TECHNOLOGICAL DEVELOPMENT

CONTENTS

本书版权归Arcler所有

12.1. Introduction................................................................................... 254 12.2. Streaming Video at any Moment.................................................... 254 12.3. Live Broadcast............................................................................... 255 12.4. Advertisement................................................................................ 256 12.5. Reading Social Media News Sites Via Rss Feed Aggregators........... 258 12.6. Subscription/Download of Podcasts............................................... 261 12.7. Youtube Channel Subscriptions...................................................... 262 12.8. Social Media Influencers (SMI) and Gurus..................................... 265

254

Encyclopedia of Journalism and Mass Communication

12.1. INTRODUCTION The media business was among the first to face digital upheavals and effectively handle them. However, the growing pains have only just begun. Organizations must continuously tame the beast that is being fed by digital change (Seamon, 2010). New distribution strategies: Due to the advent of social media, broad internet access, and the proliferation of smartphones and tablets, the needs and expectations of media consumers have evolved. New digital goods and services have been established as a result.

12.2. STREAMING VIDEO AT ANY MOMENT The worldwide video on demand (vod) market is predicted to increase at a CAGR of 8.3% between 2016 and 2021. Subscription-based video-ondemand services like Netflix, Hulu, and Disney+ allow customers access to subscription-based packages, which appear to be the most popular among users. Renting video through services like Google Play Movies or Amazon Instant Video is an alternative for clients who wish to watch or download it on the device of their choosing. Through tier-based distribution schemes such as Hotstar, the material is made available in two tiers: free and premium. All industry actors conform to the notion of consumer convenience. The growth of mobile streaming is a significant industrial trend. The number of millennials who use mobile devices is expanding, and media businesses are keen to capitalize on this rich new market.

Figure 12.1: Young female influencer. Source: https://media.istockphoto.com/photos/smiling-young-african-femaleinfluencer-doing-a-vlog-post-at-home-picture-id1313649311?k=20&m=131 3649311&s=612x612&w=0&h=jrsMPLZge_WSfsUgPO1O-FxMki8em0HK2Y7v1ldf_lU=

本书版权归Arcler所有

Updating Media Personnel on Current Trends in Technological Development

255

12.3. LIVE BROADCAST More sectors are embracing live streaming to engage with their customers since it is an engaging means of content distribution. Frequently, companies go live on social media and other platforms to advertise their products, communicate with viewers, and answer inquiries. This method is useful for developing brand loyalty. Consequently, live streaming has become a vital component of several marketing methods. Due to the rapid advancement of encoding standards, media businesses may now transmit high-quality material while requiring less bandwidth (Auger & Waters, 2020). Smart media: a scenario of mutual advantage. Before the advent of intelligent media, houses were provided with free installation of people meters, which were used to determine the number of viewers of a certain show at a given time using trp (target rating points/television rating points). This measurement only supplied a small piece of the picture. VOd and streaming services have bypassed this difficulty by generating enormous volumes of analytics data from each user’s watching experience. By developing material tailored to each viewer’s identity, they may give a more personalized experience. Everything, from the user interface that welcomes users when they login to the commercials that play on their smart devices, has been painstakingly positioned to optimize engagement. Contextual media Today’s marketers know the relevance of context. This has prepared the way for a gold rush in contextual media, in which adverts are picked and displayed depending on the context of what a person is seeing. The distinctive selling proposition of contextual media is its seamless integration with the page’s esthetics and content. Contextual media not only stimulates user participation but also interferes as little as possible with the watching experience.

Figure 12.2: Man using laptop.

Source: https://media.istockphoto.com/photos/close-up-on-man-handusing-tab-pad-on-laptop-to-working-about-of-picture-id1169192820?k= 20&m=1169192820&s=612x612&w=0&h=ca2vnXidL-3B3581s0_ETK3J4I9BnWdyiUhe5SMT9K8=

本书版权归Arcler所有

Encyclopedia of Journalism and Mass Communication

256

•

Video savviness: A significant number of objects, places, and activities are automatically detected in both recorded and streaming video owing to accurate video analysis offered by AI technologies like Google’s Video Intelligence API. The power of this technology to detect and extract information at the video, shot, or frame level enables artists to quickly index and organize their video archives. Consequently, media administration is easier for end users.

12.4. ADVERTISEMENT Even though algorithms are a well-guarded secret, it is general knowledge that there is a sophisticated mechanism behind a user registering into a service to discover the right content. Interspersed among these recommendations are cleverly placed advertising. It is known that pre-roll, in-stream, and post-roll advertising improve distributor income. Video adverts may be put into both live streaming and on-demand video owing to server-side technology such as dynamic ad insertion (Shemberger, 2020). A contemporary video ad server’s in-depth analytics enable marketers to provide personalized advertising to various viewers within the same stream. This is a win-win situation for all concerned parties, and it enables real-time campaign optimization. Consumer participation in new media. Customers have grown selectively ignorant of conventional techniques of advertisement distribution. In an era of shrinking attention spans, widespread ad blocker usage, and a plethora of content outlets, media organizations must be imaginative to engage their audience. For the intended audience to interact with an advertisement, it must be both interesting and related to their interests. Augmented reality (ar) and virtual reality (VR) are transforming consumer involvement in seismic ways. Although these technologies have existed for some time, they are nevertheless viewed as innovative. AR and VR have the potential to replace textual sales copy as communication methods. For instance, bands increasingly use virtual reality to live broadcast their content, allowing fans who cannot attend the event in person to still participate in the experience. Companies are keen to employ this cutting-edge technology as a result of this new marketing technique. In contrast to graphics and advertising, engagement with consumers (ar) helps you to develop an emotional connection with them. The media of today rarely resembles that of the last ten, five, or even two years, and it is continually developing as new platforms, applications, updates, and techniques for modifying material are

本书版权归Arcler所有

Updating Media Personnel on Current Trends in Technological Development

257

offered. The days of everyone reading the newspaper and watching the 5 o’clock news is passed. Every new social media network presents a different approach to providing real-time content. The most popular platform was Periscope, followed by Snapchat and Facebook Live. Both live YouTube streaming and Instagram Live Stories are rising in popularity. Customers may monitor what is occurring in any part of the globe at any time, and their desire for this access is expanding. Take a look at the most recent hurricanes. Snapchat footage of the storms caught by passersby was shared by NBC News and other top news websites (Rakow, 2011). As a result of the convergence of video, social media, and live broadcasts, media consumption, and production have developed and grown more complicated (made possible by smartphones). Facebook Watch is one of the newest video alternatives accessible to consumers. Facebook’s “watch” area contains hundreds of video programs, including the popular people of New York blog, behind-the-scenes footage from the NFL, and other unique comedy and reality shows. Soon, all users will be able to post their videos to this platform part.

Figure 12.3: Boy making vlog. Source: https://media.istockphoto.com/photos/boy-making-vlog-picture-id1173 822709?k=20&m=1173822709&s=612x612&w=0&h=GQvw_8DWT9umklu E67Pz6crUo6WYHxKGwtGa9DMHDX0=

This new service does more than merely supply additional material to a market that is already crowded. Mark Zuckerberg, CEO of Facebook, believes it is feasible to reimagine numerous activities, including video viewing,

本书版权归Arcler所有

258

Encyclopedia of Journalism and Mass Communication

through the perspective of community development. There is no obligation for passivity while watching television. To build a sense of community, you may talk and meet new people during an episode, and you can subsequently join groups with other fans of the same series. According to tubular insights, millennials seldom without their cellphones, and 92% of them use other gadgets to access the web while watching television. Previously, audiences liked participating in live Twitter interactions with television celebrities. Facebook and other social media platforms now provide new methods to connect in real-time with television and other media (Porto, 2005). With the arrival of this new interactive medium, there is no going back. However, it is not necessarily a terrible thing. Consider how technology has extended our perspectives and helped us to learn about the world in ways that would not have been possible without it. News is circulating faster. Even in the most distant corners of the world, cellphones and tablets can receive television programs. Even if two people are not from the same nation, a similar hobby might bring them together. As it has over the previous decade, technology will continue to revolutionize how information is distributed and consumed, for better or for worse.

12.5. READING SOCIAL MEDIA NEWS SITES VIA RSS FEED AGGREGATORS RSS, or extremely simple syndication, is a means for delivering new content from frequently updated websites to your subscribers. The former labels for it were RDF site summary and rich site summary. A subscriber’s RSS reader or aggregator gets a set of instructions from a website’s computer server through an RSS feed, which they can then follow. An RSS feed allows a user to keep up to date on any new information posted on a website. The aggregator reads feeds from several sources, organizes them in one area, and then repeats the process to present consumers with new material. There is now a single location where all of the user’s information may be accessed at any time. Although full-featured RSS reading software is available, many web browsers already have basic RSS aggregators. Personal web portals that may be viewed from any computer can consume RSS feeds. Specialized aggregator websites offer a similar function. RSS is a basic standard with

本书版权归Arcler所有

Updating Media Personnel on Current Trends in Technological Development

259

feeds stated in the web authoring language XML that can be easily integrated into any size website. RSS feeds are supported by the great majority of blogging systems. This isn’t always the case, especially if your site was built from the ground up for you. There are certain aims and purposes for each website. If you have timely content and wish to reach a broader audience, you may try posting it via RSS feeds. The following are some of the reasons behind this: It’s simple to accomplish. It is simply not just for you, but also for the end user. In this day and age, less is more. When we want anything, we expect it to be delivered right away. This type of material may be shown on your website thanks to RSS feeds. A reader no longer has to go to your website to see whether you’ve added a new snow machine to your inventory. They may acquire further information by opening their e-reader, finding your notification, and visiting your website. Automating your content distribution plan will make it more efficient. When you make changes to your website, you have no way of knowing if your visitors or customers would notice (Perko, 2012). You won’t have to send an email every time you make a change to your service. This solution alleviates material concerns and allows your subscribers to access the content at any time. Furthermore, no emails have been prohibited in the past. Increase the number of people who can view your material. RSS is becoming increasingly popular. This strategy allows subscribers and your content to communicate directly. Many individuals are hesitant about disclosing their email addresses because of spam. People are less likely to subscribe if a feed provides them with the daily information they require. You will not be blacklisted since you will always be aware of when your message has been sent. Using RSS, you may stay in contact with current readers while also attracting new ones. It’s also a passive method of keeping in contact with your audience. This project may make use of recycled materials. Simply adding more pieces is insufficient. To keep your news stream updated, you may recycle pertinent content from previous articles, newsletters, or product evaluations.

本书版权归Arcler所有

•

Encyclopedia of Journalism and Mass Communication

260

Figure 12.4: Social media apps logotypes. Source: https://media.istockphoto.com/photos/social-media-apps-logotypesprinted-on-a-cubes-picture-id1173494845?k=20&m=1173494845&s=612x61 2&w=0&h=vc9ddoooWl6FxfgqBfzymWyRp0doGGoorhCFVaUbQI4=

本书版权归Arcler所有

•

Ensure that your content is widely distributed: An RSS feed, similar to a nationally syndicated radio show, makes it simple to reach a much bigger audience. The more people you talk to, the more probable it is that you will sell your products. Syndicating your RSS feed increases the number of people that can view it, resulting in additional traffic to your website. You’ll be able to reach a larger audience, disseminate your content more efficiently, and boost awareness of your company by using an RSS feed. Syndication can also take place in the other direction. You can utilize their stuff on your website without their consent if you operate a local business that sells national brand products and provides RSS feeds. RSS, at its core, streamlines the process of accessing and utilizing publicly available content on the Internet. Many websites’ source code has an RSS component (Popoola, 2014). RSS is used by news sites such as De Tijd and the economist to make their content available via email, social networking, and other means of digital communication. Even though RSS is mostly used in the news and media industries, it might assist

Updating Media Personnel on Current Trends in Technological Development

261

other businesses. We took action after seeing that many of our customers were not using RSS. RSS and Willow may save you a significant amount of time when it comes to populating your social network and establishing an intriguing content mix that makes you stand out.

12.6. SUBSCRIPTION/DOWNLOAD OF PODCASTS One podcasting news source, pod news, was the first to notice Apple Podcasts’ change from “subscribe” to “follow.” Even though it appears to be only semantic, it represents a tremendous advancement. According to Edison Research, a market research agency, one-fourth of non-podcast listeners assume that “subscribing” to podcasts costs money. As Tom Webster, senior vice president of research at Edison Research has stated, the term “subscription” is to blame. The fact that more than half of those questioned associate the term “subscribe” with a paid subscription raises serious warning flags. How many people would have listened to podcasts if they were available for free? Apple has long maintained a commanding lead in the podcasting sector due to the popularity of iTunes and the Apple Podcasts app. Spotify’s arrival into the podcasting sector, on the other hand, has boosted competition. Several well-known podcasters, like Joe Rogers, have collaborated with the company to generate material that is only available on Spotify. Surprisingly, the option in the Spotify app that automatically adds your favorite podcasts to your playlist is referred to as “following.” In addition to its premium paid music subscription service, Spotify has previously proposed a paid podcast membership program. According to pod news, Stitcher, Amazon Audio, and Audible, among others, utilize “follow” instead of “subscribe.” Following Apple’s formal transition to “follow,” it looks that only YouTube and Google Podcasts will retain the “subscription” option. Is it feasible that Google will modify these platforms in the future? It’s difficult to believe that, even though the term “subscribe” has almost become synonymous with YouTube (try reading this without hearing your favorite YouTube creator ask you to subscribe to their channel), the company offers so many different paid subscriptions—YouTube premium, YouTube TV, YouTube Music, and paid memberships for specific YouTube channels—that at least some users aren’t confused (Pavlik et al., 2020).

本书版权归Arcler所有

Encyclopedia of Journalism and Mass Communication

262

Figure 12.5: Social networking. Source: https://media.istockphoto.com/photos/working-that-social-networking-picture-id1155621260?k=20&m=1155621260&s=612x612&w=0&h=Hf Y_5CT3BN-FdcSM_In4B5hjCxyaF3BrKjP4_1ueuXY=

12.7. YOUTUBE CHANNEL SUBSCRIPTIONS You may subscribe to channels that you enjoy to receive more content from them. A subscribe button can be seen on a channel’s page or beneath each YouTube video. Any new videos produced by a channel will appear in your subscription feed when you subscribe. You may also start receiving notifications when a channel you subscribe to uploads new content. By default, we will just email you the channel highlights. 1. Create a YouTube channel. Go to m.youtube.com or use the YouTube app. 2. Set up a YouTube account. 3. While on the home tab, do the following:

本书版权归Arcler所有

• •

Tap the channel icon beside the video you want to watch; Tap subscribe. To subscribe to a channel while watching a video, follow these steps: – Tap the “Subscribe” icon beneath the video. Following the subscription of a channel, the screen will provide a list of suggested channels. These suggestions are based on channels to which you have not yet subscribed.

Updating Media Personnel on Current Trends in Technological Development

263

Figure 12.6: Global stats. Source: https://media.istockphoto.com/photos/global-stats-close-up-picture-id 1333204226?k=20&m=1333204226&s=612x612&w=0&h=YufgzrRhtk6f39T 96H5DiJEW_P59ipOXs9ZtvTv0nBw=

You may always check out a channel’s archives before subscribing. When will you start getting updates? We will automatically send you updates on the top stories from the channels you have subscribed to. By adjusting your notification settings, you may be notified anytime the channel publishes new content. Please keep in mind that if you unsubscribe from a channel and then resubscribe, your notification preferences will be reset. You will not get warnings if the audience of a channel is set to children. Furthermore, alerts will no longer be received through the notification bell. It is not possible to change this setting (Pavlik, 2013). You may receive instant notifications whenever new content is published to a YouTube channel or user by subscribing to that channel or user. You may also look at the user’s activities, such as “favorite” videos, ratings, and comments. Every user’s name on YouTube has a “subscribe” button next to it. Subscriptions may be managed at youtube.com/my subscriptions. Select a user to follow. Subscribe buttons will appear next to all user and channel names if you are signed in to YouTube with your Google account. Click the icon to subscribe to a user. After that, a confirmation box will appear. If you want to get email alerts of new activity in addition to viewing it in the subscription center, check the box labeled “also email me for each new upload.” You have subscribed to this user’s channel, according to a notification sent to him. You may access your subscriptions through the subscription center. Click the drop-down menu to the right of your username

本书版权归Arcler所有

264

Encyclopedia of Journalism and Mass Communication

in the upper-right corner of the screen to access it. On YouTube’s main webpage, youtube.com, in addition to “all activity” and “recommendations,” “Subscriptions” is an option. The subscriptions area allows you to review new content from your subscribed channels, manage which content comes from which people, and change your email alert settings. On the left, you will find a list of users to whom you have subscribed. Users that have subscribed to your content: If another YouTube user subscribes to your user account channel, he will be able to view the videos, ratings, and comments that you make public. They cannot view any of your private videos on your account. To change which of your content and activity is public, and therefore which information your subscribers can see, go to the “settings” option in the drop-down menu that shows beneath your user name in the top right-hand corner of every YouTube page. To change which activities, appear in your user account’s feed, select “activity sharing.” Everyone who has subscribed to your YouTube channel can see this stream. Removing a user’s subscription, you can cancel your subscription if you no longer want to receive video alerts and other updates from a YouTube user or channel. To access the subscription center, navigate to youtube.com/ my subscriptions and choose the appropriate user account from the list on the left-hand side of the page. Unsubscribe by clicking the “change subscription” link next to the user’s name, then confirm by clicking “update.” You will be routed to the main subscriptions center page after removing the selected user account from the list of things on the left. YouTube Unsubscribe Instructions You may have previously subscribed to a user’s YouTube channel if you enjoy their videos (Mills et al., 2019). When you subscribe to a YouTube user, you will see his most recent video uploads and favorite videos on your home page. If you get weary of the user’s video uploads and favorite clips, you may unsubscribe from their channel fast. The user’s YouTube activity is then removed from your homepage.

本书版权归Arcler所有

Updating Media Personnel on Current Trends in Technological Development

265

Figure 12.7: Lady fashion designer. Source: https://media.istockphoto.com/photos/young-asia-lady-fashion-designer-using-mobile-phone-receiving-order-picture-id1320976219?k=20&m =1320976219&s=612x612&w=0&h=xQEXHDI-R3YQlT-C-5CkcRsgjBJZdYCFINqtMqoOiA=

12.8. SOCIAL MEDIA INFLUENCERS (SMI) AND GURUS Social media influencers not only promote cultural acceptance and diversity but also share sensitive details about their personal lives, which serves to widen the attractiveness of the beauty business to a larger audience. These so-called “beauty gurus” engage with cosmetics businesses to increase the visibility of their products among social media users. While research on social media influencers has been conducted, it is unclear how influencers connect with young millennials when it comes to the selection and usage of cosmetics. The capacity of an influencer to persuade young millennials was significantly dependent on their education, attractiveness, and relatability, among other factors (Mowlana, 2007). Social media influencer marketing has been heralded as a cutting-edge strategy for increasing brand exposure and interacting with a big audience. Because of the expansion of e-commerce,

本书版权归Arcler所有

266

Encyclopedia of Journalism and Mass Communication

online marketplaces may someday supersede traditional retail malls as the most important commercial zones. Businesses now have a broader selection of possibilities for promoting their products on social media, thanks to the advent of digital media and technology. Furthermore, influencer marketing may be a low-cost marketing strategy that allows for direct contact with a specific target. The use of social media influencers for marketing has grown in popularity in recent years, which is excellent news for both firms and influencers. As e-commerce rises in popularity, so does the number of online influencers that promote their customers’ products and services as brand ambassadors. Businesses may now communicate with their customers on an organic level thanks to social media marketing. Celebrity endorsements are still used in social networking marketing efforts as a tried-and-true marketing strategy. Athletes, supermodels, actresses, and other professionals have identified these people. Product endorsers, on the other hand, have gained in popularity as social media has evolved. Vloggers and other “infamous” people who have created a big following by actively uploading their content on areas such as beauty, fitness, cuisine, and fashion are examples of “micro-celebrities.” They are commonly referred to as “influencers.” These social media influencers promote the products of the firms they work with using their profiles on Facebook, Instagram, Snapchat, Twitter, and YouTube. Because of their excellent depiction of themselves as social media gurus, they have become well-known on social media. You must “consider yourself a public persona to be consumed by others, utilize strategic intimacy to attract followers, and regard your audience as fans” if you want to become a “micro-celebrity.” According to Senft, “a new kind of online performance in which individuals “amplify” their reputation over the Internet using technologies like video, blogs, and social networking sites.” Micro-celebrities, as compared to mainstream celebrities, have a more “genuine” public presence and a more engaged fan base. The fact that Smis have a large social media following and are well-known experts and opinion leaders on certain subjects adds credibility to their dependability. To put it another way, their actions have a significant impact on the decisions of their audience and peers.

本书版权归Arcler所有

Updating Media Personnel on Current Trends in Technological Development

267

Figure 12.8: Women studying charts. Source: https://media.istockphoto.com/photos/business-women-studyingcharts-and-diagrams-on-digital-tablet-closeup-picture-id1299055072?k=20& m=1299055072&s=612x612&w=0&h=r7wsnSwguKrb7EQM3emFQ2jWPP2KvD2iMKlh0UiBUNM=

The words “micro-celebrity” and “social media influencer” are used interchangeably in this context. E-commerce, social media, mobile devices, computers, and the internet have all changed. Influencer marketing has been a prominent idea in the field of social media marketing because it can affect how customers, advertisers, and marketing professionals talk about firms online. When it comes to advertising their products and services on the internet, firms frequently work with social media influencers and celebrity sponsors. Marketers utilize influencers to promote their products and services because of the impact they may have on their online audiences. As a result of the foregoing, Smis collaboration is becoming increasingly significant in brand marketing and promotion. The cosmetics and personal

本书版权归Arcler所有

268

Encyclopedia of Journalism and Mass Communication

care sector is always inventing to provide clients with products that are safe, effective, and environmentally friendly (Moore & Shemberger, 2019). Cosmetic companies have traditionally relied heavily on traditional advertising and distribution channels such as television, print, department stores, pharmacies, and personal care shops. Technology has altered how individuals seek and buy cosmetics. Cosmetic firms engage with their customers through websites, blogs, social media networks, cosmetic advice forums, and mobile applications. According to a Cosmetics Europe survey, 51% of buyers receive their information from this sort of source. A new generation of digital beauty professionals has emerged to replace conventional makeup artists, who are now collaborating with cosmetics businesses to spread the word about their products and profit from their online fame. They potentially give more diversity as social media models by extending the notion of beauty. Companies are increasingly resorting to influencer marketing to help them sell their cosmetics as beauty experts grow more famous among young women. Among the top firms that commonly employ influencer marketing are L’Oréal, mac, Estée Lauder, Nyx, glossier, lush, Becca, milk makeup, Kylie cosmetics, and melt cosmetics. Many of today’s young people have grown up with the Internet, cellphones, and social media at the forefront of their everyday lives since infancy. According to statistics, a young millennial is someone born between the ages of 18 and 24 who is classed as a millennial. When young people express themselves with cosmetics, connect with cultural acceptability, or share their lives on social media, they contribute to the openness and variety of the beauty sector (Mellado et al., 2020). According to Jed Wolf, today’s young people are more interested in their connections than infamous individuals. The majority of young people (almost 90%) indicated they follow an influencer on social media, and 73% said these people have a bigger impact on their lives than “conventional” superstars.

本书版权归Arcler所有

Updating Media Personnel on Current Trends in Technological Development

269

Figure 12.9: Social media concept. Source: https://media.istockphoto.com/photos/social-media-concept-picture-id 1224524622?k=20&m=1224524622&s=612x612&w=0&h=MPddIFIAipixQ LAon26MaznVaWzXQBh8UyZR9ycA-pM=

They arranged this event because they were certain that the internet material of peer influencers had an impact on brand culture. Many individuals look for suggestions from previous customers when making a purchase. The desire of peers to mimic influencers is believed to encourage them to acquire things, services, or brands recommended by them. Smis may have a beneficial influence on the fashion, beauty, and way of life choices of the internet audience since they are often held up as role models with exceptional preferences, worldviews, and attitudes. Meta-analyzes on source credibility discovered that assets like expertise and experience, as well as traits like homophile and trustworthiness, were often employed as criteria for judging the credibility of the sources. In independent studies, several qualities, such as competence, authenticity, attractiveness, knowledge, trust, self-confidence, and helpfulness, were used to assess the trustworthiness of sources. These websites do not analyze their endorsers based on factors such as relatability or articulation. According to the researcher, Forbes was the only study to evaluate the relatability and articulation abilities of online influencers, however, it was exploratory. Internet platforms are bringing together and homogenizing millennials, dissolving generational distinctions in their day-to-day

本书版权归Arcler所有

270

Encyclopedia of Journalism and Mass Communication

interactions. Young people nowadays favor organizations and goods that help them create a feeling of social identity and belonging (Matthes, 2009). Social identity refers to emotional and value-based membership in a given social group. Intergroup conduct is described by the social identity theory proposed by social psychologists Henri Tajfel and John Turner. Personal identity, which refers to a person’s distinctive features, and social identity, which is a collective affiliation with a group’s identity, are the two components of social identification. The idea of social identity, as introduced by social identity theory, may be used to predict an intriguing character with surprising accuracy. The distinctive characteristics of social groups tend to impact the decisions and actions of persons who identify as members of such groups

Figure 12.10: A woman vlogging. Source: https://media.istockphoto.com/photos/attractive-woman-vloggingfrom-vienna-picture-id947989088?k=20&m=947989088&s=612x612&w=0 &h=LAtjAtqWABGH4J8UjiMimkBXrAQI8aDNHcRlpkoXGgM=

According to research, certain persons are more likely than others to influence the purchase decisions of others. Influencers have gained in popularity and are now seen as trustworthy sources of information by the general public due to their ability to interact with others. They are also better than average in persuading people to change their minds and actions. Selfmade social media stars may be more appealing than companies advertising cosmetics, and they are critical in a brand argument. Smis are more relatable

本书版权归Arcler所有

Updating Media Personnel on Current Trends in Technological Development

271

because they live ordinary lives, which makes them more relevant to the audience of their work. Several research has been conducted on influencer marketing and the factors that impact brand reactions. Lee and Watkins discovered that vloggers had a favorable impact on customer purchase intentions for (luxury) products highlighted in their vlogs. Customers that buy or support lifestyle vloggers’ products have adopted their product concepts. When an influencer’s reputation, such as their perceived trustworthiness, improves, the marketing message improves. When it comes to using social media platforms like Instagram and Twitter to foster brand dialogs, researchers Djafarova and Rushworth discovered that influencers, rather than celebrities, have higher credibility. When it comes to influencer success, however, it all comes down to how the audience perceives them (Maier & Curtin, 2005). This hypothesis emphasizes source credibility, which includes influencer attractiveness and competency, as well as familiarity and relatability, and trustworthiness. In the coming weeks, we’ll investigate the credibility of influencers who may influence a consumer’s decision to purchase a cosmetic product. Facts to back up influential social media users’ claims the source’s credibility is defined as “a communicator’s positive attributes that influence the recipient’s reception of a message.”

Figure 12.11: A lady doing her makeup while streaming. Source: https://media.istockphoto.com/photos/woman-does-makeup-while-recording-live-stream-with-video-player-picture-id1141423314?k=20&m=1141 423314&s=612x612&w=0&h=aXJDttrmpVR8RMEeoEAvLo6p_-eUDRXAFCfliSmS3Is=

本书版权归Arcler所有

272

Encyclopedia of Journalism and Mass Communication

According to the credibility model, an endorser’s perceived expertise and sincerity influence the persuasiveness of a statement. Consumer ideas, beliefs, attitudes, and behaviors can all be influenced by reliable information. Audiences’ perceptions of an influencer’s credibility are influenced by a variety of things. The credibility of influencers grows when they demonstrate dependability and ethical behavior with honesty, integrity, and sincerity. Even if they don’t remember every detail of the presentation, the audience is more likely to accept the message. After the presentation, they will recall how the presenter made them feel, how they processed the information, and what they may have said to others about it. This study employs the Forbes source credibility standards to assess the beauty industry’s social media influence. Knowledge Facts and evidence allow us to distinguish between what we call “knowledge” and views, hypotheses, assumptions, and other unproven facts. Knowledge is linked to the ability to create commercial or economic value, as well as the individual’s dedication and expertise. The more people who are aware of something, the more likely they are to purchase it. According to Yadav and de Valck, followers are more likely to accept advice from an influencer if they believe them to be experts in their fields (Lingwall & Kuehn, 2013). Experts believe that influencers can be found in a variety of product categories, such as fashion and cosmetics, and that they are not limited to a single product. As a result, their followers regard influencers who are knowledgeable about the products they promote as more credible and authentic. Influencers use their deep understanding of their consumers to craft persuasive messages when it comes to promoting a company. When SMI followers learn more about them, their confidence grows. Relatability Relationships with one’s own life or history may make anything more relevant: the topic is simpler to grasp, love, or sympathize with. The relatability of influencers refers to their relationship with their audience. The more personal and relatable an influencer is, the more probable it is that their followers would identify with them. Being relatable is one of the most difficult skills to acquire. Various criteria indicate an influencer is essential, such as being simple to contact, trustworthy, relatable, and easy to replicate. Users of social media notably young people] share comparable interests, demographics, and habits as their target audience. This is especially true for people who post regular updates about their everyday life on social media and connect directly with their fans. People are more inclined to

本书版权归Arcler所有

Updating Media Personnel on Current Trends in Technological Development

273

participate in activities that conform to societal standards, according to the social identity theory, and their social identity must match their selfidentification. Glucksman says that by developing a personal relationship with an influencer and trusting them, followers regard them as genuine. People are more inclined to believe the ideas and suggestions of influencers since they can relate to and like them because they have shared experiences. According to Forbes, little celebrities are more “relatable” and more likely to live average lives than superstars, who look aloof due to their celebrity. Last but not least, because the majority of influencers come from the same demographic background, young people are more inclined to embrace their viewpoints, resulting in a closer bond between influencers and their followers: The relatability of the SMI boosts confidence. Helpfulness Influencers may be defined as persons who help others make buying decisions about a product by providing informative information on social media. Companies in the beauty sector may profit immensely from the use of video lessons that show how to correctly apply cosmetics and what techniques to use (Lewis & Reese, 2009). Furthermore, influencers that provide product recommendations may be seen as useful since when they promote a product, both the client and the cosmetics industry gain. However, for followers to connect with and spread the word about marketing postings, they must be informative and relevant to their ideals. When assessing whether something is real or false, followers seek counsel from individuals they may trust, the potential for SMI to be helpful has a beneficial influence on trust.

12.8.1. Self-Confidence The conviction in one’s talents and potential to succeed in an undertaking is referred to as self-confidence. Increased social self-confidence leads to a more positive view of interpersonal authority, which is necessary for influencing other people’s conduct. As long as they are confident, they can handle any scenario or job while remaining calm under pressure, exercizing discernment, and behaving appropriately. And they are willing to devote more time and effort to researching their behavior and ensuring that they can progress without the assistance of other variables. Confident influencers believe in and trust their talents. Their followers have a favorable opinion of the brand and are more inclined to buy it as a consequence. Influencers generally used adjectives like “wonderful,” “excited,” “love,” and “my favorite” to show their confidence. By making eye contact, sitting up

本书版权归Arcler所有

274

Encyclopedia of Journalism and Mass Communication

straight, speaking confidently, and engaging with their followers, influencers may naturally project confidence through their actions and positive body language. Because of the speakers’ passionate discussion and body language, fans receive the idea that the presentation fosters respect and faith in the firm. Influencers may persuade their followers to purchase a product because they look authentic and trustworthy.

Figure 12.12: Social media influencer asking followers to subscribe. Source: https://media.istockphoto.com/photos/social-media-influencer-askingfollowers-to-like-and-subscribe-picture-id1013632278?k=20&m=101363227 8&s=612x612&w=0&h=Fl-GZMMxD55Awm5SniBnqLfTQiWGo0CL-4VRobeIssA=

SMI’s self-assurance fosters trust. Articulation To assist the target market to comprehend the product, the influencer must employ straightforward communication and information presentation. Video editing and presenting abilities are interwoven with articulation. You must be able to speak, present captivating graphics, and connect with your audience to be a successful influencer. The content, values, attitudes, and conduct of influencers must be consistent for their followers to see them as trustworthy, authentic, and honest. Influencers that can clearly and smoothly express information, both visually and audibly, will be well-received. When influencers share product knowledge, the company benefits from increased consumer interest, expertise, and trust (Lingwall, 2009). It is critical to deliver facts clearly to develop confidence. “Trust” has evolved as an important component in

本书版权归Arcler所有

Updating Media Personnel on Current Trends in Technological Development

275

online transactions, and it refers to a person’s readiness to be affected by the behaviors of another person. This idea holds that the other person can participate in activities that are vital to the principal even if the principal lacks the power to rule or manage them. Giving personal information and completing purchases are two examples of trusted activities that make customers feel less vulnerable or uncertain. To influence their followers’ behavior, influencers must first establish trust with them. Recognized social media influencers, for example, are valuable when offering advice or direction in certain situations. Because they are honest, true, and straightforward, influencers have the trust and confidence of their peers. Influencers who lack this important trait will be unable to influence or govern their audiences. According to Abreu young people only trust credible sources, therefore they pay attention to the influencer’s degree and validity of expertise. They can tell the difference between promotional and real messaging since they were reared in the age of fake news. As a result, it’s reasonable to argue that trust and authenticity are inextricably linked. The trustee’s general trust proclivity was found as a second-order reflective construct in this study, along with their competence, friendliness, and integrity. Competence-based trust refers to a collection of talents that have an impact on a certain profession. Integrity is an indication that the client believes the trustee follows a set of standards, and so the principle is acceptable. Levin and Cross describe generosity in a variety of ways, but they feel an influencer can prioritize the well-being of their target audience over their own. H6: Having faith in the SMI is advantageous while purchasing cosmetics (Korkonosenko, 2013). According to confidence and relatability have a substantial influence on trust? Because they are likewise marketed items, confident influencers will leave a broader image of the recommended brand. It is also feasible to communicate confidence in the influencers and the organization by using words like “wonderful,” “love,” “excited,” and “my favorite” with positive body language. Credibility assists influencers in appearing honest and reputable, which motivates their audience to purchase the things they promote.

本书版权归Arcler所有

本书版权归Arcler所有

CHAPTER

13

PARTNERING WITH MEDIA HOUSES TO COPRODUCE PROFESSIONAL PROGRAMS

CONTENTS

本书版权归Arcler所有

13.1. Strategic Partnerships for Creating Exciting Opportunities.............. 279 13.2. Creating A Sustainable Competitive Edge Through Media Partnerships................................................................................... 284 13.3. The Entire Macro Environment of the Media Business.................... 286 13.4. The Effects of the Media Industry on the Environment and Industry.................................................................................. 286 13.5. How New Media Partnerships Work.............................................. 290 13.6. Authentic Content And Inspirational Entertainment Programming................................................................................ 294 13.7. How-To or Do-It-Yourself Tutorials................................................. 296 13.8. A Compelling Body of Work.......................................................... 298

278

Encyclopedia of Journalism and Mass Communication

Both industrialized and developing countries are paying less attention to climate change issues. It is critical to find effective ways to overcome the pervasive indifference among the public in developing countries toward climate research and climate science journalism. It also involves the development of new techniques for exchanging information and lowering the expenses of climate change coverage. In contrast to other types of media such as news or information, television, video, cinema, radio, and live theater all allow for participation (Kalatzi et al., 2018). This media may reach a wide range of demographics and is incredibly popular with people of all ages. Gender stereotypes and outdated gender norms are frequently reinforced in entertainment media (movies and TV shows, video games, music, and software), just as they are in other sorts of media (books, periodicals, etc.). Women were underrepresented in casts and talked much less on screen than men, according to studies of 120 films from ten of the world’s most lucrative film markets. According to the study’s findings, they were also often represented in traditional and sexualized ways.

Figure 13.1: Scenes of a business vlog. Source: https://media.istockphoto.com/photos/behind-the-scenes-of-a-business-vlog-picture-id970350938?k=20&m=970350938&s=612x612&w=0&h =SBwxDWPKQsoe1pFc_CZIQMaVAWWEBNXxeWTWizgrGdA=

本书版权归Arcler所有

Partnering With Media Houses to Coproduce Professional Programs

279

Young people, who are extensively impacted by popular media, are especially sensitive to the harm that these pictures cause. There are numerous career paths in popular culture and entertainment that advocate for change to ensure more gender-equitable representations in the industries themselves, as well as content that is produced to ensure non-discriminatory and non-violent portrayals and messages, as well as content that is female empowerment, equitable, and respectful of diversity. Finding entrance points to cooperatively design or build programs with the explicit goal of fighting harmful social norms and promoting pro-social values, beliefs, attitudes, and actions is another area of attention. As a result, the term “edutainment,” which refers to educational entertainment, has gained popularity. Numerous studies have found that entertainment education has a favorable influence on social norms.

13.1. STRATEGIC PARTNERSHIPS FOR CREATING EXCITING OPPORTUNITIES To address the increased need for middle-level media workers as the ICT sector advances, media training institutions need to launch new programs and expand current ones. A simple option to close these gaps is to link up with a firm that has the requisite competencies. Because of their adaptability and speed, strategic alliances have emerged as a distinguishing trait of our increasingly fluid economy. In a successful partnership, the capabilities of both businesses are exploited, resulting in a service that is both valuable and distinctive. Despite their limits, M&A and conventional supplier alliances play a key role in the development of something distinctive and new. Acquiring a firm might result in it losing some of its individuality when it is merged into the operations of the buyer (Heider et al., 2005). Instead of partnering to produce something unique, two firms with a conventional supplier relationship may operate in parallel. If you’re in a business relationship, you should always get three or ten out of one. The track record of strategic cooperation beyond the initial enthusiasm and press announcement, however, is not good: they typically fail. Even the best-laid plans can be undone by cultural differences, opposing interests, and other practical considerations. There has been a rising mistrust and reported infidelity in the business sphere. A lot of time and money has been squandered by coalitions that have had little to show for it. Certain collaborations, particularly those that bridge industry lines, are, on the other hand, swiftly delivering major returns. Partnerships such as that between

本书版权归Arcler所有

280

Encyclopedia of Journalism and Mass Communication

Commercial Bank of Africa and Safaricom for mobile microloans, Tesla and Panasonic for electric cars, and Pfizer and BioNTech for new drugs are instances of this trend. At some time in the future, others, such as Microsoft and General Motors (self-driving vehicles) and AT&T and Google (edge computing), could follow suit (edge computing. Increasingly, strategic alliances are increasingly vital in a world where enterprises must develop new goods and services fast, conquer the undiscovered area, and pool resources and expertise. The R&D expenditures for radically new concepts like self-driving vehicles are being shared between long-standing opponents like Volkswagen and Ford in certain circumstances.

Figure 13.2: Social network concept. Source: https://media.istockphoto.com/photos/social-network-concept-pictureid914670182?k=20&m=914670182&s=612x612&w=0&h=6XDoUpWw5CC C6B3JfK1vDHofTjOVZXXhw_yoCMkiyVw=

Strategic collaborations may be the best way to acquire access to the data and technology required to stay up with altering customer expectations. Every organization will need advanced analytics, as well as consumer access and expertise. It may also be important to adopt fresh and creative company strategies. Organizational agility is becoming increasingly vital, and businesses that lack the required capabilities risk falling behind. What precisely is a strategic alliance? CEOs of large organizations are eager to offer

本书版权归Arcler所有

Partnering With Media Houses to Coproduce Professional Programs

281

a vast list of strategic partners, which range from well-known technology firms to tiny local suppliers. The great bulk of these collaborations will be purely transactional. Instead of emphasizing long-term value, transactional relationships concentrate on short-term profits (Holbert & Grill, 2015). A huge IT company’s partnership with a promising startup is not always mutualistic. A meaningful strategic partnership may arise when both sides have a stake in the outcome, share the same objective, and think that we’re all in this together. Cultural alignment makes this feasible. Customers and business models should co-evolve in a unified ecosystem of service and product offers. A strategic alliance should be both exciting and terrifying. Strategic alliances vary from other types of collaboration in that they apply a specific strategy to maximize profits, therefore knowing their fundamental components is crucial. Is a strategic alliance required to fulfill current or expected client demand? To offer new products or services, businesses might produce, lease, buy, venture, or collaborate. Each of these solutions has advantages and disadvantages. Responses are based on how far fresh ideas are from the company’s key skills. If you have the talents and resources to create a product that isn’t readily available in the market, or if intellectual property ownership is critical from a strategic position (IP), you should manufacture (IP). When you have the relevant skills, the solution or capacity is easily available on the market, and forming a commercial connection with a provider is quick and affordable, renting makes sense. A feasible aim to advance your ambitions may emerge, but you lack the experience or existing talents to achieve it. You should invest when you identify a partnership potential with a smaller firm, as well as the necessity to preserve intellectual property and proposal development efforts. A venture may precede an acquisition. Use the best of your company and the best of a partner’s firm to produce something oneof-a-kind—specifically, the result of two organizations collaborating and investing their respective resources and experience. A strategic partnership must have the following requirements to be successful:

本书版权归Arcler所有

•

Well-defined objectives and a clear vision. Partnerships must be founded on a clearly defined need that connects with the organization’s overarching goals and objectives. The first step in developing a clear picture of your capacity gaps is identifying and outlining the aims and objectives of your strategic partnership portfolio. You may use this tool to determine exactly what your partners are accountable for providing. Strive for long-term

282

Encyclopedia of Journalism and Mass Communication

success above short-term gain by developing a coherent plan and budget (Hanitzsch, 2004). • A devoted group. Before integrating the outside world, a multidisciplinary partnership team must be developed and supported by an acceptable operational model. This team will be upfront about what is required, when it is required, and where it is required, communicate across and deep inside your organization, and build a working rhythm for your organization. Businesses struggle to create “relational” strength without this degree of commitment. • Taking a group approach. Successful collaborations are founded on mutual trust, common ideals, and a solid cultural fit. Examine the history and culture of your relationship. A “business as usual” strategy will fail if the opposing side does not detect the same degree of enthusiasm, energy, and humility in admitting that you may not have all of the solutions in this situation. To effectively create an agile culture inside your firm, be realistic and prepared to make rapid course changes if required. • One partner pipeline is managed centrally in a single procedure and pipeline. Create a “playbook” that is continuously followed to evaluate and manage partners. It’s essential to learn how to use digital tools quickly to have a head start on future interactions that will be highly affected by technology. • There are no restrictions on ownership or management. The best place for responsibility and ownership is where value is produced. Allow the firm, not your strategic partnerships staff, to be responsible for the “performance” of the strategic ties. Establish explicit decision-making criteria so that teams can collaborate efficiently and incorporate essential business stakeholders from the start (Grimes, 2009). Plan ahead of time to build a regular governance structure as well as a cycle for assessing progress. Following that, the firm can begin negotiating with potential partners. For some, taking the path of least resistance, such as teaming with a well-established IT firm, may be appealing. However, in other circumstances, it is not the best option. Compiling a comprehensive database of firm profiles that includes information on talent specialization, recent M&A activity, prior or existing partnerships, and financial success will help you choose the finest strategic partners.

本书版权归Arcler所有

Partnering With Media Houses to Coproduce Professional Programs

283

Once you’ve reduced your list of possible business partners, you’ll need to evaluate each one thoroughly to determine which one best meets your needs. Kearney has established a set of rules to assess when a partnership is strategic to ensure strong governance and performance management. Following that, the contract must be formalized and the framework of the agreement developed.

Figure 13.3: Businessman having a video conference. Source: https://media.istockphoto.com/vectors/businessman-having-videoconference-on-smartphone-discussing-with-vector-id1372659481?k=20&m= 1372659481&s=612x612&w=0&h=agcqp7zU9awYKxBT8gBJVg2nDMkbPPhU8esa93f50u0=

This will come organically if the partners are on the same page in terms of a single aim. Keeping the momentum going. Both the CEO and the employee must be dedicated to establishing and maintaining momentum. To benefit from a long-term strategic alliance: Establish explicit, quantifiable goals for your collaborators, as well as monitoring and correction systems to monitor and address any deviations from those goals. Maintain a thorough yet flexible approach to performance management (Guo et al., 2016). It’s critical to keep in touch with your business partners frequently to ensure that you’re both on the same page and working toward the same goals, as well as to be adaptable when adjustments are required. To conclude, the

本书版权归Arcler所有

284

Encyclopedia of Journalism and Mass Communication

majority of firms today lack the competencies and organizational cultures required to sustain an expedited partnership model.

13.2. CREATING A SUSTAINABLE COMPETITIVE EDGE THROUGH MEDIA PARTNERSHIPS A robust strategic partnership plan must be executed quickly to remain competitive. If you don’t have one, you won’t be able to swiftly co-develop the new ideas and business strategies needed to propel your firm to the top of the market. Effective strategic partnerships can boost a company’s market share while also increasing shareholder value over time. If collaboration is insufficient, it is possible to waste large amounts of time, effort, and money, as well as a company’s competitiveness. Companies who collaborate with the media can earn a long-term competitive edge. To compete on a worldwide scale, media businesses must constantly modify their plans and techniques. Strategic collaborations are frequent among media companies seeking to expand globally. The altering social, economic, and political context is reshaping the media industry’s strategy, organizational structure, and management. It is all about producing, modifying, transmitting, and distributing media items for public consumption. Strategic partnerships must take current market conditions and trends into account. A media conglomerate can better integrate its specialized resources and skills in ways that complement one another through an alliance with another firm, without the hassles and expenses of a merger. A strategic alliance is a collaboration between two or more organizations to achieve a common goal. Partnerships provide immediate benefits such as technological knowledge, access to new markets, and the chance to grab market share from wellestablished industry heavyweights (Gotlieb et al., 2017). It is deemed strategic when a corporation attempts to achieve part or all of management’s strategic aims through an alliance. This article will explore strategic media alliances as well as the elements that inspire media corporations to collaborate. Strategic relationships can also provide a long-term competitive advantage. Mergers and acquisitions, as well as strategic partnerships. Before delving into why media corporations create strategic partnerships, it is crucial to define the term “alliance.” When two or more firms ally, the potential for mutual benefit and success is larger than that of any one organization acting alone. Customers, suppliers, competitors, colleges, and government organizations can all develop strategic relationships with businesses. Businesses may strengthen their competitive advantages, explore

本书版权归Arcler所有

Partnering With Media Houses to Coproduce Professional Programs

285

new markets, provide valuable information, and share the risk or expense of critical development activities by creating strategic partnerships. An alliance is essentially a confederation of numerous corporate organizations. Each media firm enters the alliance with its own corporate culture, implicit or explicit behavioral systems, and management practices. Each media business has just a hazy knowledge of how its partners work. Lower-level managers are entrusted with sustaining the partnership on a day-to-day basis after it has been accepted by top management. It is critical to leverage each company’s capabilities for the advantage of collaboration. This regulation applies to all members of the alliance. To take measured risks in coalitions, flexible management structures are required. When using the IO model for strategic alliances, Porter and Fuller “viewed strategic alliances as ‘coalitions’ in the context of a firm’s global strategy.” Managers are more likely to succeed when they are enabled to make their own decisions and given the ability to do so (Grömping, 2019). The global resources, management, financial operations, administrative staff, sales forces, customer tariffs, and monitoring systems of the media firms are integrated in record time under the guidance of a new management team.

Figure 13.4: Recruitment concept to hiring. Source: https://media.istockphoto.com/photos/recruitment-concept-to-hiringof-a-new-talented-specialists-for-to-picture-id1322630166?k=20&m=13226 30166&s=612x612&w=0&h=L3gJbRFk4L2DaOyKUmL14Lh8-z1ddmX6Ojqb8mOY-xA=

本书版权归Arcler所有

286

Encyclopedia of Journalism and Mass Communication

13.3. THE ENTIRE MACRO ENVIRONMENT OF THE MEDIA BUSINESS 13.3.1. PESTEL The impact of macro variables on a company’s position and competitiveness is better understood with the use of PESTEL analysis. Many problems are influenced by market structure, monopolistic conduct, and competition. The interest in macroeconomic issues is another indication of the field’s huge stature and significance in today’s corporate world. The macro-environment affects both the macro environment and a single unit inside it. PESTEL research is critical for examining market trends from the standpoints of a proposal and competitors. Political/legal Because of a solid legislative framework and a stable economic climate, media firms in the United States and Europe may stay competitive in the market (Gillmor, 2016). Despite the EU Commission law that has the biggest impact, media firms can continue to develop at a rapid rate. Socio-demography Customers throughout the world are familiar with global brands, and they also purchase locally created items that employ imported components or resources. Considering things from the standpoint of the environment at the end of the 1990s, a substantial change occurred in the European market, altering many facets of competitiveness and needing a time of reflection and adjustment. Technological innovation is a major driver of the global economy. Advances in information technology and communication processes have resulted in increased information flow, reduced rates, and new communication channels. Despite the media’s emphasis on high-tech achievements, major gains have been achieved in a variety of sectors and levels of information technology as a whole. It’s a fantastic opportunity to take advantage of America’s and Europe’s good economic conditions. National and regional economies are becoming increasingly reliant on export sales as a source of foreign currency for imports of goods and services.

13.4. THE EFFECTS OF THE MEDIA INDUSTRY ON THE ENVIRONMENT AND INDUSTRY To plan, develop, and deploy messages, the media sector requires billions of dollars, many hours, and specialized knowledge. Some of the major worldwide participants in this market are Disney, Time Warner, Viacom, News Corporation, Sony, National Amusements, Lagardere groups, Allied

本书版权归Arcler所有

Partnering With Media Houses to Coproduce Professional Programs

287

Media and Mercantile Advertising, and Axel Springer AG. Small media enterprises are either put out of business or purchased by larger corporations to compete with larger, more established organizations. For one thing, they lack the financial and human resources to respond to market movements rapidly enough, making it difficult for them to compete. Alliances and collaborative ventures assist media firms by keeping them up to speed on technical advances. These firms have agreed to join forces and compete for worldwide contracts as a consequence of their joint specialties. Managing large infrastructure projects in other countries has been an important aspect of big firms’ competence in pushing their telecommunications knowhow overseas (George, 2011). Sales, customer loyalty, repeat business, distribution, and connections with current clients are more crucial than product innovation or production in the media industry’s capacity to remain competitive. Even the most modest levels of innovation and advancement necessitate massive investments in R&D facilities. To remain competitive, market leaders invest massive sums in new product development and innovation. To survive and flourish, many smaller rivals are obliged to make agreements with larger media conglomerates. Because of the intricacy of high-tech goods, engineers are required to sell and maintain them. As firms strive to expand their creativity and technical achievements, product and channel operations will become more internalized. As a consequence, critical technology is safeguarded. Similarly, against popular opinion, there appears to be no association between the quantity of money spent on R&D and the outcomes of the efforts. Although R&D is cumulative, it eliminates innovations encouraged by a company’s success. Working with new suppliers raises the possibility of a project being delayed. “By collaborating intelligently, media businesses may reach a much wider audience. Because of the scale of the industry and the large range of prospective clients they may contact, media enterprises have the best chances. Cost differentiation and non-price rivalry can significantly improve a company’s future development and profitability. Media firms will maintain their market share and create long-term connections with their customers. This includes branding, marketing, advertising, and increased customer service. The sector’s distinction of expenses and non-costs aids in retaining local clients. To attract consumers to make a purchase, several “tools” such as temporary price reduction, extra value offerings, future purchase incentives, and premium offers (such as free mail-in premiums and selfliquidating premiums) will be employed. At the most basic level, long-term competitive advantage may be divided into three categories.

本书版权归Arcler所有

288

Encyclopedia of Journalism and Mass Communication

Figure 13.5: Social networking concept. Source: https://media.istockphoto.com/vectors/social-network-vector-id59868 7956?k=20&m=598687956&s=612x612&w=0&h=-iDT5txDtwUp8bxTKk8zRb98QFNbGOXSLwttvc4fNnk=

First, the capacity to charge cheaper pricing than competitors is one of the company’s primary competitive advantages. Second, the firm offers a particular value advantage. The company has an edge over its competitors since it is focused on a certain market niche and has created a customized solution for that market segment. Small enterprises, on average, are unable to fulfill the demands of every client in their market, and they lack the market share and purchasing power to compete on price. To compete successfully, small firms must build a long-term competitive edge based on offering more value to a narrow market segment. Another well-known benefit is the first mover advantage. The idea of a first mover advantage benefits those who are the first to enter a new market. Even though being the first to market gives you a brief edge,

本书版权归Arcler所有

Partnering With Media Houses to Coproduce Professional Programs

289

I doubt it will stay long without one of the three sorts of benefits stated above. Google and Facebook are prime instances of this. Although neither of these firms was the first to join their respective sectors, they currently dominate. Learn how to create a long-term competitive edge in five simple stages (Fleming, 2014). The first stage is to familiarize yourself with the market and its many sub-sectors. Look for markets where you can target and market to clients profitably while your rivals are underserved. To create a value, offer that clients would appreciate, you must first understand what they desire. It is vital to identify the most crucial operations that must be carried out flawlessly to support and fulfill the value offer. Consider how you will brand your services and how you will price them. To provide value to the market you’ve selected, you must first recognize your major talents and capabilities, as well as how you may put them to use. Make a business model based on the value you provide. When you know who you’re selling to, why they should buy from you, and what areas of expertise you need to have to consistently deliver your value proposition, your business will be much more successful. Once you’ve discovered your sustainable competitive advantage, you should put it to good use for the company. Customers will recognize the benefit of doing business with your firm rather than your rivals as long as you use your sustainable competitive advantage to sell and advertise your items. As a consequence, it will be easier for your staff to supply your products or services and maintain their commitments to you. They understand that the long-term competitive advantage of the firm is a major concern for the whole group (Fuerst et al., 2015). Long-term competitive advantage may assist you to make decisions and provide direction. If a new business opportunity does not support your long-term competitive advantage, it should be examined. Isn’t it preferable to focus on developing a solid and stable foundation rather than striving to grow fast to preserve a competitive edge in the long run? Even in the face of fierce competition, an organization’s long-term vision and efficient use of a long-term competitive advantage may provide better returns on capital invested in the organization. When a corporation is in this situation, its value and sale price increase. Businesses are always seeking a competitive advantage.

本书版权归Arcler所有

290

Encyclopedia of Journalism and Mass Communication

Figure 13.6: Winner TV interview. Source: https://media.istockphoto.com/photos/winner-tv-interview-xlargepicture-id155437927?k=20&m=155437927&s=612x612&w=0&h=VYPj-aFEpVdz2YY28IYFEgU2tSEV6QhvwutkI2DfFrY=

13.5. HOW NEW MEDIA PARTNERSHIPS WORK A media partnership is formed when a company and a media outlet collaborate to exchange content that benefits both parties. Because of the positive publicity, they can generate for both parties, media partnerships can be an effective marketing strategy for small businesses with limited marketing resources. There are a few things to consider when attempting to connect with the appropriate media outlet. That means you’ll be able to provide relevant content to the media organization’s audience. One of the primary benefits of a media partnership is that it promotes companies as industry experts. Customers of your company may become more likely to purchase from you as a result of the media source’s audience gaining trust. A local

本书版权归Arcler所有

Partnering With Media Houses to Coproduce Professional Programs

291

magazine geared toward young families could be an excellent marketing partner for a small tailoring and clothing repair business. Magazine readers who value your experience and expertise may be impressed by articles on how to perform minor repairs to save money on new clothing. They’ll remember you the next time they need to repair or replace something in their closet. The extent to which you and your colleague comprehend the intended audience (Ashley, 2015). When developing a brand partnership strategy, consider both your target audience and the target audience of the media source. You and the media source can both profit if you connect your audiences in a specific way. Media outlets are hesitant to work with you if your target demographic differs from theirs because you will be unable to provide them with material that will appeal to their readers and viewers. While conducting your audience segmentation research, keep in mind all of the various aspects of your target audience. Check to see if your audience and the audience of the media source have a similar demographic. By demonstrating your knowledge to the media organization, you may persuade them that you have something valuable to offer their viewers. A local automotive magazine, for example, could be an excellent media partner if you’re a technician. You could write about the five warning signs that your car needs to be serviced. If you own a bakery that specializes in special occasion cakes, try to form a partnership with a local television station so that you can share your expertise on how to make festive cakes (Esser & Umbricht, 2014). Maintain awareness of your audience’s interests and how your professional background can help your partner. Determine your goals for the collaboration. Establish the objectives of your media partnership. What, for example, is the bare minimum of views or readers required? Is it permissible for the media outlet’s website to link to your content? How many opportunities do you need to include new content? Alternatively, you could organize a monthly content distribution campaign for the readership of the outlet. The media partner may agree to let you post a press release on their website. Don’t limit your search to content exchange only. Would you like your name to appear as a partner in the media kit, for example? No, I do not want my company’s logo to appear on their website in the Partners section.

本书版权归Arcler所有

292

Encyclopedia of Journalism and Mass Communication

Figure 13.7: Magazine editors. Source: https://media.istockphoto.com/photos/magazine-editors-at-work-picture-id1021671452?k=20&m=1021671452&s=612x612&w=0&h=oHDGKO bxVXWmTrd7ZWgKvOmIAdKJun7038TWX2re4Og=

Do you want to attend any of the events hosted by your media partner? Make a list of the conditions you’d like to negotiate with the media partner. Please tell us about the services you offer. The next step is to determine how you can assist the media outlet in exchange for what you want from the partnership. What is the advantage of this alliance? You must be certain that your company offers something that no other organization does to secure a relationship with a media outlet. One of the most important things for any media outlet, whether online or in print, is an interesting material. If you want to reach your target audience, you must have interesting content that will quickly capture their attention. How will your company make this information available to the media? What sets you apart from other professionals in your field? No, I haven’t received any formal training

本书版权归Arcler所有

Partnering With Media Houses to Coproduce Professional Programs

293

in this new method. You could, for example, have worked with top-tier professionals in your field or used specialized equipment. Think about how you can provide information about your own experiences to the media outlet. When creating media content, keep the target audience in mind at all times (Duffield, 2011). What makes you the best person to provide them with the information they require? Your media partner should assist you in developing an effective public relations strategy. Create a media outlet strategy for collaboration. How could you collaborate in a way that benefits both of you? Determine what you hope to achieve by collaborating with the media. Is it designed to bring in new customers? How many are there, if any? Is it for promotional purposes? How will you evaluate such a situation? Give examples of the steps you must each take to achieve the goals you’ve set for yourself. Will you write a weekly blog post for the outlet’s website, for example? A reporter from the media outlet may come in every three months to interview a few of your employees for a story. Choose the main message of your collaboration and design around it. Determining what you want to communicate to achieve your goals is an important part of your strategic planning. Make it clear why you are an expert in your field and why you should be the go-to source for information for the media partner. The emphasis should be on providing new, clickable content that encourages online sharing and commenting to increase readership. Effective brand alliances in the printing and copying services industry include the Small Business Administration’s Small Business News website and the Small Business Administration’s website which provides printing and photocopying services. Evaluate and revise your collaboration as needed. It’s critical to track your progress each month to see how close you are to meeting the relationship’s objectives. Are your campaign’s efforts assisting you in meeting your objectives? If this is the case, you should discuss your strategy with your media partner again. Is it necessary for the media partner to accelerate the development of relevant topics, or is your material unique? Identify what works, what doesn’t, and why to improve your partnership (Deuze, 2002) (Domingo et al., 2008. Maintaining open lines of communication with your media partner is critical so that you can discuss the agreement and potential improvements in a way that benefits both parties.

本书版权归Arcler所有

294

Encyclopedia of Journalism and Mass Communication

Figure 13.8: Video archives concept. Source: https://media.istockphoto.com/photos/video-archives-concept-pictureid1029147392?k=20&m=1029147392&s=612x612&w=0&h=hhCN8kRruUf obU-ZKAKH7IcuQ_qHSlhalOdLIQzgLPk=

13.6. AUTHENTIC CONTENT AND INSPIRATIONAL ENTERTAINMENT PROGRAMMING To win, you must garner the most social media attention and encourage others to assist you in spreading the word. All businesses, not just those run by “millennials,” must now have a content strategy in place if they want to pique the interest of their target audiences. What are the characteristics of a high-quality piece of content, we must ask? How much information do people feel obligated to divulge? The success of musicians on Vine, Snapchat, and Instagram stories demonstrates that “great material” isn’t always associated with “high production values.” 4K content looks stunning on a 60-inch HDTV. Increasing the resolution of my iPhone’s camera will soon be obsolete. Well-known people are frequently used by organizations to make their content more interesting and appealing to their target audience. Other than the well-known criteria for “great” content, what is the key to generating

本书版权归Arcler所有

Partnering With Media Houses to Coproduce Professional Programs

295

interest and establishing a relationship with users? Every interesting piece of information must meet three criteria: it must be entertaining, emotional, and educational. A thrilling and enlightening experience. One or more of these characteristics must be present for someone to consider sharing content. When the Three E’s are present, a piece of information is more likely to be read, shared, and acted upon. The most obvious of the three is entertaining. It could also be one of the most difficult objectives. According to Rotten Tomatoes, Hollywood invests hundreds of millions of dollars in films and television shows that it believes will be entertaining, although many of these investments receive a “rotten” rating from critics. Similarly, one’s opinion on the value of a good time can vary greatly (Detenber et al., 2012). An intimate understanding of your target audience is required for effective content creation. Collaborations between entertainment corporations and businesses that sell to the general public are common and successful for a reason. The only way to sell midsize cars if you have the cash but lack creative ability is to work with Marvel. By far the most important of the three, emotional value is emotional. Those who get emotional information are often motivated to take action or build a greater bond with a company. A company’s goal is to discover what will provoke an emotional reaction from its customers. Strategic refers to the finding of this emotional component as the “Mirror of Desire.” In the Mirror of Erised in Harry Potter and the Philosopher’s Stone, Harry saw his parents as he saw them in Harry Potter and the Sorcerer’s Stone. The “Mirror” of a business is how its customers feel better about themselves after using its products or services. It astounds me that no company makes use of education, which is such a basic concept. Customers value authenticity above everything else when making purchasing decisions. It may be challenging to produce and share truthful information at a time when there appears to be less face-to-face interaction and everything seems to be going at a snail’s pace. This has changed drastically in recent years as more individuals work from home, wear masks to hide their grins, and companies have been compelled to shift the things they talk about. Authentic material used to be a lot easier to come by. Why is it becoming increasingly difficult to come up with new content, much less verify its authenticity? You may be interested in some of these ideas, some of which we have used in our campaigns or those of clients.

本书版权归Arcler所有

296

Encyclopedia of Journalism and Mass Communication

Figure 13.9: Meeting room editors and journalists. Source: https://media.istockphoto.com/photos/at-the-meeting-room-multiracial-editors-and-journalists-presenting-picture-id1368404635?k=20&m =1368404635&s=612x612&w=0&h=fV8TuU93ENZDs-oBZRwur3PZwmXR1B4sbBZmRJVoVyg=

Seek advice from those who have gone before you. Is it time to repaint the workplace when it is less crowded? Vote with your social media followers on the color you want to use. The use of creative writing as a storytelling technique has recently become a popular trend. Social media users are more likely to spend time reading or looking at extensive content since they spend so much time there. The long paragraph captions you’ve been mulling about should be put to the test (Curtin et al., 2018).

13.7. HOW-TO OR DO-IT-YOURSELF TUTORIALS It is possible to learn how to make bread at home from a bakery in Houston, Texas. Despite disclosing all of their bread-making techniques, they nevertheless managed to turn a profit. Yes! That is exactly our intention!

本书版权归Arcler所有

Partnering With Media Houses to Coproduce Professional Programs

297

Why? There will always be some who cannot make fresh bread, even after the plague has passed and we can return to our usual lives. However, they added value to their content by amusing and educating us. Customers will stick with a business as long as it continues to provide value, even if that value changes or evolves. Because you don’t have to develop all of the material yourself, UserGenerated Content is a fantastic resource. One of the best things you can do for your social media strategy this year is to develop an engagement framework or influencer program for your company. A high-quality product or service will make it easier for customers to spread the word about your business. Throwbacks aren’t only for Thursdays anymore, though. When a firm has a long history, it makes the most sense to reflect. Make use of old photographs to help bring the story to life. Make a comparison between the “nows” and “then.” Remember how things were in the past. Donate money to a worthy cause. This year, the need for the services of a variety of NGOs, such as food banks and foster care groups, has increased; nevertheless, monetary donations have remained relatively flat. Expanding your audience, gaining tax benefits, and promoting a worthwhile cause by working with a nonprofit organization by assisting those in your community who are truly in need may be a clever and imaginative approach. Whether it’s a major life event for a customer or an accomplishment for a coworker, we believe there’s always cause for celebration (Cohen, 2001). A great way to build relationships with your clients and staff is to get involved in their excitement over their successes. Help each other through it: Mental health and substance abuse issues will affect 40% of people in June 2020. In the meanwhile, the world as it appears on social media is perfect. Companies may appear unreachable if this creates a rift between what is happening and what is happening. Consumers must be reminded that finding common ground can help build relationships in addition to purchasing products. What are the main concerns of your clients and customers?

本书版权归Arcler所有

298

Encyclopedia of Journalism and Mass Communication

Figure 13.10: Office. Source: https://media.istockphoto.com/vectors/office-vector-id1002049972?k= 20&m=1002049972&s=612x612&w=0&h=Il8m4sBSi4MBhQXRHggCmqCL RqadMCqQadriiSzFjUo=

Do you see the difference? If a company uses cautious messaging that is still supportive and avoids appearing negative, a person may feel less isolated. An incredible opportunity to increase customer loyalty to a brand! As long as the content is authentic and uplifting, the options are truly limitless. Each of us, as individuals, is interdependent on the other. If you’re looking to connect, now is the time to go within and discover what truly matters to you and then share it with the world. You may attract new customers who have been waiting for your message.

13.8. A COMPELLING BODY OF WORK When it comes to content marketing campaigns, this could be a missed opportunity to connect with readers and establish a fundamental human connection, as the majority of campaigns focus on teaching and utility. As a result of the humor and easy spread of amusing content, a “business” could easily become a “group of people exactly like me.” It’s essential for establishing credibility and distinguishing genuine followers from casual visitors on Just Like Me, which has this feature. For content to be effective even if it isn’t directly related to your products or services, it must still be entertaining to your target audience. Instructive materials: Even though educational content has the same goal of enlightening viewers, it is often the next step in convincing them that your website or product is worthwhile.

本书版权归Arcler所有

Partnering With Media Houses to Coproduce Professional Programs

299

Unlike entertaining writing, instructional writing appeals to the reader’s intellect (Claussen, 2007). Articles like the one you’re reading are what we strive to produce here at Buffer. Once more, educational materials must be easily accessible to the general population. Is it possible to spread motivation through content? A post is considered a success when it immediately resonates with a large number of people, prompting them to spread the word. The best way to find inspiration isn’t always by looking at a picture with quotes written on it. Case studies, customer feedback, and stories of people who have overcome adversity are often the best sources of inspiration. Easily repurposed material Creating content to convert readers into subscribers, students, or customers is one of the most common methods of driving traffic to an e-commerce site.

本书版权归Arcler所有

本书版权归Arcler所有

CHAPTER

14

JOURNALISM ETHICS: GOOD NEWS VERSUS BAD NEWS

CONTENTS

本书版权归Arcler所有

14.1. Introduction................................................................................... 302 14.2. Independence................................................................................ 305 14.3. Fairness and Impartiality................................................................ 309 14.4. Pursuing Justice............................................................................. 311 14.5. News Compilation......................................................................... 311 14.6. Selection of Sources....................................................................... 312 14.7. Interrogation Techniques................................................................ 313 14.8. Language....................................................................................... 314 14.9. Truth and Accuracy........................................................................ 315 14.10. Keeping Records and Taking Notes.............................................. 317 14.11. Numbers, Dates, and Names....................................................... 318 14.12. Social Media Misinformation....................................................... 318 14.13. Archiving Sources........................................................................ 319 14.14. Humanity.................................................................................... 320

302

Encyclopedia of Journalism and Mass Communication

14.1. INTRODUCTION

Figure 14.1: Journalism. Source: https://thumbs.dreamstime.com/b/journalism-word-cloud-collagesocial-concept-background-journalism-word-cloud-collage-social-concept-202357427.jpg

This comprises ethical norms that are special to journalism as well as recommended methods. Canons of journalism and the “journalist code of ethics” are two terminologies that are used to define this subset of media ethics. Both of these titles are occasionally used interchangeably. It is often highlighted, both by a range of news firms and by professional organizations that cater exclusively to journalists, how crucial it is to adhere to certain rules and ideals. Around the world, the journalism industry is controlled by more than four hundred distinct laws and regulations. It is true that the particulars of different codes can vary, and that they can be derived from a variety of cultural traditions; however, the vast majority of these codes share certain values

本书版权归Arcler所有

Journalism Ethics: Good News Versus Bad News

303

that apply to the gathering and editing of information that is newsworthy, as well as to the public dissemination of that information (Carpenter, 2008). The issue of “damage limitation” is a crucial one in terms of the ethical norms that govern journalism. When it comes to vulnerable groups, this may necessitate more consideration for those groups and the omission of certain information from news reports, such as the names of minor children, crime victims, or details that are not directly related to the news story, if doing so could, for example, harm someone’s reputation or put them in unnecessary danger. In addition, this may entail additional concern for such groups and the suppression of specific facts from news reporting. Some journalistic ethical codes, most notably those in Europe, forbid making allusions in the news that are discriminatory based on variables such as a person’s race, religion, sexual orientation, or physical or mental impairment. In Resolution 1003, which was enacted in 1993 by the Parliamentary Assembly of the Council of Europe, one of the concepts that were stressed was “the presumption of innocence.” Today, we live in a highly mediated culture that fosters communication and connection between individuals. The magnitude of the breadth of it. Information is created and delivered daily by different types of media. Influence significantly the actions that people take, both individually and collectively (Bowe et al., 2020). The press is capable of performing any one of these tasks at any one time: watchdog, Fourth Estate, or Pillar of Democracy. There is no shadow of a doubt that the media performs a vital role in the public domain. Constantly, it is vital to triumph over a large number of problems as well as attacks. It is crucial to publish immediately, refrain from using spectacular language, and address the issue of work uncertainty. The high rate of staff turnover poses a challenge to the profession. The internal and external pressures can both serve as impediments to an individual’s potential. The organization as a whole suffers from a lack of professionalism, which expresses itself across the recruiting and training procedures. How is it that the media can maintain their standards when they are hampered by so many factors? Because of the necessity to demonstrate that the faith and confidence of the general public are still unshaken. In this day and age of technology, we are more alert than we have ever been. Over time, the framework for journalism was finally built. Journalism is undoubtedly going to be around for cannot only be honest and true in and of itself; rather, in addition to that, they need to be such. When knowledge is made available to the wider public, it is no longer feasible to keep it a secret. The voyage

本书版权归Arcler所有

304

Encyclopedia of Journalism and Mass Communication

will take a long time. This suggests that anybody who chooses to can do so. Those who are prepared to work in disciplines such as journalism and the distribution of information and possess the requisite abilities to accomplish so, the abilities and instruments required for the acquiring, analyzing, and presentation of information.

Figure 14.2: Ethics. Source: https://media.istockphoto.com/photos/ethics-oncept-honesty-integrityand-values-words-picture-id1128201196?k=20&m=1128201196&s=612x612 &w=0&h=1LbWpBJ0VSM59xnrmUrVd9yWipNxeSmnsC7Aiks_kJI=

Information collected from sources having a moral viewpoint is crucial that this be brought to everyone’s notice as fast as possible. Since this is the case, morality, even though it is not law, may be useful when practiced. In October, training for journalists focused on ethical norms was organized. Mauritius and Seychelles were among the nations that took part in Mauritius 2012 as participants. It was established to provide media professionals with the materials they require. Putting their belief in their ability while simultaneously addressing ethical considerations the newsroom’s main objective at all times is to work toward enhancing how the public sees the institution. In the case that there are fewer claims of unethical reporting (and, if there are): There is a potential that assaults on the freedom of the press are not merited. Indeed, officials on the island of Mauritius are eager to lay the blame on the nation’s local media outlets (Bronstein & Fitzpatrick, 2015). They are charged with having prejudice and acting in an unprofessional manner. Invoking the possible harm presented by the

本书版权归Arcler所有

Journalism Ethics: Good News Versus Bad News

305

state is a straightforward process when deploying these protections. With increased limitations and a heightened degree of influence over the media, the government that is currently in power is commonly referred to simply as “the current administration.” Attorney Robertson is going to be the one to develop the new media legislation. Because of this, even though several instances of the government giving incorrect information in reports. It is quite evident that control is not essential. There is no space for discussion here. In a relatively politically active but still relatively tiny society, democracy and free expression are in jeopardy.

14.2. INDEPENDENCE

Figure 14.3: Independence Day in journalism. Source: https://media.istockphoto.com/vectors/3rd-may-world-press-freedomday-illustration-vector-image-vector-id1146014784?k=20&m=1146014784& s=612x612&w=0&h=zpOT4imoAFQY_7GLfuOZd5EduSnoIcx4ERvKmWaFPUo=

本书版权归Arcler所有

306

Encyclopedia of Journalism and Mass Communication

Many governments across the world, particularly in Europe, are assaulting independent journalism. Even in seemingly democratic settings like the European Union, authoritarian regimes frequently attack media outlets that broadcast competing viewpoints. Because of the economic pressures created by news aggregators, news organizations and journalists may be unable to sustain themselves financially. As a result, new strategies, such as utilizing the legal system to discourage investigative journalism, are being tested. The critical function of independent media in a democratic society is directly accountable for all of this. Governments may affect how well-informed their citizens are when it comes time to vote in a variety of ways. We can only ensure that the public receives an accurate view of its government and the policies it pursues if we protect press freedom. As a result, the maintenance of independent media is connected to the preservation of democracy (Blankenship & Gibson, 2016). The word “independent journalism” refers to journalism that is not influenced by the government or any other outside source, such as companies or prominent individuals. Journalism is frequently referred to as “independent media,” which refers to media sources that are not influenced by these factors. Print, radio, television, and the internet are all included in this definition of journalism. When journalists operate independently, the public can more accurately evaluate important issues, such as which politicians or policies should be implemented, because they can get the full picture and are not subjected to any pressure to clean up their reporting, even if it depicted an image that was unfavorable to the government, other influential groups, or even the owner of the news source. Without a free and independent press, democracies cannot operate. An open and well-informed public debate is the bedrock of a democratic society. To make an educated judgment, we must be able to argue and articulate our opinions on a wide range of topics. When journalists are under pressure from a certain political perspective or financial interest, it is not always feasible for them to relay the truth or depict things as they see them. Pressure is rising on the region’s independent media, even in nations with a long history of democracy, such as the European Union. Subjugating the media is a key goal for totalitarian governments in Poland and Hungary. When the government purchases media outlets, whether directly or through wealthy cronies, the purpose is to guarantee that the reporting of those outlets supports those viewpoints or targets persons or organizations that the government deems objectionable. To put it another way, this implies that public-facing news reports may be inaccurate or even intentionally

本书版权归Arcler所有

Journalism Ethics: Good News Versus Bad News

307

manufactured. As a result, voters’ perceptions of their country’s politicians, programs, and overall state are warped, making logical voting more difficult on Election Day. Many countries still cherish media freedom (Biswas & Sipes, 2020). Regardless, Europe is split. Although governments in Western Europe do not utilize the same strategies to stifle dissent as populist authoritarian governments in Europe, democracies in Central and Eastern Europe pose a greater threat to the media. As a result, the government and other strong elites are attempting to muzzle independent media outlets, which they see as a danger to their authority and support. When governments have control over what the public sees and hears, it is much simpler to create a narrative that is constantly in their favor. As a consequence, they may maintain their notoriety and stand as leaders. Because there is no one else in public who can refute what they are saying, the general public prefers to accept what they are saying is true. They have the potential to send erroneous or misleading information. The task of an independent journalist is fraught with danger. Populist authoritarian governments frequently buy state-owned enterprises to achieve indirect but enforced media control. Affluent government supporters, on the other hand, acquire independent news companies with the intention of either becoming them government mouthpieces or abruptly shutting them down. Rules determining which broadcasters obtain extra frequency, which ones air on which cable television channels, how much money a station receives, and whether advertising-income is taxed are all subject to change. As a result of these developments, some broadcasters may no longer be able to support themselves.

Figure 14.4: Independence. Source: https://media.istockphoto.com/vectors/mass-media-background-in-aflat-stylepress-conference-with-vector-id640316564?k=20&m=640316564&s =612x612&w=0&h=W4UZ_23PSeAxwNCwRXpHb_Tr1Svva6Me-TgGSMzbgWQ=

本书版权归Arcler所有

308

Encyclopedia of Journalism and Mass Communication

There are several challenges to independent media in addition to the threat presented by governments. The media ecology is attacking independent journalism as a result of these shifts. News aggregators such as Facebook and Google have absorbed a significant portion of the advertising revenue that media companies have traditionally relied on, undercutting the traditional economic model that has supported high-quality journalism. There are limited funding options for independent, high-quality investigative journalism. Journalists are increasingly relying on press releases to write articles and stay up with online news aggregators. Because they are unable to do a quality assurance check on their work, Reuters and Agence Presse send the same content to different media outlets. To attract more readers, news agencies are frequently inclined to sensationalize tales (Ali et al., 2014). Another risk that independent media companies face is the filing of fake lawsuits. SLAPP (Strategic Litigation Against Public Participation) lawsuits have been filed to intimidate independent media organizations and journalists. The most usual allegations are defamation or libel, although the purpose of the action is not to win. Even if the journalist who was targeted were to win in court, the fear of costly and time-consuming legal action may be enough to keep people silent. Such incidents are occurring at an alarming rate across Europe, threatening democracy and the ability to express oneself. To get the greatest outcomes when protecting independent media, a variety of approaches might be used. By implementing legislative constraints, media watchdogs may be held to a greater degree of objectivity. It also contributes to ensuring that public broadcasters are free of outside influence, have adequate funding, and are dedicated to educating the general public by pressing private media companies to raise their standards. It’s also a good idea to limit the number of media outlets that a single person or group may own to avoid the massive effect they would otherwise have. However, the problem of scarce resources continues. The financial underpinning of independent media has been eroded by digitization. Google and Facebook generate money by gathering news from many sources. A news aggregator charge has been proposed as a strategy to fund independent journalism (Brandon, 2002). This would allow independent journalism to continue, as well as a change in the company’s financial condition. This would be true even if there were no news aggregators. As a result, the EU is keeping a careful check on Europe’s media landscape. The group is addressing some of the threats to independent

本书版权归Arcler所有

Journalism Ethics: Good News Versus Bad News

309

journalism. New anti-SLAPP regulations have spurred discussion over the proper method to handle news aggregators on the internet. This is encouraging, but it is also important to remember that words alone are insufficient. Democracy and the rule of law are under attack in the country’s most eager to eliminate independent media. This is also not a coincidence. To protect media diversity and press freedom, as well as journalists and human rights advocates worldwide, the European Union must act quickly and forcefully. One of these efforts is the recently issued journalist protection guideline. There is also an urgent need for an EU-wide media freedom law to address current issues, such as the recent seizure of media networks by governments in Poland and Hungary.

14.3. FAIRNESS AND IMPARTIALITY

Figure 14.5: Fairness and Impartiality. Source: https://media.istockphoto.com/photos/the-scales-of-justice-backed-bylaw-books-picture-id623448380?k=20&m=623448380&s=612x612&w=0&h =K94_gj-5qFBEeP0gphJ-skl4_1XgK8TE6xh_az5vh7k=

本书版权归Arcler所有

310

Encyclopedia of Journalism and Mass Communication

Being impartial means not taking sides in a conflict. Presenting both sides of an issue fairly is another aspect of objectivity or balance. Even if you have strong opinions on the subject, you should not try to give those who agree with you more time or attention than those who disagree with you. For a professional journalist, objectivity and impartiality are two sides of the same coin. You can treat all parties fairly if you can maintain your impartiality and conceal your ideas (Banda, 2007). While objectivity or prejudice can infiltrate any aspect of journalism, the dangers are greatest when covering politics, labor issues, religion, racism, and sports. Any situation that elicits strong emotions in people can lead to conflict and distorted reporting. The same ideas that help you maintain objectivity may help you maintain objectivity. When working on a piece, set aside your prejudices, take a step back, and try to see the issues from both proponents’ and opponents’ perspectives. Even if it does not change your firm belief that something is terrible, it will increase objectivity. If you are truly committed to a cause, you should cultivate two distinct personalities for your personal and professional lives. Many journalists in democracies are members of a single political party. They may even become members of and vote for a political party. They should not allow their bias to influence their news judgment to maintain their reputation as unbiased journalists. While the partygoer should stay at home, the objective, neutral journalist should report for duty. Being objective is not enough to overcome prejudice. The second stage of this process is recognizing when one party in a disagreement is applying unfair pressure to get their argument into the news (or when another side is not getting its fair share of publicity) (or another side is not getting its fair share of coverage). This could be obvious and simple to address, or it could be subtle and much more difficult.

本书版权归Arcler所有

Journalism Ethics: Good News Versus Bad News

311

14.4. PURSUING JUSTICE

Figure 14.6: Pursuing justice. Source: https://media.istockphoto.com/photos/law-concept-themis-statuejudge-hammer-and-books-picture-id1139699594?k=20&m=1139699594&s =612x612&w=0&h=5qyZwlbFbGUmEuK8Rx96M_N_Kf3sFHQz2Gan8Emn6q8=

Personal prejudices can affect your ability to handle news honestly and impartially in a variety of ways. Every stage of the news production process, from selecting a topic to presenting it on a page or in a bulletin, should be done with risk awareness in mind.

14.5. NEWS COMPILATION In a busy newspaper, decisions about which stories to cover and which to ignore must be made regularly. A fundamental bias may emerge if the stories are not chosen objectively. You do not have the right to censor all positive information about a nation, institution, or people simply because you disagree with them. You must keep the objectivity. This is especially important during election campaigns (Berezhnaia, 2018). You should choose which stories to cover based on the news definition criteria. The news should be current, shocking, exciting, meaningful, and person-centered.

本书版权归Arcler所有

312

Encyclopedia of Journalism and Mass Communication

The exact ratio of these factors may differ depending on your target audience. A journalist working in a pop music radio station’s newsroom may choose different articles than one working for an academic publication. Before you can pick each item fairly and consistently, you must first understand what your audience considers noteworthy.

14.6. SELECTION OF SOURCES Even if you have to overcome a personal bias to report on a topic you find unpleasant, you must be careful to choose impartial sources. It is unethical to choose a beautiful person for an interview on behalf of a cause you support while choosing an unattractive or confused person on behalf of a cause you oppose. Furthermore, if you are required to cover a topic that you dislike, you may not put forth sufficient effort in locating interview subjects and organizing interviews with them. Someone you despise, for example, may refuse to communicate with you. The remark “Oh well, let’s ignore him” is inappropriate. Make every effort to obtain an interview or, at the very least, a statement. If you want to be a good journalist, you must devote your full attention to each story. As a result, high-quality work is produced while objectivity is fostered. Individuals may be unable or unwilling to participate in an interview on occasion. Maybe they’re just overworked, or maybe they despise the sound of their voice. Attempting to persuade them to attend the interview is required, but if that fails, do not say: “They had a chance, at the very least, but they blew it. Only the other side, please.” Continue to seek neutrality, even if it means finding someone else to speak on their behalf or disclosing their previous position on the issue. (However, in your story, you must make it clear that this is not a solution to the current situation.) Some journalists use the phrase “Mr Rahman was unavailable for comment” as a simple shorthand. The phrase “Mr Rahman declined to comment” is commonly heard, but it is unfair because it implies that everyone must interact with reporters (Wanta et al., 2004). When given instructions, you can only “refuse” them. If Mr Rahman does not respond after being asked, write “Mr Rahman declined to respond.” This informs your readers that Mr Rahman refused your invitation to comment. A statement like “refused to comment” implies that you are unable to deliver a fair and balanced report; thus, you should seek comments regularly. If this happens too frequently, you risk losing your reputation as

本书版权归Arcler所有

Journalism Ethics: Good News Versus Bad News

313

a trustworthy and impartial reporter. However, while depicting opposing ideas in a single story is desirable, it is not required to maintain balance. To achieve balance, the following narrative will introduce a new point of view.

14.7. INTERROGATION TECHNIQUES While conducting the interview, keep your objectivity in mind. Even if it is difficult, you must be fair and factual when interviewing someone who holds an opposing viewpoint or has done something you dislike. Remember that you are not a police officer or a prosecutor when questioning a thief or a drug addict. Never, ever ask pointed questions. Maintain your poise. During an interview, the golden rule is to be pleasant while remaining persistent. When recording or taking notes during an interview, use the same judgment and ask fair questions. If any charges have been leveled against the interviewee, do not present them as your own. rather than saying: “You escaped your responsibilities, didn’t you?” you should respond, “Critics accuse you of evading your responsibilities. Have you already done so?” The overall effect is the same; the tone is just a little lighter. This tip is especially important for broadcast journalists because some of them, dubbed “tough interviewers,” enjoy asking difficult questions to create drama. If that’s your strategy, you must apply it to everyone, not just those you disagree with. After finishing your interviews, you must now weave your information into a story. When writing for periodicals such as newspapers, magazines, radio, or television, you must choose which facts to reveal and which to keep private. Your story will most likely be written in the shape of an inverted pyramid, with the most important elements appearing first (Wilkinson et al., 2020). Again, you must be objective when selecting items. Avoid being biased when selecting material to include or quotations to use because every dispute has two sides. If your subject responded, “I support the current government, but with some major reservations,” using the phrase “I support the current government” alone would be incorrect. When quoting, be fair and explicit, emphasizing the significance of each statement about previous ones. If the person you interviewed brought up a specific issue, don’t leave it out just because you disagree with what they said. Each statement should be examined independently in light of the news-making criteria. You can maintain your neutrality in this manner.

本书版权归Arcler所有

314

Encyclopedia of Journalism and Mass Communication

14.8. LANGUAGE The language you use to tell your story is extremely important. It is relatively simple to change the entire meaning of a statement by adding one or two words with a specific meaning. Your interviewee, for example, may have made a few strong remarks. It is incorrect to label someone as “strict” or “abrasive” simply because you like or dislike them. Keep your objectivity. However, keep in mind that there are significant differences between terms like “waved” (which some people naturally do with their fingers while speaking), “wagged” (which people commonly do when reprimanding someone), and “jabbed” (which is used to make a powerful point or charge) (which is used to make a forceful point or accusation) (which is used to make a forceful point or accusation). In reality, such descriptions should be avoided in news articles, but they can be used in features to highlight the subject (Vlad, 2021). Whatever adjective you use in place of the word “said” when attributing facts and opinions may introduce bias into your article. Journalists frequently replace the word “said” with other phrases because they find repetition tiresome. If you intend to use alternatives, keep in mind that some may imply that you agree with the individual mentioned, while others may imply that you disagree. Journalists frequently utilize a thesaurus to provide diversity to their content. Only use a thesaurus if you are fluent in the language. It is generally recommended to consult a dictionary to determine the precise definition of a word. You can reduce the possibility of prejudice showing up in your text by using concise language with few adjectives and adverbs. You must emphasize once more that any statements made by the interviewee are solely theirs and not yours. For example, if he claims that the Tilapia government is brutal, give him credit for the remark, either through a recorded speech or a quotation. Allow people to interpret your statement as their own. Remember that one person’s government is another person’s dictatorship. One man’s junta is another man’s cabinet. Furthermore, it is advisable from a legal standpoint to carefully select your phrasing. In most countries, saying something false about someone and causing them harm can result in legal action. Even if what you say is true, you should not sully someone’s reputation without a valid reason (Udomisor & Udoh, 2015). It is pointless to call someone who murders his daughter a “beast.” If he hasn’t been tried, the courts will decide whether he’s innocent or guilty; if he is found guilty, it will help your account if

本书版权归Arcler所有

Journalism Ethics: Good News Versus Bad News

315

you capture the facts carefully and properly, avoiding graphic details and unfavorable judgments. It will also help you maintain your reputation as an unbiased journalist.

14.9. TRUTH AND ACCURACY

Figure 14.7: Truth. Source: https://media.istockphoto.com/photos/truth-picture-id505750350 ?k=20&m=505750350&s=612x612&w=0&h=2f8oxyUQljc217Ys-CMSSgB4_3Rx2ui_mifChP-mSM=

Accuracy is a critical journalistic requirement and the foundation of good reporting. Because objectivity frequently gives birth to accuracy, its origins are Anglo-American. Despite this, journalists from various journalistic cultures share a commitment to doing things correctly. The history of accuracy is inextricably linked to other fundamental journalism principles such as honesty, factuality, and credibility because it poses epistemological challenges about whether and how journalism can properly, honestly, and factually portray reality. Accuracy is critical to the integrity of journalistic discourse because it requires journalists to determine whether supplied information is true or false. This is evident in the definition of journalism

本书版权归Arcler所有

316

Encyclopedia of Journalism and Mass Communication

as a verification discipline, as well as the importance of accuracy in media self-regulation systems such as press councils and ethical codes. The standard for judging the quality of news reporting is accurate. In reality, numerous studies, the vast majority of which were conducted in Western democracies, have examined the quality of journalistic reporting based on the number of errors that sources cited in the articles felt were made. Despite research demonstrating a link between journalistic accuracy and trustworthiness, news outlets have frequently used the tactic of publishing first and confirming later as journalism migrated online and the news cycle demanded a faster pace of publication (Thorson et al., 2012). As a result, a plethora of online fact-checking and verification services have gained increased global attention and significance, particularly in the current discourse on disinformation.

Figure 14.8: Accuracy. Source: https://thumbs.dreamstime.com/b/accuracy-dart-wood-lettersword-46495552.jpg

A news writer’s job is to find information that can be confirmed and assigned to credible sources. They are not permitted to spread rumors or speculate. They should refrain from interjecting their ideas into news articles. Precision is essential in this procedure.

本书版权归Arcler所有

Journalism Ethics: Good News Versus Bad News

317

Accuracy comes first, then velocity. If you are doubtful, wait until you are certain before publishing. It is not a good example to be the first to make a mistake. Being dependable and precise at all times Journalists must be completely honest in describing what they know and don’t know. Those who believe in you and your news organization will be patiently awaiting your report. They may use your version of events to demonstrate the credibility of another news organization’s rushed narrative. The bulk of major news companies need the following of its journalists: •

using first-hand sources rather than only speaking with people they already know; • ensuring that every fact in their news reporting is supported by sources or other evidence; • verifying the facts provided; • confirming that something happened by using two reliable sources on opposing sides of the issue; and • provide documentation to support all claims and costs. Journalism necessitates research. A reporter may need to study previously published news items while investigating a topic to learn more about the background of an event. They cannot, however, afford to duplicate what they see. The assertions may appear plausible, but they are not always correct (Seamon, 2010). You should not discuss anything unless you are confident that it accurately portrays what happened. Even outdated information should be treated with the same skepticism as new information. Anything added must be confirmed ahead of time. If you must include something that you cannot independently verify, you must cite it. In this case, you should use phrases like “according to” to discourage readers from concluding your claims are true. In this case, it is critical to note that you were unable to validate the provided information.

14.10. KEEPING RECORDS AND TAKING NOTES When most journalists start their careers, they are given a notebook and told not to abandon it. This is due to the possibility that you will need to use your notes as evidence in court someday. It is critical to take correct notes. Notes should, in general, be current and accurate. This implies that, rather than writing information from memory

本书版权归Arcler所有

318

Encyclopedia of Journalism and Mass Communication

after the fact, you must have interacted with trustworthy sources during the incident (Shemberger, 2020). You must also keep track of the research you conducted for the report. This information should be written down in a notepad or, if using a computer, saved in folders and files. Maintain a diary of any email interactions and bookmarks related to your story. However, if anonymity is required or desired, make certain that your records do not identify the people with whom you have communicated.

14.11. NUMBERS, DATES, AND NAMES Working with names, numbers, and dates necessitates extreme accuracy. If you’re going to mention someone, be sure you spell their name correctly. This must also be correct if you are addressing their age. If you’re writing about the number of people who attended a conference, don’t guess; instead, find someone who might know, such as the event organizer, and mention them. When writing about an incident, you must include the exact day, date, and street name where it occurred. In this case, being legally safe is just as important as being accurate. If a reporter and the news organization for which they work publish an article with a misspelled name of a person who allegedly participated in an event on the incorrect date, they may face legal consequences.

14.12. SOCIAL MEDIA MISINFORMATION Given the prevalence of fake news, accuracy is critical. Social media usage has increased, and many audience members increasingly rely on Twitter and Facebook as their primary news sources, hastening the spread of fake news. The issue with social media news transmission is distinguishing the source from the current topic. As more people comment on a post, the initial information, whether false or true, travels further away from the contentious subject. A person may provide a genuine link to a fact-checked, fair, objective, and unbiased news story on a well-known news website. Their distinct emotional reaction, however, is what they write in response. The comment is then responded to by another online user. Along the way, they may incorporate stories or rumors. Someone else then speaks up. Furthermore,

本书版权归Arcler所有

Journalism Ethics: Good News Versus Bad News

319

as the comment thread grows longer, the reader becomes increasingly disconnected from the source (Rakow, 2011). There is no way to get back up. Few people appear to have gone back through the Facebook comments to confirm with the source. The Facebook feed has a distinct personality of its own. Twitter works similarly. The longer the thread of comments continues, with many of them based on an emotional reaction to the previous post rather than the original article, the further we get away from the core issue. This could be useful if the information in the first post was incorrect and needed to be verified. However, it may be problematic if the original post contained accurate information and subsequent users failed to counter it with logic, reliable sources, or verifiable facts, instead drowning out logical debate with falsehoods. People who post comments on social media, unlike the original article’s author, are rarely bound by editorial ethics, let alone accuracy. This phenomenon is frequently classified as post-truth, which is the discourse that occurs after the information has been revealed and is focused on emotional responses rather than factual truths. Journalists who monitor social media feeds are also at risk. The vast majority of newsrooms now have dedicated journalists who monitor social media feeds. Their goal is to find news on social media, not to consume widely disseminated fake news. Fact-checking departments are common in today’s newsrooms, to thoroughly evaluate any information provided by important people or on social media. In the previous five years, a large number of independent fact-checking news websites have emerged. Other organizations include FullFact in the United Kingdom and FactCheck in the United States. They are present to ensure precision.

14.13. ARCHIVING SOURCES A journalist will frequently need to rely on anonymous sources to gather news. Finding and engaging with people who are reluctant to be named for personal or professional reasons may be an important step in the factchecking process. If you believe that the knowledge these individuals possess is critical to the accuracy of your report and you are unable to find appropriate supporting evidence elsewhere, you may be forced to consent to anonymity (Porto, 2005). Make sure your editor is on board before considering giving an interviewee anonymity. There may be times when anonymity is improper; your editor, not you, should make this decision.

本书版权归Arcler所有

320

Encyclopedia of Journalism and Mass Communication

Involving your editor in this process will also provide you and your sources with long-term protection.

14.14. HUMANITY

Figure 14.9: Humanity. Source: https://thumbs.dreamstime.com/t/concept-of-the-evolution-of-humanity-with-a-leap-into-the-unknown-124271105.jpg

The human issue is the source of the virtue of humanity, which is connected to the fundamental ethics of giving. Additionally, it is symbolic of the love and compassion that humans have for one another. When compared to simple justice, humanity is distinguished by the presence of a higher level of charity for the individuals concerned in comparison to the level of fairness that may be found in justice. That is to say, humanity, as well as the attitudes of love, compassion, and social intelligence, are often considered to be distinct attributes, even though justice is typically communicated to every single person. Humanity may be one of six virtues that have persisted across all of human history’s many civilizations. The idea can be traced back to the development of “humane” or “humanist” philosophy during the Renaissance as well as the concept of humanitarianism in the early modern period, which led to contemporary ideas such as “human rights.”

本书版权归Arcler所有

Journalism Ethics: Good News Versus Bad News

321

Journalists should do no damage. It doesn’t matter how horrible the things we publish or broadcast are; what’s important is that we recognize the impact that our words and images have on the lives of other people (Auger & Waters, 2020). Families can be misled into wasting valuable resources (years, thousands of dollars) on treatments that will not lead to improved outcomes for their loved ones if information about fad cures is presented in a way that suggests they are effective. This practice misleads families and has the potential to lead to their suffering. Articles in the news have the potential to redirect attention away from effective therapy and may mislead patients, prompting them to question the viability of their current strategy and potentially undermining work done in the past. This may cause their progress to come to a standstill or perhaps slow it down. The dissemination of false information regarding the causes of autism has the potential to encourage individuals to endanger themselves, their loved ones, and the community as a whole. Consider the potential consequences of disseminating information (for example, a parent whose child is receiving intensive early intervention may misinterpret your writing and believe that their child’s care is “abusive,” while in fact, it is not). Exhibit compassion for those whose lives may be altered as a result of news coverage, and maintain a heightened state of awareness while reporting on issues that affect populations that are marginalized. Examining the connection between empathy and the news brings to mind a statement made by Dr Patrick Plaisance, who said, “The emotional strength of [journalism] resides in the facts, in the capacity to demonstrate, not merely tell.” Look for ways to improve your description of people’s lived experiences with evidence supporting the therapy, and you should do this by looking for strategies. Alternately, bring to the reader’s attention the fact that a person is sharing their personal experience with therapy, but that there are currently no statistics available to support the therapy.

本书版权归Arcler所有

322

Encyclopedia of Journalism and Mass Communication

14.15. ACCOUNTABILITY

Figure 14.10: Accountability. Source: https://media.istockphoto.com/photos/blaming-you-anxious-manjudged-by-different-people-pointing-fingers-picture-id879952484?k=20&m =879952484&s=612x612&w=0&h=T_SaFgWOdePpg5Yo5wzWvUFWrT5VqyuZnF_x2pSnUOE=

A society in which the powerful are accountable to the people, where vital information is shared and explained, where there is room for democratic initiative, and where citizens may discuss viewpoints fairly is the goal of excellent journalism, and the media that support accountability are working toward that goal. This is bolstered by the presence of an independent and diverse ecosystem of media, and by the fact that excellent journalism adheres to ethical rules. The decisions that the authorities make or the legislation that they enact have an impact on society (Perko, 2012). Because of this, society has to have systems in place that can hold individuals accountable for the actions they take. This keeps everything in its normal, homeostatic state.

本书版权归Arcler所有

Journalism Ethics: Good News Versus Bad News

323

Investigative media play an important role as a watchdog and promote accountability in developing nations, particularly those nations that are ruled by non-democratic or authoritarian governments. This duty is especially important in nations where there is a lack of democratic institutions. Without the media, individuals would not only lack access to information but also a venue through which they might campaign for the causes that are important to them. When engaging with groups from civil society, the media may have a significant amount of impact due to the nature of their mission. On the other hand, the media industry needs to start holding itself to the same standards. To clarify, this means that they are obligated to serve the general public. Journalists and other members of the media must remain faithful to the needs and concerns of the populace (Ashley, 2015). To do this, businesses need to be welcoming to all people and they need to understand their audience. The media have the responsibility to do all in their power to reach and reflect their audience in all of its diversity, as well as to provide their audience with information that is easily understandable, pertinent, and accessible. We assist independent journalists as well as media organizations that are involved in investigative journalism internationally. Using the Money Trail program, our primary objective is to unearth instances of unethical financial behavior. In conjunction with Finance Uncovered, Oxfam Novib, and Journalismfund.EU, Money Trail also provides financial support to journalistic teams for them to investigate illegal money flow across international borders, as well as tax evasion and corruption in the regions of Africa, Asia, and Europe. Investigative reporting is difficult for Pakistani journalists to produce since they usually lack the necessary knowledge as well as resources. Free Press Unlimited and the Pakistan Press Foundation have collaborated to develop a curriculum that teaches Pakistani journalists how to write investigative reports that are objective and well-balanced (Popoola, 2014). Journalists frequently rely on anonymous sources—individuals who have confidential information and are willing to share it with the media—to be able to effectively monitor government and industry. They must be able to do so in a safe manner. Journalism and the media ought to be reflective of society and the difficulties that it faces, and they ought to provide a place for all of the various perspectives that are held within society. In the course that we are

本书版权归Arcler所有

324

Encyclopedia of Journalism and Mass Communication

taking on Equality and Inclusion, we place a significant emphasis on this aspect. Another essential aspect of this is the capability of the media to comprehend the people who consume their content. We are the sponsors of several audience polls, which provide independent media outlets with an understanding of who they write for and, perhaps more importantly, how they may reflect the interests of their audience (Pavlik et al., 2020). Our Media Incubator program provides local independent media in the Western Balkans with the ability to interact with their community. One example of this is Kruevac Grad in Serbia, which conducted online surveys on issues affecting the community and sponsored monthly meetings with its followers at popular cafes. The responsibility of the media to disseminate information to the largest possible audience is at the center of our project, which is called the Russian Language News Exchange (Pavlik, 2013). It is a pioneering cross-border union of journalists that makes content from independent media outlets in 15 countries in Eastern Europe, the Baltic region, and Central Asia available on a single platform. The program provides partners with assistance in the process of incorporating new formats into their work, such as the production of live events, podcasts, and videos. Because of these forms, they can collect the content of a higher quality and increase audience participation.

本书版权归Arcler所有

CHAPTER

15

AUDIO-VISUAL COMMUNICATION

CONTENTS

本书版权归Arcler所有

15.1. Types of Audio-Visual Media.......................................................... 326 15.2. Significance of Audio-Visual Communication................................ 340 15.3. Audio Visual Technology in Healthcare.......................................... 344 15.4. Features of Audio-Visual Communication...................................... 346

326

Encyclopedia of Journalism and Mass Communication

15.1. TYPES OF AUDIO-VISUAL MEDIA

Figure 15.1: Journalist preparing audio visual equipment. Source: https://blogs.iadb.org/brasil/pt-br/audiovisual-como-vetor-de-desenvolvimento-urbano/

15.1.1. Filmstrips Originally developed in 1925, the filmstrip projector uses a 35mm film whereby each individual frame comprises a still picture. Before the development of advanced machinery, the filmstrip projector was viewed as “a fair compromise between still and movement formats” (Rampino, 1976, p. 4). There are different forms of filmstrip projectors; comprising or lacking sound, color, manual and programmed systems. The filmstrip projector wasn’t the original machine used to present pictures, as the Magic Lantern was previously produced in the last part of the 1800s, though it was not the final. There have been different progressions in technology as both the magic lantern and filmstrip projector were developed and exchanged these projectors with fresher models (Mills et al., 2019).

1. When was it originally used in education (and how)? Starting in the 1930s, the filmstrip was applied for different purposes including entertainment, advertisement, and to provide informational/ educational footages. In the area of training, filmstrip projectors were attractive since they were light weight, economical, and simple to work with. They were applied to make audio-visual learning opportunities in class. The projector provided a visual help that linked with the subject being examined.

本书版权归Arcler所有

Audio-Visual Communication

327

Educators could apply the filmstrip projector to display images and if the filmstrip was programmed or manual, the educator had the chance to pause on a picture to connect with learners in conversation. Lottick (1952, p. 325) mentioned that educators likewise had the adaptability for add “analysis which may be as lengthy or as brief as the group needs, and which can be adjusted accordingly to the category of the listening group.” Subsequently, one of the advantages of the filmstrip projector was that of being adaptable and versatile for the classroom environment. The filmstrip projector was likewise applied as a way to help educators in teaching specific subjects by giving them tutoring guides. Shaffer (1972) mentioned that majority of the filmstrip collections were combined with lesson plans to help educators in their teaching. He expressed, “The aides frequently give details to follow-up conversation, inquiries for review recommended activities, bibliographies, printed material, and other class tested highlights” (Shaffer, 1972, p. 66). Accordingly, instructors could integrate their own thoughts as well as the ones given with the filmstrip to improve students’ growth journey.

2. Film strip (re)reshaping of educational practice and teaching/ learning

Figure 15.2: Filmstrip projectors display audio-visual content on a flat surface. Source: https://pnubsehistedtech-projectedmedia.weebly.com/filmstrips-projector--parts-and-guidelines-in-using-the-various-projected-media.html

本书版权归Arcler所有

328

Encyclopedia of Journalism and Mass Communication

The film strip projector was developed during the transfer of the dynamic education worldview to the Technocratic age. It was only after the 1930s that the film strip became especially embraced as demonstrated. Film projection displays one of the excellent qualities of the technocratic age which was a one-size-fits all educational strategy (de Castell and Luke, 1968). Film strip projection became a novel intuitive medium that offered a differential informative procedure to teachers, and filled in as a promising potential learning device. The projectors offered instructors a versatile learning device that could be effectively incorporated into the classroom. It could essentially be applied to display visuals to go with illustrations and educator led conversations, or may be applied as audio-visual instruments with the application of the accompanying sound recordings. Film, offered a new domain of acquiring information, teachers were not the end all of information as the requirement for informational guidance transferred to the film strip. Moreover, the intuitive aspect of films expanded the entertainment part of literacy and learning in training. It was additionally applied as a motivator for good behavior as the projection could simply be switched off to get back to “typical classwork” (Casey, Dunn, and Casey, 1960, p. 692). While the filmstrip projector has entertainment value in class, it was contended that applying it to advance learning was better, “The educator himself must be persuaded that the filmstrip will assist him with teaching better than, .not just to entertain the class” (Casey, Dunn, and Casey, 1960, p. 690). Using film and moving symbolism while incredibly progressive at the time required specific ability levels for students. Right now, educational projectors utilize a 35mm film strip which implies that the goal of the imagery was not really clear. In this way, assumed skills in vision and hearing may have made it very challenging for students with visual and hearing impedances to learn. Language and sociocultural hindrances, for example, the presumption that people could comprehend the pictures and messages presented could likewise make an obstruction to learning. Besides, research on the advantages of intuitive recordings for instruction have demonstrated films were shown in a strictly medium-controlled design, without providing the viewers with any chance of changing speed or series of the presentation (Merkt, Weigand, Heier and Schwan, 2011). Thusly affecting the general

本书版权归Arcler所有

Audio-Visual Communication

329

flow and translation of information, because the information progression is transitory in nature, working memory is set off in the cerebrum (Merkt, Weigand, Heier and Schwan, 2011). This may cause mental over-burden, in case there is a mismatch between processing and mental limit, which in general prompts insufficiencies in learning outcomes (Merkt, Weigand, Heier and Schwan, 2011).

15.1.2. Microfilms Microfilm is a storage technique that organizations employed previously to store bulk data in a more modest, more reasonable configuration. Microfilm falls under the subset of microform, encompassing different kinds of storage using a comparative technique. While having a modest form takes less room in storing enormous amounts of files, poor storage conditions can destroy your microfilm making you lose valuable information.

1. Why Businesses Use Microfilm Microfilm was created to allow organizations to store enormous volumes of records in a more modest configuration as opposed to keeping the standard, bulky copies. Microfilm is only an image of the file, basically the same as virtual images made in document conversion nowadays. The key difference? The picture is put away on a film negative which can be seen through equipment that explodes the picture on the screen (Mowlana, 2007). Microform develops the exposure of a file, image, or some other paper file reduced down, normally to 1/25th of the first. The pictures are then kept in this style and can be seen through a machine that amplifies the exposure. Microfilm can likewise be observed through an eye glass to examine the picture if there’s light radiating through. While it isn’t the most advantageous method for examining different files, it is as yet relevant for specific little use cases.

本书版权归Arcler所有

330

Encyclopedia of Journalism and Mass Communication

2. Using Microfilm Files for Business

Figure 15.3: A digital micro film. Source: https://overnight-scanning.eu/blog/what-is-microfilm-begginer-guide/

To use any information kept on microfilm, microfiche, and other microforms, filtering to a computerized form is by a wide margin the best arrangement. By switching to computerized records, you can duplicate, sort out, and control your documents in a flash. Microfilm scanning solutions specialize in changing over the tiny microfilm exposures into computerized records and can save them to any form, whether you require a hard drive or CD. Applying a viewing device to examine documents, individually, appears awkward in the present quick-paced realm of technology. Scanning through microfilm permits individuals to apply these records as adeptly as some other electronic file (Moore & Shemberger, 2019). You can likewise make numerous duplicates of your records easily and store them in various mediums to safeguard the data, from cloud system to an internal file management context. You can keep the first microfilm, microfiche, and different microforms with storage spaces clearly developed to house such exposures with longevity as the key factor. Unique climatic controls that safeguard the film alongside

本书版权归Arcler所有

Audio-Visual Communication

331

assurances taken against catastrophic events, the microforms remain safe and secure. To recap, microfilming is the duplicating of filess, drawings, including other such material at a decreased scale—usually 1:15 to 1:42—for low capacity. Comprehensive microreproduction systems incorporate techniques for recording the film duplicates for simple recovery and re-enlargement. Different duplication techniques permit microfilm records to be widely circulated. Reports, periodicals, and other printed material are normally microfilmed on a 16-mm film with a picture size between 10 × 14 and 14 × 20 mm in a duplicating camera capturing 100-foot lengths of film. Designing drawings of high detail material are microfilmed on 35-mm unperforated films comprising a standard picture size of 32 × 45 mm. recordings of up to 105 mm wide may additionally be applied (Mellado et al., 2020). Mechanized microfilm cameras run persistently, with files being delivered onto a moving band delivered past the camera at a consistent speed while the film runs past a slice at a matched frequency. Readers and their printers are desktop projectors that show the edges re-enlarged to around normal scale on a back projection monitor. In reader printers, the picture may likewise be extended on sharpened paper for standard size enlargements. High level readers have elaborate recovery systems based on frame coding and operate the microfilm rolls on rapid speed until a particular searched photo is achieved. Aperture slots or standard-size transparent coats store microfilm photos as single casings or frame groups. These used microfilms allow for simpler indexing and recovery. Some 35-mm microfilm cameras photo the original file openly on film pre-fitted in the aperture card and processed directly. Commonly applied is the unitized microfiche unit, which delivers around 98 frames, each around 9 × 12 mm, on a 4 × 6-inch film sheet. The microfiche camera restructures the film outline by frame after each exposure. Microfiche with a bigger frame can likewise be delivered by jacketing segments of 16-mm microfilm in multi-channel plastic coats 4 × 6 inches in scale. For more space saving, microfilm photos may be diminished beyond 1:100 on high-resolution photochromic photo materials. Excess fine-grain silver copies similarly hold 3,000-to-4,000 unique frames on a solitary 4 × 6-inch film. This technique, appreciated for complex inventories and similar

本书版权归Arcler所有

Encyclopedia of Journalism and Mass Communication

332

purposes, provide simple recovery of distinct frames yet requires a highamplification reader.

3. Benefits of Microfilm Storage Versus Other Preservation Strategies •

•

• • •

Microfilm permits libraries and different organizations to give access to old, prized and delicate collections through microfilm readers. Microfilm may be impaired with constant use, which is the reason numerous copies are easily made to guarantee protection (Matthes, 2009). Microfilm is compact with considerably reduced storage costs compared to paper files or a digital file. In comparison to paper files, microfilm can lessen space storage requirements by around 95%. Microfilm is likewise practically cost-free when filmed while a computerized file has maintenance costs related with servers and preservation. Microfilm, when stored appropriately, can last for many years and easily accessed without technology use. Because of copyright, microfilm is still among the most outstanding resources for reviewing old papers. Microfilm may be digitized or made accessible for access on a PC.

4. Disadvantages of Microfilm (a) Storage Conditions Different kinds of microfilm, such as vesicular and “Diazo” films will become damaged when exposed to excess temperatures and humidity. Excessive heat and pressure will harm the air pockets that develop the picture with vesicular film. Diazo microfilm may likewise blur when presented to light for a long time. Subsequently, continuous use of this microfilm will break down the image.

(b) Data Retrieval Open reel microfilm may make data recovery tedious as you may have to search successively through the reel. Also, open-reel microfilm may get damaged when not loaded using the reader appropriately. The microfilm

本书版权归Arcler所有

Audio-Visual Communication

333

must be strung by hand using the reader (Maier & Curtin, 2005). Cartridge types of microfilm have more or less similar issues as open reel, however the data recovery tool is more costly than the open-reel microfilm reader.

15.1.3. Slides The slide show is a demonstration of a set of still pictures (slides) on a projection monitor or electronic display instrument, regularly in a coordinated series. The developments might be programmed and at standard durations or they could be manually managed through the presenter or viewer. Individuals who are new to employing MS Office, could frequently face the predicament of understanding the role of Microsoft PowerPoint. In case you have at any point wanted to make a digital presentation, then the odds are you used PowerPoint. Whereas there are a plenty of contenders like Prezi, Apple’s Keynote and different online applications, nevertheless, PowerPoint is still to be replaced.

1. Why Use PowerPoint and What is it used for?

Figure 15.4: PowerPoint is a popular slide presentation tool. Source: https://www.shapechef.com/blog/categories/freebies

PowerPoint was developed by Robert Gaskins, who initially intended PowerPoint for Mac. Nevertheless, Microsoft later obtained the application

本书版权归Arcler所有

334

Encyclopedia of Journalism and Mass Communication

and included it among its Office suite. Robert Gaskins distributed this PowerPoint History website with a fascinating read for the people who are interested about PowerPoint History. The list incorporates different unpublished files and PDFs on PowerPoint since its beginning (Lingwall & Kuehn, 2013).

2. Creating Slides for a Presentation The first thing to comprehend about PowerPoint as a beginner is the idea of slides. These are blank files (as it were), which presents ideas as text, photos, charts and animations. The primary slide is the one introducing the subject of the presentation, which is followed by a procedural sequence which has a particular beginning and end.

3. Embedding Content There are different approaches to embedding content in PowerPoint. The Insert command contains every one of the primary choices required to insert textboxes, photos, diagrams, SmartArt Graphics and even recordings or sound. The choices are essentially clear. You can likewise drop objects like photos to your slides.

4. Formatting Tools When you select a slide object (example a picture, chart or textbox), the Formatting choices tab becomes activated from the Ribbon menu. Upon selecting a picture, the formatting choices for the picture will emerge as Picture Tools, in like manner for charts, the Chart Tools choice becomes active with designing options. As for text, you will view the Drawing Tools choice for altering the font, size, and shade of your text.

5. Animations and Transitions To brighten up your slide presentation, you can apply animations and modifications. Changes are applied between slides and are applied for exchanging a slide though an effect (for example, adding curtains). Alternatively, animations can be selected and added from the Animations tab to give it that impact.

本书版权归Arcler所有

Audio-Visual Communication

335

6. Final Presentation Upon making the slides, press F5 from the keyboard or choose the Slide Show tab from the bottom right hand of PowerPoint. You will see that tapping on the slides or clicking the Right/Left arrow keys from the keyboard permits for easier navigation of the slides. Apply the Right key to advance forward and the Left to reverse when navigating the slides (Lewis & Reese, 2009). The goal of PowerPoint is functioning as a visual guide when the presenter goes around presenting their ideas and sales pitch. Ensure your slides are not excessively wordy and focus on adding just basic bullet points. Using recordings can likewise assist in making sense of lengthy concepts in a brief period with frame, with more accuracy.

15.1.4. Opaque Projector Opaque projectors works by focusing a sharp light onto a nontransparent item. The light is bounced from the item and through a progression of mirrors or crystals and a focal point. This permits the operator to broaden and move a photo from a minor, opaque source to a bigger surface like a monitor or canvas.

1. The Magic Lantern Early projectors were known as “magic lamps.” The earliest ones focused a light through glass slides comprising of painted pictures. As printing advanced, manufacturers could create glass slides with pictures imprinted on them as opposed to painted. These projectors functioned by passing light through a transparent item. This directed light is called “diascopic illumination.”

2. The Episcope Projector In contrary, an episcope projector may apply reflected light to deliver pictures. The projector must focus a brilliant light onto the opaque surface (Lingwall, 2009). The light would be coordinated by a few mirrors or crystals out to the focal point. The projector allows users to concentrate the focal point to modify the size of the picture. Original episcope projectors were applied to view pictures from postcards, images from magazines, promotion cards and even pictures provided by the projector’s developers. An opaque projector or episcope might be applied to observe small, tri-dimensional items like coins, leaves and bugs.

本书版权归Arcler所有

336

Encyclopedia of Journalism and Mass Communication

3. The Epidiascope It didn’t take long before manufacturers consolidated the capacity to observe transparent and opaque items into one instrument. An epidiascope permitted the user to observe the two slides and opaque items. Teachers valued the capacity to project book pages, printed material and photos and slides or transparencies with the goal that the whole classroom could observe the material together. Contemporary classrooms are presently likely to have projectors linked with PCs. Be that as it may, epidiascope projectors unquestionably improved classroom teaching in their time.

4. Opaque Art Projectors Different from overhead and slide projectors, the opaque projector doesn’t expect you to initially transfer your photo to something transparent. The opaque projector permits you to operate directly from a photo so long as the photograph is sufficiently small to fit on the opaque projector’s stage. This capacity has made opaque projectors extremely famous with photorealistic artists (Korkonosenko, 2013). The artist could take a picture of what they might want to draw or paint on a bigger surface. So long the photo can squeeze into the opaque projector, an artist can expand it on the canvas or some other surface for tracing and painting. Different artists even apply this strategy to create paintings on walls.

5. The Most Effective Method to Use the Opaque Projector For artwork, opaque projectors are best applied while dealing with a scope of 18 x 24 inches or bigger. More modest works will gain from other transfer strategies. Opaque projectors for the most part have a surface – where you put your opaque item – of around 5-to-7 inches square. If transferring from a photo, ensure it is sufficiently small to fit. You will put the photo or item on the projector’s stage. Next, switch on the projector and switch off the lights. Then, change the picture until it is your ideal size, and it is situated accurately on the work surface. Be certain the picture isn’t twisted or contorted because of the projector or the material being set at an odd point (Kalatzi et al., 2018). Safeguard the projector so that it won’t move once you start your work. Then, follow the blueprints of the photo onto the canvas, wall and other

本书版权归Arcler所有

Audio-Visual Communication

337

work surface. When you have your blueprints, it’s safe to switch off the projector and continue working on the image details.

6. Opaque Projector Caution Be certain you have sufficient time to totally move the picture before you start. Assuming your projector gets knocked out or twisted, it can be exceptionally frustrating to attempt to get the picture once more into the right position.

15.1.5. Tape Recording On April 14th, 1956, Ampex launched the desk-sized Mark IV, the original commercial video recording device, to a team of TV executives and inventors at the Chicago National Association of Broadcasters (NAB) confab. To mention that this machine impacted the world is a true representation. The tape is covered with fine elements of a magnetic compound, typically an oxide of cobalt, chromium or iron. The covering is typically hung on the tape with a unique folio. Tape recorders can store diverse types of data. The original recording devices were applied to store sound data. In sound recorders, the audio to be recorded is derived by an instrument like a receiver, and changed into an electric flow. The current is led into a transducer in the recording top of the recording device, which changes over it into corresponding magnetic flux varieties that charge the tape particles (Heider et al., 2005). These recording devices generally expect that the recording media including the recording or playback tape heads move in respect to one another. In playback, the tape moves across the playback head (frequently the similar one applied for recording) including the tape’s magnetic field prompts a transducer current. The current is also amplified and applied to create sound through an amplifier. Tape hissing, sound made out of high frequencies during recording, is smothered by a few structures, among them Dolby, Dolby-C, dbx and Dolby-B. Digital sound tape and computerized compact cassette recorders change the sound frequencies into electronic beats, which are then put on the tape. Both remove tape hissing and repeat sound more precisely than along recorders. Advanced tape recorders are likewise used to store computer programs and data. Magnetic tapes can likewise be applied to store video data. Videocassette recorders utilize a pivoting head system to improve tape limit (Holbert & Grill, 2015). The recording heads move toward a path opposite to the tape direction, bringing about diagonal data

本书版权归Arcler所有

338

Encyclopedia of Journalism and Mass Communication

bands across the tape breadth. In the long term, a diversity of tape designs, from reel-to-reel to cassette recorders have been created. Much of the time recording has been swapped by digital recording to magnetic hard drives or solid stage storage.

1. Tape Machine Workings Magnetic tape comprises of a thin sheath of Mylar or comparable material covered with iron oxide. The tape-machine head applies a charge onto the oxide, which activates the oxide particles and really “catches” the signal. The cycle makes some fascinating byproducts, a significant number of which directly impact the recording. Likely the most commonly referred quality for analog recording is the “glow.” Tape warmth adds a degree of color to the sound, essentially relaxing the musical notes attacks, and solidifying the low frequency range. Recording at somewhat hot levels to analog tape can likewise deliver a distortion that functions uniquely with different sorts of music like soul, rock and blues. As multitrack recording developed, various makers started to arise. By the mid-1980s, Ampex was not just a predominant multitrack producer, confronting tough opposition from Studer, 3M, MCI, and Otari. While smaller producers, including Stephens, Aces, and a couple of others jumped in with both feet, 3M, Ampex, Studer and MCI (later owned by Sony), and Otari became the prevailing brands. Every one of these manufacturers’ unique models became appreciated (or rejected) for their mechanical properties and trademark sound. During the day, a recording studio’s design of multitrack tape recording device was viewed as natural for its audio as their acoustics, control center or mouthpiece range (Hanitzsch, 2004).

2. The Subtle Differences A large number of variables impact each machine’s trademark sound, starting with the amplifiers, tape heads and other electronics. Past that, other elements determine the sound of analog recordings, a couple of which are special to every specific machine. Differences in the machine’s speed security (wow and flutter), tape alignment heads and the tape angle, state of the heads (cleanliness, polarization, and so forth), tape tension, and different physical elements are only a couple of the factors that can influence sound recording.

本书版权归Arcler所有

Audio-Visual Communication

339

Other than the machine, different variables can influence the specific sound of analog recorder, including the tape brand operated. Back in the prime of analog, the primary brands of tape each comprised their supporters and detractors. Ampex tape was among the main brands, with their 456 equation being the most definite. Other well-known brands included AGFA and 3M. Every tape formulation imparted its unique subtle recording sound, and each machine must be realigned every time a brand is changed. A few studios made a policy of adhering to one tape brand, yet it was normal for variations to happen even within various groups of a similar tape brand. Tape speed is another key consideration. Quicker tape speeds will more often than not convey cleaner sound quality, since the signal is spread over a bigger space while the signal-to-noise capacity is expanded (Grimes, 2009). The most widely used speeds with dual-inch tape are 15 to 30 IPS (inches a second). While 30 IPS conveys improved general sound quality, most professionals concur that lower frequencies sound greater at 15 IPS. For sure, in the contemporary age, when tape is frequently being applied for its sonic impact, much slower rates win.

3. Achieving the Analog Tape Sound Despite the obvious conveniences of Ampex and Studer, tape machines categorically earns bragging rights, in the present DAW-based world, the truth of the matter is that less of us would want to record on analog tape, regardless of whether we could. Space considerations, price considerations, and the shortage of parts and tape are just the start. The truth of the matter is, tape’s destructive editing may be a sluggish and monotonous in an age where time is indeed money. And, surprisingly, the actual medium is not generally cost effective. One reel of two-inch tape costs roughly $200. At 15 IPS, the tape holds about 30 minutes of 24-track footage time (around 50% of that at 30 IPS). Contrast that with a 2TB hard disk, at present selling for under $100, which can hold long hours of multitrack sound, and you can observe the reason why running tape for each project isn’t a possibility for the majority of us. Luckily, there are various top sounding plug-in processors for the DAW that can bring a portion of that analog tape some warmth and “glue” to the tracks. For instance, Universal Audio’s ridiculously popular Studer A800 Multichannel Tape Recorder is an incredibly loyal imitating of the first machine’s sound, having been carefully developed over a year with contribution from the first producer. As a matter of fact, the sonic contrasts

本书版权归Arcler所有

340

Encyclopedia of Journalism and Mass Communication

between the A800 module and the first A800 equipment are negligible, so that most of the world’s key engineers choose to apply the module for their everyday work (Guo et al., 2016). Besides the obvious convenience factor, among the greatest benefits of tape emulation modules is their adaptability. You can consider processing just specific tracks, instead of the entire mix—granting the warmth, low-end knock, and firm properties of tape to drums and bass tracks, for instance, without including any tape tone to vocals and guitars. Or, you can include only a touch of tape compression, without oversaturating matters how a genuine two-track machine may. Despite how you decide to execute it, the analog tape sound can be a major help to your digital blend. Consider a UAD tape emulation module such as the Ampex ATR-102 for a firm “glue” on the mix bus. Or on the other hand, you might find the Studer A800 is only what is required to add a touch of understated warmth and low-end mix punch. Tape lives on.

15.2. SIGNIFICANCE OF AUDIO-VISUAL COMMUNICATION

Figure 15.5: Equipment used in audio-visual communication. Source: https://www.hostudents.com/bachelor-in-audiovisual-communicationuniversidad-ceu-san-pablo-e-88-en

本书版权归Arcler所有

Audio-Visual Communication

341

1. Introduction Audio Visual Aids are additionally known as educational material. Audio generally means “visual” and “hearing” which is observed by seeing. Thus, all such guides, which try to make the information clear to us through common sense are known as “Instructional Material” or “Audio Visual Aids.” These learning material make the learning conditions as genuine as possible and give direct knowledge through the hearing and seeing organs (Gotlieb et al., 2017). In this way, any instruments which may be applied to make the learning prospects more concrete and persuasive, more sensible and dynamic can be viewed as audio media content. We learn through the senses. Senses are a form of knowledge. Every sense organ assist with understanding the situation. A large portion of the knowledge, which we obtain from the school, emerges from our ears and eyes.

2. Description of Audio Visual Aids As highlighted by Burton. These are tangible targets and photos which animate and emphasize on the learning process. It is a teachable (motivation, order and stimulation) learning process.

3. Purposes of Teaching Aids

本书版权归Arcler所有

• • • • • • • • •

To improve teachers abilities which assists with making the teaching-learning procedure viable Make students active in the class Communicate them as per their capacities Create lesson plan and develop interest To make students great observers Develop simple and justifiable learning material Follow learner centered educational experience To develop interest in various groups To make the teaching process practical

Encyclopedia of Journalism and Mass Communication

342

4. Types It can be described on the context of sensory experience. Since people derive their experiences primarily from direct tactile contact. Having this in mind, it can be characterized into three primary groups: • •

•

Audio Aids, including Tape-recorder, Gramophone, Language laboratory, Radio, Linguaphone, and Audio tape player Visual Aids including, Black and white board, Maps, Pictures, Chart, Models, Text-books, Flash-cards, Print materials, Slide projector, Transparency and so forth. Audiovisual Aids examples include LCD project, TV, Computer, VCD player, Film projector, Virtual Classroom, and Multimedia among others (Grömping, 2019).

5. Benefits of Audio-Visual Aids

本书版权归Arcler所有

•

•

•

Challenging the Attention of Learners: The educator who utilizes devices can typically see that the consideration of the entire class is on the lesson, besides that ought not to be distracted. It is for the most part obvious when educators are managing the lower classes. Devices must never be involved by the educator as basic attractions or entertainment. Exposure to audio-visual or visual material and nothing more is certainly not an educative strategy. Stimulating the Imagination and Establishing the Cognitive Imagery: Devices stimulate and build the imagination of the students. Mental imagery can be applied as thought vehicle and for explaining opinions and ideas. Since imagination plays a key role in any technology and learning, including every one of the advancements are as minds and they developed to be the hypotheses and standards. Consequently, the imagination is necessary for increment in the classroom thus it is the obligation of the educators, particularly those handling secondary and lower class levels to apply the classroom teaching aids since they play a fundamental part in enhancing the imagination and they assist in idea-provocation among the learners (Gillmor, 2016). Facilitating the Understanding of Learners: The most broadly recognized use of aids, visual or audio-visual, its application in promoting understanding. Language learning may be obtained through using filmstrips, motion pictures, models and pictorial

Audio-Visual Communication

343

material to promote course books and printed literature. Material devices offer significance, and variety and imagery body to the thought given by the educator. What’s more, abstract concepts can be made solid in the learners’ minds by the application of instruments like charts and diagrams, and these are exceptionally valuable in determining math and other sociologies. The graph is a significant tool in addressing numerical facts. • Providing Incentive for Action: The application of devices in education, for example, photos and objects can stimulate emotion and impel the person to activity or learning. The educator should choose the right type of instrument to entice the students to a beneficial intellectual activity during class time. Requesting that the pupils gather photos representing air, water, and land transportation which inspire them to action or quick learning. Developing the Capacity to Listen: The capacity to listen can be improved best using audio-visual contents. It is likewise the obligation of the learning institution and other educational establishments, to give preparing to students to be great listeners first. Furthermore, listening is first approach to learning in the strategy.

6. Who benefits from Visual Aids? While every youngsters can take benefit with visual aids for learning. It is more useful for those with the following conditions:

本书版权归Arcler所有

• • • • • • • •

Language disorder Autism spectrum disorder Down syndrome Learning disabilities Those studying English as a second language Delayed development Hearing impairment Attention deficit hyperactivity disorder (ADHD).

344

Encyclopedia of Journalism and Mass Communication

15.3. AUDIO VISUAL TECHNOLOGY IN HEALTHCARE

Figure 15.6: Doctors communicating through audiovisual devices. Source: https://www.teceze.com/mdt-rooms-audio-visualpresentations?page=4

Have you contemplated the advantages of audio-visual technology for the medical business? Audio-visuals are a fundamental part of contemporary medical technology. Answers for the medical sector offer an expansive range of innovative advantages. Communication among doctors and patients, clinical staff, EMS staff, and clinical students has highly improved (George, 2011). Fast and efficient communication is the way to practical communication in the medical business. It is a new age where communication boundaries have been removed, permitting for greater information retention and improved results.

1. Easy Communication with Patients Among the key advantages of audio-visual technology is it makes chatting with patients more practical. Nurses and physicians frequently face situations needing hands free dual-way communication with patients, particularly when they can’t be in a similar room, (for example, when patients carry an infection). Audio visual innovation, including paging and radio systems,

本书版权归Arcler所有

Audio-Visual Communication

345

permits staff to speak rapidly and effectively with patients. Two-way sound systems at nursing and technical stations allow faculty to speak with patients by holding a button, and patients can give hands-free responses.

2. Conflict resolution Misconceptions and miscommunication can occur so rapidly and bring about a contention, making conflict resolution an incredible advantage of using audio-visual innovation. Legally owning and storing sound recordings can be looked into to resolve verbal struggles between patients, healthcare directors, and receptionists. Whereas human memory can frequently be fluffy and defective, sound gives a verbal recording of what occurred.

3. Improved collaboration Audio-visual technology is perfect for enhancing visual communication in business. Healthcare experts can partner to give more practical consideration to patients by collaborating on patient cases, providing second opinions, or permitting pharmacists to consult remotely with physicians. Notwithstanding these advantages, digital video capture and streaming function can allow physicians and paramedics to team up in real time, which can mean the distinction between life and demise (Fleming, 2014). One more major advantage of audio-visual technology is that it simplifies the process for staff to secure, sort out, and share significant treatment data like EMRs, procedural videos, cat scans, x-rays and much more.

4. Training and Learning for Medical Students Contemporary medical technology allows healthcare experts to work and communicate more proficiently in introducing potential diagnoses and therapy to patients of different staff members. When appraisal and treatment can be used faster, the results can frequently positively affect the length and duration of the clinical issue. Among the advantages of audio-visual technology is that it permits physicians, EMT staff, and other personnel to go about their duties faster and all the more effectively, meaning greater consideration provided to patients.

5. Telemedicine Telemedicine has been a rising pattern throughout the recent years with mental wellness services alongside physician/patient follow-ups. Guaranteeing your

本书版权归Arcler所有

346

Encyclopedia of Journalism and Mass Communication

facility enjoys the best communication systems. Telemedicine solutions (teleconferencing and video conferencing) likewise permit healthcare operators to team up to improve patient care and work efficiency for their groups. Universally, individuals are living more connected lives because of developments in communication technology. For example, Virtual Healthcare Conferencing Systems permit you to work quickly. Audio-visual technology altogether affects the healthcare industry in numerous ways. It has enhanced communication between medical services experts and patients, and it very well may be utilized to improve efficiency and give better care to patients (Fuerst et al., 2015). The advantages of this technology will develop as it keeps on advancing.

15.4. FEATURES OF AUDIO-VISUAL COMMUNICATION There are various features, which can be applied to determine the level to which audio-visual aids can be of value in the learning process. Furthermore, their qualities rely on the degree to which they help with accomplishing the targets of instruction and perhaps following these principles:

15.4.1. Relevancy The aid should be appropriate to the topic for improvement. Vital standard value is the degree to which any aid is directly connected with the comprehension of the subject material. A visual aid may be exact to the best subtleties understandable and intriguing but to be of little worth in view of its irrelevance. For example; a teacher is attempting to clarify the pattern of sodium iota with the assistance of a diagram. Assuming the teacher utilizes precise and useful diagrams on which there are such countless other atomic designs drawn. Naturally, it will lose a large part of the practical benefit. Maybe as a result of the presence of insignificant material on the diagram.

15.4.2. Accuracy It is vital to ensure the audio-visual aids are accurate and exact, however it is hard to make them as precise as wanted and anticipated. The chart is continuously missing the 3D property and should be seen from a fixed standard spot. The models supersede both these challenges yet are only seldom precise in the picture details. The exactness of understanding is

本书版权归Arcler所有

Audio-Visual Communication

347

frequently considering as significant as opposed to the precision of the sample (Esser & Umbricht, 2014). For instance; assuming that somebody is teaching the key parts of flowers through drawing an apple bloom. It is of some little significance whether the chart looks like the apple bloom in everything but the significant thing will be to explain the connection of such parts as petals, stamens, and so on consequently a decent outline may be of much more value than a precise photo. Subsequently it is the precision of the idea delivered as opposed to the precision in visual guides which is significant. Furthermore, an educator utilizes a large model of leaf plants in class and afterward views that the students when provided the particular plant don’t consider it the same thing.

15.4.3. Interest Audio-Visual use makes the learning process quite simple and its nonexistence makes it revolting, its presence makes the work an honor and its absence makes it a lack of wellspring of knowledge. The principal role of the educator is to develop interest in students for learning any topic taught. Practically every one of the learners must be educated with the assistance of audiovisual aids that can be made more fascinating with the assistance of charts, pictures, and films.

本书版权归Arcler所有

本书版权归Arcler所有

BIBLIOGRAPHY

1.

2.

3.

4.

5. 6.

7.

本书版权归Arcler所有

Ali, M. M., Azeez, F., Ashraf, C. A., Juni, M. S., Karim, J., & Haider, I., (2014). Mass communication according to Islam and Islamic perspective of ethics and responsibility in journalism. International Journal of Research (IJR), 1(10), 626–644. Ashley, S., (2015). Media literacy in action? What are we teaching in introductory college media studies courses? Journalism & Mass Communication Educator, 70(2), 161–173. Auger, G. A., & Waters, R. D., (2020). An analysis of discussions on academic dishonesty in journalism & mass communication educator, volumes 1 through 74. Journalism & Mass Communication Educator, 75(4), 483–499. Banda, F., (2007). An appraisal of the applicability of development journalism in the context of public service broadcasting (PSB). Communication, 33(2), 154–170. Berezhnaia, M. A., (2018). Theoretically proven: Journalism is alive! Медиаобразование, 2, 122–124. Biswas, M., & Sipes, C., (2020). DataViz and data storytelling education in journalism and communication programs. Teaching Journalism & Mass Communication, 10(2), 28–41. Blankenship, J. C., & Gibson, R., (2016). Learning alone, together: Closed-cohort structure in an online journalism and mass communication graduate program. Journalism & Mass Communication Educator, 71(4), 425–439.

350

8.

9.

10.

11.

12.

13.

14.

15.

16.

17.

18.

本书版权归Arcler所有

Encyclopedia of Journalism and Mass Communication

Bowe, B. J., Blom, R., & Davenport, L. D., (2020). Journalism and mass communication capstone course: Bringing it all together? Communication Teacher, 34(2), 161–174. Brandon, W., (2002). Experiential learning: A new research path to the study of journalism education. Journalism & Mass Communication Educator, 57(1), 59–66. Bronstein, C., & Fitzpatrick, K. R., (2015). Preparing tomorrow’s leaders: Integrating leadership development in journalism and mass communication education. Journalism & Mass Communication Educator, 70(1), 75–88. Carpenter, S., (2008). How online citizen journalism publications and online newspapers utilize the objectivity standard and rely on external sources. Journalism & Mass Communication Quarterly, 85(3), 531– 548. Claussen, D. S., (2007). Journalism educators making international declarations. Journalism & Mass Communication Educator, 62(2), 135–138. Cohen, J., (2001). Symposium: Journalism and mass communication education at the crossroads. Journalism & Mass Communication Educator, 56(3), 4–27. Curtin, P. A., Russial, J., & Tefertiller, A., (2018). Reviewers’ perceptions of the peer review process in journalism and mass communication. Journalism & Mass Communication Quarterly, 95(1), 278–299. Detenber, B. H., Cenite, M., Malik, S., & Neo, R. L., (2012). Examining education and newsroom work experience as predictors of communication students’ perceptions of journalism ethics. Journalism & Mass Communication Educator, 67(1), 45–69. Deuze, M., (2002). National news cultures: A comparison of Dutch, German, British, Australian, and US journalists. Journalism & Mass Communication Quarterly, 79(1), 134–149. Domingo, D., Quandt, T., Heinonen, A., Paulussen, S., Singer, J. B., & Vujnovic, M., (2008). Participatory journalism practices in the media and beyond: An international comparative study of initiatives in online newspapers. Journalism Practice, 2(3), 326–342. Duffield, L., (2011). Media skills for daily life: Designing a journalism program for graduates of all disciplines. Pacific Journalism Review, 17(1), 141–156.

Bibliography

351

19. Esser, F., & Umbricht, A., (2014). The evolution of objective and interpretative journalism in the Western press: Comparing six news systems since the 1960s. Journalism & Mass Communication Quarterly, 91(2), 229–249. 20. Fleming, J., (2014). Media literacy, news literacy, or news appreciation? A case study of the news literacy program at stony brook university. Journalism & Mass Communication Educator, 69(2), 146–165. 21. Fuerst, S., Schoenhagen, P., & Bosshart, S., (2015). Mass communication is more than a one-way street: On the persistent function and relevance of journalism. Javnost-the Public, 22(4), 328–344. 22. George, C., (2011). Beyond professionalization: A radical broadening of journalism education. Journalism & Mass Communication Educator, 66(3), 257–267. 23. Gillmor, D., (2016). Towards a new model for journalism education. Journalism Practice, 10(7), 815–819. 24. Gotlieb, M. R., McLaughlin, B., & Cummins, R. G., (2017). 2015 survey of journalism and mass communication enrollments: Challenges and opportunities for a changing and diversifying field. Journalism & Mass Communication Educator, 72(2), 139–153. 25. Grimes, T., (2009). Principles of convergent journalism/broadcast journalism: A critical introduction. Journalism & Mass Communication Educator, 64(2), 206. 26. Grömping, U., (2019). Practical R for mass communication and journalism. Journal of Statistical Software, 90, 1–3. 27. Guo, L., Vargo, C. J., Pan, Z., Ding, W., & Ishwar, P., (2016). Big social data analytics in journalism and mass communication: Comparing dictionary-based text analysis and unsupervised topic modeling. Journalism & Mass Communication Quarterly, 93(2), 332–359. 28. Hanitzsch, T., (2004). Journalists as peacekeeping force? Peace journalism and mass communication theory. Journalism studies, 5(4), 483–495. 29. Heider, D., McCombs, M., & Poindexter, P. M., (2005). What the public expects of local news: Views on public and traditional journalism. Journalism & Mass Communication Quarterly, 82(4), 952–967. 30. Holbert, R. L., & Grill, C., (2015). Clarifying and expanding the use of confirmatory factor analysis in journalism and mass communication

本书版权归Arcler所有

352

31.

32.

33.

34.

35.

36.

37.

38.

39.

40.

41.

本书版权归Arcler所有

Encyclopedia of Journalism and Mass Communication

research. Journalism & Mass Communication Quarterly, 92(2), 292– 319. Kalatzi, O., Bratsas, C., & Veglis, A., (2018). The principles, features and techniques of data journalism. Studies in Media and Communication, 6(2), 36–44. Korkonosenko, S., (2013). Professional deontology of journalism: Moral interpretation. Journalism and Mass Communication, 3(8), 477–485. Lewis, S. C., & Reese, S. D., (2009). What is the war on terror? Framing through the eyes of journalists. Journalism & Mass Communication Quarterly, 86(1), 85–102. Lingwall, A., & Kuehn, S., (2013). Measuring student self-perceptions of writing skills in programs of journalism and mass communication. Journalism & Mass Communication Educator, 68(4), 365–386. Lingwall, A., (2009). IMC and its integration into programs of journalism and mass communication. Journal of Advertising Education, 13(2), 25–36. Maier, S. R., & Curtin, P. A., (2005). Self-efficacy theory: A prescriptive model for teaching research methods. Journalism & Mass Communication Educator, 59(4). Matthes, J., (2009). What’s in a frame? A content analysis of media framing studies in the world’s leading communication journals, 1990– 2005. Journalism & Mass Communication Quarterly, 86(2), 349–367. Mellado, C., Georgiou, M., & Nah, S., (2020). Advancing journalism and communication research: New concepts, theories, and pathways. Journalism & Mass Communication Quarterly, 97(2), 333–341. Mills, A., Sanders, A. K., & Hussain, S. S., (2019). Fitting it all in? A census of undergraduate ethics and leadership courses in accredited US journalism and mass communication programs. Journalism & Mass Communication Educator, 74(3), 265–275. Moore, K., & Shemberger, M., (2019). Mass communication andragogy for teaching online adult learners. Teaching Journalism & Mass Communication, 9(1), 35–40. Mowlana, H., (2007). Theoretical perspectives on Islam and communication. In: The Global Intercultural Communication Reader (pp. 303–316). Routledge.

Bibliography

353

42. Pavlik, J. V., (2013). A vision for transformative leadership: Rethinking journalism and mass communication education for the twenty-first century. Journalism & Mass Communication Educator, 68(3), 211– 221. 43. Pavlik, J. V., Alsaad, A. A., & Laufer, P., (2020). Speaking truth to power: Core principles for advancing international journalism education. Journalism & Mass Communication Educator, 75(4), 392– 406. 44. Perko, T., (2012). The role of mass media and journalism in risk communication. Journal of Mass Communication and Journalism, 2, e110. 45. Popoola, M., (2014). New media usage for communication and selfconcept among journalism and mass communication students in Oyo State, Nigeria. New Media and Mass Communication, 26(2014), 22– 34. 46. Porto, M., (2005). The principle of diversity in journalism. Brazilian Journalism Research, 1(1), 135–153. 47. Rakow, L. F., (2011). Commentary: Interviews and focus groups as critical and cultural methods. Journalism & Mass Communication Quarterly, 88(2), 416–428. 48. Seamon, M. C., (2010). The value of accreditation: An overview of three decades of research comparing accredited and unaccredited journalism and mass communication programs. Journalism & Mass Communication Educator, 65(1), 9–20. 49. Shemberger, M., (2020). Logic modeling: Building a journalism department’s assessment plan using accreditation standards. Teaching Journalism & Mass Communication, 10(1), 21–28. 50. Thorson, E., Wicks, R., & Leshner, G., (2012). Experimental methodology in journalism and mass communication research. Journalism & Mass Communication Quarterly, 89(1), 112–124. 51. Udomisor, I., & Udoh, A. P., (2015). Professional demand of objectivity and its effect on media objectivity in conflict management in journalism. Advances in Journalism and Communication, 3(01), 1. 52. Vlad, T., (2021). Global journalism and mass communication education in the digital era. Global Journalism: Understanding World Media Systems, 69.

本书版权归Arcler所有

354

Encyclopedia of Journalism and Mass Communication

53. Wanta, W., Golan, G., & Lee, C., (2004). Agenda setting and international news: Media influence on public perceptions of foreign nations. Journalism & Mass Communication Quarterly, 81(2), 364– 377. 54. Wilkinson, J. S., Davie, W. R., & Taylor, A. J., (2020). Journalism education in black and white: A 50-year journey toward diversity. Journalism & Mass Communication Educator, 75(4), 362–374.

本书版权归Arcler所有

INDEX

A

C

Abuse 20, 23, 24, 28, 29 Academy Awards 93 active listening 202, 205, 224 advertising 152, 153, 154, 155, 156, 157, 158, 159, 160, 161, 162, 164, 165, 166, 167, 168, 169, 170, 171, 172 advertising campaigns 153, 154, 159, 165 advertising-income 307 alternate sourcing 231 Amazon 156, 159 Artificial intelligence 181, 184 Artificial media 181 Attorney Robertson 305 Audio Visual Aids 341 Augmented reality (ar) 256 authoritarianism 65

cable television channels 307 Censorship 70, 71 civil conflict 3 Climate change 189 climate change coverage 278 climate research 278 climate science journalism 278 cloud system 330 collaboration 281, 284, 285, 291, 293 communication media 95 community 74 competitive advantage 284, 287, 289 confidence 205 conflict 104, 115, 119 corruption 3, 6, 11 COVID-19 pandemic 73 creativity 40 crime 3 crime victims 303 critical commentary 178 critical thinking 40 Cultural differences 86 cultural heritage 23

B Behavioral interviewing 207 blogging 178, 179, 180, 181 blogging systems 259 Business ethics 41

本书版权归Arcler所有

356

Encyclopedia of Journalism and Mass Communication

Culture 81, 84 Cybersecurity 141 D damage limitation 303 data mining 214, 215 data security 141 deepfakes 181, 182, 185 democracy 305, 306, 308 democratic society 306 demographics 278 Department of Justice (DOJ) 135 digital change 254 digital hygiene 22 digital media 22 direct mail advertising 153 E Economic pressures 66, 68 educational institutions 131 email addresses 134 empathy 205 Engagement 239, 247 entertainment media 278 ethnicity 23, 28 F Facebook 41 filmstrip projector 326, 327, 328 free expression 305 G gender-based harassment 20, 23 gender equality 22, 24 Gender stereotypes 278 Google AdSense 156, 157, 160 H harassment 139

本书版权归Arcler所有

hate crimes 91 human rights 139, 140, 142 I independent journalism 306, 308, 309 independent media 306, 307, 308, 309, 324 influencer marketing 266, 268, 271 information progression 329 information technology 230, 231, 234, 236 Instagram 159, 162 Instructional Material 341 International Fact-Checking Network 218 internet advertising 156, 157, 161, 164, 165 Internet harassment 139 Intimidation 68, 69 Investigative journalism 64 J Jordanian labor law 24 Journalism 39, 40, 41, 42, 43, 48, 51, 52, 53, 54, 56, 57, 58 journalistic sources 128 M marketing messages 154 mass communication 41 mass-communication media 86 mass media 104, 106, 107, 113, 115 media administration 256 media ethics 302 Media globalization 96 Media Literacy 232

Index

media messages 232 Media research 230 microfiche 330, 331 Microfilm 329, 330, 332 microforms 330 Microsoft 156, 160 Microsoft PowerPoint 333 military dictatorship 65 mock suicides 105

357

Propaganda 103, 104, 113, 121, 122 Public discourse 234 public opinion 104, 121 public relations 2, 3, 7, 9, 13 public transportation 153, 172 Q Qualitative research 232 Qualitative research design 232

N

R

national image management 6 nation branding 3, 6 news organization 40 non-governmental organizations (NGOs) 6 nonverbal communication 205

racism 91 Research communication 242, 243

O Office of Public Affairs (OPA) 136 online abuse 21 online information 180 organizational cultures 284 P personality 23 Phone numbers 134 pincer movement 5 political instability 3 politics 213, 217 prejudice 91 Pre-press production 233 press announcement 279 printed material 327, 331, 336 problem solving 40 professionalism 303 project management 246

本书版权归Arcler所有

S segregation 91 sexual content 181 sickness 3 skeptic analysis 178 SLAPP (Strategic Litigation Against Public Participation) 308 Snapchat 257, 266 social behavior 84 social interconnects 95 social media 41 Social media influencer marketing 265 Social Media Influencers (SMI) 265 social media networks 215 social network 261 Strategic collaborations 280, 284 strategic media alliances 284 Strategic relationships 284 Syndication 260 synthetic media 181, 183, 184, 185, 186 Synthetic media 182, 186

358

Encyclopedia of Journalism and Mass Communication

T television newscasts 105 transit advertising 153 U user-generated content (UGC) 129, 131 V verbal communication 202, 203, 205, 222, 223, 224 video cameras 129

本书版权归Arcler所有

violence 65, 66, 71 violent crimes 105 virtual reality (VR) 256 voyage 303 W webcams 129 Weblogging 178 WhatsApp 41 working memory 329 workplace communication 205

skills

本书版权归Arcler所有

本书版权归Arcler所有